TOOLS
Tradeify Rule Changes
Every Tradeify rule and policy change on record, dated and shown before and after.
Tradeify Premier
58 help center pages tracked
Changes by day
PremierTradeify · Select Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterThe $300,000 account maximum changed from 3 per user to 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
Section: Available Account Sizes
− The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
Section: Purchase Restrictions
− - Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
After
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
Section: Available Account Sizes
+ The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
Section: Purchase Restrictions
+ - Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is limited to 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
Section: Available Account Sizes
− The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
+ The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
Section: Purchase Restrictions
− - Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
+ - Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is limited to 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Pricing Reference | Tradeify Help CenterSelect 300K maximum changed from 3 per user to 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
With the 50% Consistency Add-on, Select 25K costs $135, and a reset costs $90. Select 50K costs $205, and a reset costs $135. Select 100K costs $329, and a reset costs $209. Select 150K costs $459, and a reset costs $299. The 50% Consistency Add-on is not available on the Select 300K.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
− The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Lightning 25K costs $345. Lightning 50K costs $492. Lightning 100K costs $660. Lightning 150K costs $796.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
After
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
With the 50% Consistency Add-on, Select 25K costs $135, and a reset costs $90. Select 50K costs $205, and a reset costs $135. Select 100K costs $329, and a reset costs $209. Select 150K costs $459, and a reset costs $299. The 50% Consistency Add-on is not available on the Select 300K.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
+ The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Lightning 25K costs $345. Lightning 50K costs $492. Lightning 100K costs $660. Lightning 150K costs $796.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
With the 50% Consistency Add-on, Select 25K costs $135, and a reset costs $90. Select 50K costs $205, and a reset costs $135. Select 100K costs $329, and a reset costs $209. Select 150K costs $459, and a reset costs $299. The 50% Consistency Add-on is not available on the Select 300K.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
− The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
+ The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 lifetime purchases per user, with V1 and V2 counted together, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Lightning 25K costs $345. Lightning 50K costs $492. Lightning 100K costs $660. Lightning 150K costs $796.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
PremierTradeify · Rules: Supported Trading Products / Assets | Tradeify Help CenterArticle reorganized by asset class instead of contract size, added position limit explanations, added complete supported symbol list, and added micro currency contracts M6E and M6A.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT, plus EUREX on Tradovate accounts.
The full list is below.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
− ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables below are supported.
Section: Equity Index Futures
− MINI Equity Futures
− Supported mini equity futures: E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME; Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
− E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
− E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
− E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
− E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
− Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
− EUREX Index Futures
− Supported EUREX index futures: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
− Mini-DAX | FDXM | EUREX
− Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | EUREX
− VSTOXX | FVS | EUREX
− STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | EUREX
− Micro DAX Index | FDXS | EUREX
− Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | EUREX
− EUREX Bond Futures
− Supported EUREX bond futures: Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX.
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Euro-Buxl | FGBX | EUREX
− Euro-Schatz | FGBS | EUREX
− Euro-Bobl | FGBM | EUREX
− Euro-Bund | FGBL | EUREX
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
− Supported currency futures: Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME; Euro FX (6E) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Australian Dollar | 6A | CME
− British Pound | 6B | CME
− Japanese Yen | 6J | CME
− Canadian Dollar | 6C | CME
− Swiss Franc | 6S | CME
− Euro FX | 6E | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
− Supported agricultural futures: Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Lean Hogs | HE | CME
− Live Cattle | LE | CME
− Feeder Cattle | GF | CME
− Soybeans | ZS | CBOT
− Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT
− Corn | ZC | CBOT
− Wheat | ZW | CBOT
− Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT
− MINI Energy Futures
− Supported mini energy futures: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX; E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX
− Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX
− E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX
− E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX
− MINI Metal Futures
− Supported mini metal futures: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Gold | GC | COMEX
− Copper | HG | COMEX
− Silver | SI | COMEX
− E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX
− Platinum | PL | NYMEX
− Palladium | PA | NYMEX
− MICRO Futures (All Types)
− Supported micro futures: Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME; E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX; Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME; E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT
− Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME
− Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME
− Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME
− E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX
− Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX
− E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME
− E-Micro Euro | M6E | CME
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
After
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT, plus EUREX on Tradovate accounts.
The full list is below.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
+ ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the Metal Futures section below.
⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables below are supported.
Section: Equity Index Futures
+ How this list is organized: products are grouped by asset class. Each group lists its full-size, E-mini and micro contracts together, so you can see every size of a product in one place.
+ Contract sizes and position limits: full-size and E-mini contracts have the same position limits as a mini, so each one counts as one mini. Micros count as one tenth of a mini (10 micros = 1 mini). For example, one Gold (GC) or one Crude Oil (CL) contract uses the same position limit as one E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract.
+ All supported root symbols: ES, NQ, YM, RTY, EMD, NKD, MES, MNQ, MYM, M2K, CL, NG, QM, QG, MCL, GC, SI, HG, PL, PA, QO, MGC, 6E, 6B, 6J, 6A, 6C, 6S, M6E, M6A, ZC, ZW, ZS, ZL, ZM, HE, LE, GF, FDAX, FDXM, FDXS, FESX, FSXE, FXXP, FVS, FGBL, FGBM, FGBS, FGBX. If a root symbol is not on this list, it is not supported.
+ Equity Index Futures
+ Supported equity index futures. Full-size: Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME. E-mini: E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME. Micro: Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | E-mini | CBOT
+ E-Mini Russell | RTY | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | E-mini | CME
+ Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | Full-size | CME
+ Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | Micro | CME
+ Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | Micro | CME
+ Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | Micro | CBOT
+ Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | Micro | CME
+ Energy Futures
+ Supported energy futures. Full-size: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX. E-mini: E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX. Micro: Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Crude Oil | CL | Full-size | NYMEX
+ Natural Gas | NG | Full-size | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | E-mini | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | E-mini | NYMEX
+ Micro Crude Oil | MCL | Micro | NYMEX
+ Metal Futures
+ Supported metal futures. Full-size: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX. E-mini: E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX. Micro: E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Gold | GC | Full-size | COMEX
+ Silver | SI | Full-size | COMEX
+ Copper | HG | Full-size | COMEX
+ Platinum | PL | Full-size | NYMEX
+ Palladium | PA | Full-size | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Gold | QO | E-mini | COMEX
+ E-Micro Gold | MGC | Micro | COMEX
+ Micro Silver (SIL) is not supported. MGC is the only supported micro metal.
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
+ Supported currency futures. Full-size: Euro FX (6E) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME. Micro: E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Euro FX | 6E | Full-size | CME
+ British Pound | 6B | Full-size | CME
+ Japanese Yen | 6J | Full-size | CME
+ Australian Dollar | 6A | Full-size | CME
+ Canadian Dollar | 6C | Full-size | CME
+ Swiss Franc | 6S | Full-size | CME
+ E-Micro Euro | M6E | Micro | CME
+ E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | Micro | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
+ Supported agricultural futures (grains and livestock). Full-size: Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT; Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Corn | ZC | Full-size | CBOT
+ Wheat | ZW | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybeans | ZS | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybean Oil | ZL | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybean Meal | ZM | Full-size | CBOT
+ Lean Hogs | HE | Full-size | CME
+ Live Cattle | LE | Full-size | CME
+ Feeder Cattle | GF | Full-size | CME
+ EUREX Index Futures (Tradovate only)
+ Supported EUREX index futures. Full-size: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX. Mini: Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX. Micro: Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ DAX Index | FDAX | Full-size | EUREX
+ Mini-DAX | FDXM | Mini | EUREX
+ Micro DAX Index | FDXS | Micro | EUREX
+ Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | Full-size | EUREX
+ Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | Micro | EUREX
+ STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | Full-size | EUREX
+ VSTOXX | FVS | Full-size | EUREX
+ EUREX Bond Futures (Tradovate only)
+ Supported EUREX bond futures. Full-size: Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Euro-Bund | FGBL | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Bobl | FGBM | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Schatz | FGBS | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Buxl | FGBX | Full-size | EUREX
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT, plus EUREX on Tradovate accounts.
The full list is below.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
− ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
+ ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the Metal Futures section below.
⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables below are supported.
Section: Equity Index Futures
− MINI Equity Futures
− Supported mini equity futures: E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME; Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
− E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
− E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
− E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
− E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
− Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
− EUREX Index Futures
− Supported EUREX index futures: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
− Mini-DAX | FDXM | EUREX
− Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | EUREX
− VSTOXX | FVS | EUREX
− STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | EUREX
− Micro DAX Index | FDXS | EUREX
− Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | EUREX
− EUREX Bond Futures
− Supported EUREX bond futures: Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX.
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Euro-Buxl | FGBX | EUREX
− Euro-Schatz | FGBS | EUREX
− Euro-Bobl | FGBM | EUREX
− Euro-Bund | FGBL | EUREX
+ How this list is organized: products are grouped by asset class. Each group lists its full-size, E-mini and micro contracts together, so you can see every size of a product in one place.
+ Contract sizes and position limits: full-size and E-mini contracts have the same position limits as a mini, so each one counts as one mini. Micros count as one tenth of a mini (10 micros = 1 mini). For example, one Gold (GC) or one Crude Oil (CL) contract uses the same position limit as one E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract.
+ All supported root symbols: ES, NQ, YM, RTY, EMD, NKD, MES, MNQ, MYM, M2K, CL, NG, QM, QG, MCL, GC, SI, HG, PL, PA, QO, MGC, 6E, 6B, 6J, 6A, 6C, 6S, M6E, M6A, ZC, ZW, ZS, ZL, ZM, HE, LE, GF, FDAX, FDXM, FDXS, FESX, FSXE, FXXP, FVS, FGBL, FGBM, FGBS, FGBX. If a root symbol is not on this list, it is not supported.
+ Equity Index Futures
+ Supported equity index futures. Full-size: Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME. E-mini: E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME. Micro: Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | E-mini | CBOT
+ E-Mini Russell | RTY | E-mini | CME
+ E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | E-mini | CME
+ Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | Full-size | CME
+ Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | Micro | CME
+ Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | Micro | CME
+ Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | Micro | CBOT
+ Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | Micro | CME
+ Energy Futures
+ Supported energy futures. Full-size: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX. E-mini: E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX. Micro: Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Crude Oil | CL | Full-size | NYMEX
+ Natural Gas | NG | Full-size | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | E-mini | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | E-mini | NYMEX
+ Micro Crude Oil | MCL | Micro | NYMEX
+ Metal Futures
+ Supported metal futures. Full-size: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX. E-mini: E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX. Micro: E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Gold | GC | Full-size | COMEX
+ Silver | SI | Full-size | COMEX
+ Copper | HG | Full-size | COMEX
+ Platinum | PL | Full-size | NYMEX
+ Palladium | PA | Full-size | NYMEX
+ E-Mini Gold | QO | E-mini | COMEX
+ E-Micro Gold | MGC | Micro | COMEX
+ Micro Silver (SIL) is not supported. MGC is the only supported micro metal.
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
− Supported currency futures: Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME; Euro FX (6E) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Australian Dollar | 6A | CME
− British Pound | 6B | CME
− Japanese Yen | 6J | CME
− Canadian Dollar | 6C | CME
− Swiss Franc | 6S | CME
− Euro FX | 6E | CME
+ Supported currency futures. Full-size: Euro FX (6E) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME. Micro: E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Euro FX | 6E | Full-size | CME
+ British Pound | 6B | Full-size | CME
+ Japanese Yen | 6J | Full-size | CME
+ Australian Dollar | 6A | Full-size | CME
+ Canadian Dollar | 6C | Full-size | CME
+ Swiss Franc | 6S | Full-size | CME
+ E-Micro Euro | M6E | Micro | CME
+ E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | Micro | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
− Supported agricultural futures: Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Lean Hogs | HE | CME
− Live Cattle | LE | CME
− Feeder Cattle | GF | CME
− Soybeans | ZS | CBOT
− Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT
− Corn | ZC | CBOT
− Wheat | ZW | CBOT
− Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT
− MINI Energy Futures
− Supported mini energy futures: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX; E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX
− Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX
− E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX
− E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX
− MINI Metal Futures
− Supported mini metal futures: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Gold | GC | COMEX
− Copper | HG | COMEX
− Silver | SI | COMEX
− E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX
− Platinum | PL | NYMEX
− Palladium | PA | NYMEX
− MICRO Futures (All Types)
− Supported micro futures: Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME; E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX; Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME; E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME.
− Name | Symbol | Exchange
− Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT
− Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME
− Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME
− Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME
− E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX
− Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX
− E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME
− E-Micro Euro | M6E | CME
+ Supported agricultural futures (grains and livestock). Full-size: Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT; Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Corn | ZC | Full-size | CBOT
+ Wheat | ZW | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybeans | ZS | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybean Oil | ZL | Full-size | CBOT
+ Soybean Meal | ZM | Full-size | CBOT
+ Lean Hogs | HE | Full-size | CME
+ Live Cattle | LE | Full-size | CME
+ Feeder Cattle | GF | Full-size | CME
+ EUREX Index Futures (Tradovate only)
+ Supported EUREX index futures. Full-size: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX. Mini: Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX. Micro: Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ DAX Index | FDAX | Full-size | EUREX
+ Mini-DAX | FDXM | Mini | EUREX
+ Micro DAX Index | FDXS | Micro | EUREX
+ Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | Full-size | EUREX
+ Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | Micro | EUREX
+ STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | Full-size | EUREX
+ VSTOXX | FVS | Full-size | EUREX
+ EUREX Bond Futures (Tradovate only)
+ Supported EUREX bond futures. Full-size: Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
+ Name | Symbol | Size | Exchange
+ Euro-Bund | FGBL | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Bobl | FGBM | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Schatz | FGBS | Full-size | EUREX
+ Euro-Buxl | FGBX | Full-size | EUREX
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
PremierTradeify · SPIFF Performance Bonuses - NEW! | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierTradeify · Live Funded Account Scaling and Risk Parameters | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierTradeify · Live Funded Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierTradeify · Introducing Tradeify LIVE: Unlocking Your Full Earning Potential | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierTradeify · Affiliates | Tradeify Help CenterRemoved $5 commission for activation fees; evaluation reset commission remains at $5.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
If you would like to apply to become an affiliate for Tradeify please fill in the form on the page below:
- https://tradeify.co/become-an-affiliate/
Already applied? Contact to follow up on your application status.
How Referral Tracking Works
All of our affiliates will receive a unique link that users can click to access our site. This link stores a cookie on the user's device for 60 days, ensuring you receive credit for any purchases they make, even if they use our active discount promotion. The only exception is if the user applies another affiliate's discount code (Last Click), which our system prioritizes.
Commission Rates
Tradeify gives affiliates 15% commission for Growth and Select Evaluation plans and 10% commission for Lightning Funded plans.
Section: Commission Rates
− We also give affiliates $5 for evaluation resets and $5 for activation fees.
Payout Schedule
The minimum amount to receive a payout is $1,000, and payments are paid via Plane. If your earnings do not meet the $1,000 threshold in a given month, your earnings will roll over to subsequent months until the minimum payout threshold is achieved.
When you meet the $1,000 commission threshold by the end of a month, you will receive an email notification with further instructions the following week. Affiliates will be invited to Plane to receive their payment before their affiliate payout due date.
Affiliates are paid out every 15th of the month for the prior month's commissions. Affiliates may receive their payments early but will receive the payment by the 15th of each period.
e.g. Commissions earned between October 1 – October 31 will be paid on November 15th.
Troubleshooting Affiliate Payouts
- If you believe you have met the $1,000 threshold but did not receive a payout, ensure you have completed all onboarding processes necessary for payment.
- If all requirements are completed and you still do not receive payment, contact support to escalate the matter for review.
- If you have met the threshold but have not received an expected email notification, verify that it has not been filtered into your spam folder. If issues persist, contact Tradeify's support team.
After
If you would like to apply to become an affiliate for Tradeify please fill in the form on the page below:
- https://tradeify.co/become-an-affiliate/
Already applied? Contact to follow up on your application status.
How Referral Tracking Works
All of our affiliates will receive a unique link that users can click to access our site. This link stores a cookie on the user's device for 60 days, ensuring you receive credit for any purchases they make, even if they use our active discount promotion. The only exception is if the user applies another affiliate's discount code (Last Click), which our system prioritizes.
Commission Rates
Tradeify gives affiliates 15% commission for Growth and Select Evaluation plans and 10% commission for Lightning Funded plans.
Section: Commission Rates
+ We also give affiliates $5 for evaluation resets.
Payout Schedule
The minimum amount to receive a payout is $1,000, and payments are paid via Plane. If your earnings do not meet the $1,000 threshold in a given month, your earnings will roll over to subsequent months until the minimum payout threshold is achieved.
When you meet the $1,000 commission threshold by the end of a month, you will receive an email notification with further instructions the following week. Affiliates will be invited to Plane to receive their payment before their affiliate payout due date.
Affiliates are paid out every 15th of the month for the prior month's commissions. Affiliates may receive their payments early but will receive the payment by the 15th of each period.
e.g. Commissions earned between October 1 – October 31 will be paid on November 15th.
Troubleshooting Affiliate Payouts
- If you believe you have met the $1,000 threshold but did not receive a payout, ensure you have completed all onboarding processes necessary for payment.
- If all requirements are completed and you still do not receive payment, contact support to escalate the matter for review.
- If you have met the threshold but have not received an expected email notification, verify that it has not been filtered into your spam folder. If issues persist, contact Tradeify's support team.
If you would like to apply to become an affiliate for Tradeify please fill in the form on the page below:
- https://tradeify.co/become-an-affiliate/
Already applied? Contact to follow up on your application status.
How Referral Tracking Works
All of our affiliates will receive a unique link that users can click to access our site. This link stores a cookie on the user's device for 60 days, ensuring you receive credit for any purchases they make, even if they use our active discount promotion. The only exception is if the user applies another affiliate's discount code (Last Click), which our system prioritizes.
Commission Rates
Tradeify gives affiliates 15% commission for Growth and Select Evaluation plans and 10% commission for Lightning Funded plans.
Section: Commission Rates
− We also give affiliates $5 for evaluation resets and $5 for activation fees.
+ We also give affiliates $5 for evaluation resets.
Payout Schedule
The minimum amount to receive a payout is $1,000, and payments are paid via Plane. If your earnings do not meet the $1,000 threshold in a given month, your earnings will roll over to subsequent months until the minimum payout threshold is achieved.
When you meet the $1,000 commission threshold by the end of a month, you will receive an email notification with further instructions the following week. Affiliates will be invited to Plane to receive their payment before their affiliate payout due date.
Affiliates are paid out every 15th of the month for the prior month's commissions. Affiliates may receive their payments early but will receive the payment by the 15th of each period.
e.g. Commissions earned between October 1 – October 31 will be paid on November 15th.
Troubleshooting Affiliate Payouts
- If you believe you have met the $1,000 threshold but did not receive a payout, ensure you have completed all onboarding processes necessary for payment.
- If all requirements are completed and you still do not receive payment, contact support to escalate the matter for review.
- If you have met the threshold but have not received an expected email notification, verify that it has not been filtered into your spam folder. If issues persist, contact Tradeify's support team.
PremierTradeify · Trading Commission Fees | Tradeify Help Center$6.00 is now $5.98.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Agricultural Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Lean Hogs | HE | CME | $9.20
Live Cattle | LE | CME | $11.20
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME | $7.20
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT | $15.20
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT | $7.20
Corn | ZC | CBOT | $7.20
Wheat | ZW | CBOT | $17.20
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Section: Energy Futures
− Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $6.00
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
After
Agricultural Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Lean Hogs | HE | CME | $9.20
Live Cattle | LE | CME | $11.20
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME | $7.20
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT | $15.20
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT | $7.20
Corn | ZC | CBOT | $7.20
Wheat | ZW | CBOT | $17.20
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Section: Energy Futures
+ Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $5.98
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
Agricultural Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Lean Hogs | HE | CME | $9.20
Live Cattle | LE | CME | $11.20
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME | $7.20
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT | $15.20
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT | $7.20
Corn | ZC | CBOT | $7.20
Wheat | ZW | CBOT | $17.20
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Section: Energy Futures
− Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $6.00
+ Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $5.98
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
PremierTradeify · How Do I Get Funded After Passing an Evaluation? | Tradeify Help CenterBase account size options now include $25K minimum; activation fees removed for all account types including Advanced legacy.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Section: Funded Account Starting Balance
− Your funded account starts at your base account size ($50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Section: Activation Fees
− Activation fees vary by account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
− - Advanced (legacy): $125
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
After
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Section: Funded Account Starting Balance
+ Your funded account starts at your base account size ($25K, $50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Section: Activation Fees
+ There are no activation fees on any current account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Section: Funded Account Starting Balance
− Your funded account starts at your base account size ($50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
+ Your funded account starts at your base account size ($25K, $50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Section: Activation Fees
− Activation fees vary by account type:
+ There are no activation fees on any current account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
− - Advanced (legacy): $125
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Pricing Reference | Tradeify Help CenterValues changed: $5.66 to $5.98, $5.66 to $5.98.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
− The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.66 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
− CL (Crude Oil) | $5.66
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
After
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
+ The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.98 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
+ CL (Crude Oil) | $5.98
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
− The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.66 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
+ The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.98 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
− CL (Crude Oil) | $5.66
+ CL (Crude Oil) | $5.98
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
PremierTradeify · Introducing the New Select Plan & Changes to the Live Program | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Tradeify 3.0 – Program Updates & Improvements | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Grand Cup 2: Group Stage & Head-to-Head Bracket | Tradeify Help CenterTime zone abbreviation changed from EST to ET in four update checkpoint times and one explanatory reference.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Day timer
"Day ending in:" at the top counts down to the end of the current matchup. When it hits zero, the round is scored and the winner advances to the next round with a new account.
Balance visibility — what you and your opponent see
This is the part most traders ask about, so read it carefully.
⚠️ The balance shown for your opponent reflects realized profit only. That means closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never visible on the matchup card.
- Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see any of it
- The same applies in reverse — your unrealized swings are invisible to them
- Balances on the matchup card only move when trades close
If your opponent's balance is sitting at $50,000.00, it doesn't necessarily mean they haven't traded. It means they either haven't closed any trades yet, or their closed P&L nets to zero. They could be holding a sizable open position you can't see.
You can always see your own true balance, including unrealized P&L, inside Tradovate or TradeSea. The matchup card is the public-facing scoreboard, not your live account.
When does the matchup balance update?
The matchup card updates four times during the session, at:
Section: Day timer
− - 9:00 PM EST
− - 8:00 AM EST
− - 12:00 PM EST
− - 3:00 PM EST
Between checkpoints, the published number is frozen — even if you or your opponent have closed trades since the last update. Your account in Tradovate / TradeSea is always live in real time; only the public scoreboard waits for the next checkpoint.
Minimum activity requirement
⚠️ You must place at least 3 trades longer than 10 seconds during the matchup.
This requirement prevents inactivity wins. A "trade longer than 10s" means the position was held for more than 10 seconds before being closed. If you don't hit the minimum by the time the matchup ends, you forfeit the round — even if your balance is higher than your opponent's. The requirement is shown directly below the matchup card as a reminder.
Trading rules (same as the Qualifier)
The trading constraints from Stage 1 apply on every Stage 2 matchup account, but the consequences are stricter:
- Max position size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros. Combinations are not allowed.
- End-of-day review with disqualification: Every Grand Cup account is reviewed for max allocation breaches. Adding more contracts to a position than allowed — including by combining minis and micros — results in disqualification from the competition. There are no resets in Stage 2, so a position-limit breach means elimination, not just a failed account.
What's different in Stage 2
- 🔄 Fresh account every round. Each matchup runs on a brand-new $50,000 account. Profits don't compound across rounds — you're proving yourself on a clean slate every time.
- ❌ No trailing drawdown. The drawdown floor that existed in the Qualifier doesn't apply here. Your round is decided head-to-head, not by a fixed loss limit. You can lose any amount during a matchup without "failing" the account; you just lose the round if you finish below your opponent.
- ❌ No resets. The Reset button is disabled in the bracket. If you lose your matchup or get disqualified for a position-limit breach, you're out of the competition.
- ✅ Head-to-head scoring. Your overall rank doesn't matter — only your matchup does. You can have the second-best balance in the entire bracket and still lose if your specific opponent's balance is higher.
- ✅ Win-rate tiebreaker. If both balances finish equal at the end of a matchup, the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades advances.
- 🤠 Bounties on Outlaws. Eliminate an Outlaw and earn at least $5,000 on top of your final placement prize.
- ✅ Themed rounds. Each round has its own name and identity. Check "View full bracket" to see what's ahead.
Troubleshooting
Do my profits from the previous round carry over?
- No. Each matchup is a fresh $50,000 account. The bracket is win-or-go-home; the win itself advances you, not the dollar amount you won by.
My opponent's balance hasn't moved in a while.
Section: Troubleshooting
− - The matchup card only updates four times per session (9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM EST). Between checkpoints it's frozen. Your opponent may have been actively trading the whole time — you just won't see it until the next checkpoint.
My opponent shows $50,000.00 but I'm certain they've been trading.
- They're either holding open positions with unrealized P&L, or their closed trades net to zero. Unrealized P&L is never displayed on the matchup card. Wait for the next checkpoint to see if anything has been realized.
The day timer hit zero but the round hasn't resolved.
- Final scoring runs after the matchup closes. Give it a few minutes. If your round still hasn't resolved after that, contact support.
I forgot the 3-trade minimum and the matchup is over.
- The matchup is forfeited. There are no resets in Stage 2.
My balance and my opponent's balance ended exactly equal.
- Win rate decides the round — the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades in that matchup advances.
My account was disqualified for going over the position limit.
- There are no resets in Stage 2. A position-limit breach is an elimination from the competition.
I drew an Outlaw — what happens if I beat them?
- You earn the bounty listed next to that Outlaw on the bracket (at least $5,000, sometimes higher) on top of any standard prize for your final placement. You also advance to the next round as normal.
After
Day timer
"Day ending in:" at the top counts down to the end of the current matchup. When it hits zero, the round is scored and the winner advances to the next round with a new account.
Balance visibility — what you and your opponent see
This is the part most traders ask about, so read it carefully.
⚠️ The balance shown for your opponent reflects realized profit only. That means closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never visible on the matchup card.
- Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see any of it
- The same applies in reverse — your unrealized swings are invisible to them
- Balances on the matchup card only move when trades close
If your opponent's balance is sitting at $50,000.00, it doesn't necessarily mean they haven't traded. It means they either haven't closed any trades yet, or their closed P&L nets to zero. They could be holding a sizable open position you can't see.
You can always see your own true balance, including unrealized P&L, inside Tradovate or TradeSea. The matchup card is the public-facing scoreboard, not your live account.
When does the matchup balance update?
The matchup card updates four times during the session, at:
Section: Day timer
+ - 9:00 PM ET
+ - 8:00 AM ET
+ - 12:00 PM ET
+ - 3:00 PM ET
Between checkpoints, the published number is frozen — even if you or your opponent have closed trades since the last update. Your account in Tradovate / TradeSea is always live in real time; only the public scoreboard waits for the next checkpoint.
Minimum activity requirement
⚠️ You must place at least 3 trades longer than 10 seconds during the matchup.
This requirement prevents inactivity wins. A "trade longer than 10s" means the position was held for more than 10 seconds before being closed. If you don't hit the minimum by the time the matchup ends, you forfeit the round — even if your balance is higher than your opponent's. The requirement is shown directly below the matchup card as a reminder.
Trading rules (same as the Qualifier)
The trading constraints from Stage 1 apply on every Stage 2 matchup account, but the consequences are stricter:
- Max position size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros. Combinations are not allowed.
- End-of-day review with disqualification: Every Grand Cup account is reviewed for max allocation breaches. Adding more contracts to a position than allowed — including by combining minis and micros — results in disqualification from the competition. There are no resets in Stage 2, so a position-limit breach means elimination, not just a failed account.
What's different in Stage 2
- 🔄 Fresh account every round. Each matchup runs on a brand-new $50,000 account. Profits don't compound across rounds — you're proving yourself on a clean slate every time.
- ❌ No trailing drawdown. The drawdown floor that existed in the Qualifier doesn't apply here. Your round is decided head-to-head, not by a fixed loss limit. You can lose any amount during a matchup without "failing" the account; you just lose the round if you finish below your opponent.
- ❌ No resets. The Reset button is disabled in the bracket. If you lose your matchup or get disqualified for a position-limit breach, you're out of the competition.
- ✅ Head-to-head scoring. Your overall rank doesn't matter — only your matchup does. You can have the second-best balance in the entire bracket and still lose if your specific opponent's balance is higher.
- ✅ Win-rate tiebreaker. If both balances finish equal at the end of a matchup, the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades advances.
- 🤠 Bounties on Outlaws. Eliminate an Outlaw and earn at least $5,000 on top of your final placement prize.
- ✅ Themed rounds. Each round has its own name and identity. Check "View full bracket" to see what's ahead.
Troubleshooting
Do my profits from the previous round carry over?
- No. Each matchup is a fresh $50,000 account. The bracket is win-or-go-home; the win itself advances you, not the dollar amount you won by.
My opponent's balance hasn't moved in a while.
Section: Troubleshooting
+ - The matchup card only updates four times per session (9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM ET). Between checkpoints it's frozen. Your opponent may have been actively trading the whole time — you just won't see it until the next checkpoint.
My opponent shows $50,000.00 but I'm certain they've been trading.
- They're either holding open positions with unrealized P&L, or their closed trades net to zero. Unrealized P&L is never displayed on the matchup card. Wait for the next checkpoint to see if anything has been realized.
The day timer hit zero but the round hasn't resolved.
- Final scoring runs after the matchup closes. Give it a few minutes. If your round still hasn't resolved after that, contact support.
I forgot the 3-trade minimum and the matchup is over.
- The matchup is forfeited. There are no resets in Stage 2.
My balance and my opponent's balance ended exactly equal.
- Win rate decides the round — the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades in that matchup advances.
My account was disqualified for going over the position limit.
- There are no resets in Stage 2. A position-limit breach is an elimination from the competition.
I drew an Outlaw — what happens if I beat them?
- You earn the bounty listed next to that Outlaw on the bracket (at least $5,000, sometimes higher) on top of any standard prize for your final placement. You also advance to the next round as normal.
Day timer
"Day ending in:" at the top counts down to the end of the current matchup. When it hits zero, the round is scored and the winner advances to the next round with a new account.
Balance visibility — what you and your opponent see
This is the part most traders ask about, so read it carefully.
⚠️ The balance shown for your opponent reflects realized profit only. That means closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never visible on the matchup card.
- Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see any of it
- The same applies in reverse — your unrealized swings are invisible to them
- Balances on the matchup card only move when trades close
If your opponent's balance is sitting at $50,000.00, it doesn't necessarily mean they haven't traded. It means they either haven't closed any trades yet, or their closed P&L nets to zero. They could be holding a sizable open position you can't see.
You can always see your own true balance, including unrealized P&L, inside Tradovate or TradeSea. The matchup card is the public-facing scoreboard, not your live account.
When does the matchup balance update?
The matchup card updates four times during the session, at:
Section: Day timer
− - 9:00 PM EST
− - 8:00 AM EST
− - 12:00 PM EST
− - 3:00 PM EST
+ - 9:00 PM ET
+ - 8:00 AM ET
+ - 12:00 PM ET
+ - 3:00 PM ET
Between checkpoints, the published number is frozen — even if you or your opponent have closed trades since the last update. Your account in Tradovate / TradeSea is always live in real time; only the public scoreboard waits for the next checkpoint.
Minimum activity requirement
⚠️ You must place at least 3 trades longer than 10 seconds during the matchup.
This requirement prevents inactivity wins. A "trade longer than 10s" means the position was held for more than 10 seconds before being closed. If you don't hit the minimum by the time the matchup ends, you forfeit the round — even if your balance is higher than your opponent's. The requirement is shown directly below the matchup card as a reminder.
Trading rules (same as the Qualifier)
The trading constraints from Stage 1 apply on every Stage 2 matchup account, but the consequences are stricter:
- Max position size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros. Combinations are not allowed.
- End-of-day review with disqualification: Every Grand Cup account is reviewed for max allocation breaches. Adding more contracts to a position than allowed — including by combining minis and micros — results in disqualification from the competition. There are no resets in Stage 2, so a position-limit breach means elimination, not just a failed account.
What's different in Stage 2
- 🔄 Fresh account every round. Each matchup runs on a brand-new $50,000 account. Profits don't compound across rounds — you're proving yourself on a clean slate every time.
- ❌ No trailing drawdown. The drawdown floor that existed in the Qualifier doesn't apply here. Your round is decided head-to-head, not by a fixed loss limit. You can lose any amount during a matchup without "failing" the account; you just lose the round if you finish below your opponent.
- ❌ No resets. The Reset button is disabled in the bracket. If you lose your matchup or get disqualified for a position-limit breach, you're out of the competition.
- ✅ Head-to-head scoring. Your overall rank doesn't matter — only your matchup does. You can have the second-best balance in the entire bracket and still lose if your specific opponent's balance is higher.
- ✅ Win-rate tiebreaker. If both balances finish equal at the end of a matchup, the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades advances.
- 🤠 Bounties on Outlaws. Eliminate an Outlaw and earn at least $5,000 on top of your final placement prize.
- ✅ Themed rounds. Each round has its own name and identity. Check "View full bracket" to see what's ahead.
Troubleshooting
Do my profits from the previous round carry over?
- No. Each matchup is a fresh $50,000 account. The bracket is win-or-go-home; the win itself advances you, not the dollar amount you won by.
My opponent's balance hasn't moved in a while.
Section: Troubleshooting
− - The matchup card only updates four times per session (9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM EST). Between checkpoints it's frozen. Your opponent may have been actively trading the whole time — you just won't see it until the next checkpoint.
+ - The matchup card only updates four times per session (9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM ET). Between checkpoints it's frozen. Your opponent may have been actively trading the whole time — you just won't see it until the next checkpoint.
My opponent shows $50,000.00 but I'm certain they've been trading.
- They're either holding open positions with unrealized P&L, or their closed trades net to zero. Unrealized P&L is never displayed on the matchup card. Wait for the next checkpoint to see if anything has been realized.
The day timer hit zero but the round hasn't resolved.
- Final scoring runs after the matchup closes. Give it a few minutes. If your round still hasn't resolved after that, contact support.
I forgot the 3-trade minimum and the matchup is over.
- The matchup is forfeited. There are no resets in Stage 2.
My balance and my opponent's balance ended exactly equal.
- Win rate decides the round — the trader with the higher percentage of profitable closed trades in that matchup advances.
My account was disqualified for going over the position limit.
- There are no resets in Stage 2. A position-limit breach is an elimination from the competition.
I drew an Outlaw — what happens if I beat them?
- You earn the bounty listed next to that Outlaw on the bracket (at least $5,000, sometimes higher) on top of any standard prize for your final placement. You also advance to the next round as normal.
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws — Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterTime zone abbreviations changed from EST to ET in four locations throughout the article.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- Trailing Drawdown: $2,500
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. Abuse will result in account failure at end of session.
How It Works:
- Open qualification — all entrants compete on equal footing
- Ranked by highest ending account balance
- Top 1,000 traders advance to Stage 2
Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
Duration: Tuesday, May 26 (market open, evening) — Tuesday, June 9 (market close). All times ET.
Field: 1,024 traders total — 1,000 Stage 1 qualifiers + 24 Outlaws.
A duel, not a leaderboard.
Section: Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
− Stage 2 is built like a duel — two traders, one trading day, one shot to outscore your opponent before the bell. Each matchup runs a full Tradeify trading day: opening at 6:00 PM EST and closing at 5:00 PM EST the following day.
You and your opponent trade independently on identical fresh $50,000 simulated accounts — no trailing drawdown, no resets, max position size of 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — but you're being scored against each other.
The twist: balances only reveal four times during the session.
Unlike the qualifier, where the leaderboard refreshes continuously, Stage 2 matchup standings are published at four checkpoints during the trading day. Between checkpoints, you're flying blind on your opponent's position. You can see your own trades and P/L on the platform at all times — but the head-to-head standing only moves four times before the close.
This is what makes Grand Cup 2 feel like a duel: no shadowing, no last-second reactions to your opponent's P/L curve. Pick your spots, hold your line, and see who comes out ahead at the next reveal.
Account Details:
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- No drawdown rules — pure performance
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. If we detect that the max allocation was exceeded, the account will be failed.
- Fresh account each day (no balance carries over between matchups)
Match Format:
- One head-to-head matchup per trading day
Q: Does my balance carry over between days in Stage 2? A: No. Each head-to-head matchup starts on a fresh $50,000 account.
Q: Can I trade minis and micros at the same time in Stage 1? A: No. The limit is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — they cannot be combined.
Q: What's the max position size, and what happens if I exceed it? A: The max position size is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — these cannot be combined under any circumstances. The rule applies in both Stage 1 and Stage 2.
At the end of each trading day, we review all Grand Cup accounts for max allocation breaches. Any account that exceeded the limit at any point during the session — including by combining minis and micros — will be marked as failed before the next session begins, removing it from the leaderboard (Stage 1) or forfeiting that day's matchup (Stage 2).
Q: How do I reset my account? A: From your Grand Cup 2 dashboard. Resets cost $29 and are limited to 3 per trader, Qualifier only.
Q: Can I still reset during the head-to-head bracket? A: No. Once Stage 2 begins, no resets are available.
Q: How often do the leaderboard and bracket update? A: Both run on roughly a 15-minute cadence — they are not real-time. Your Stage 1 leaderboard ranking and Stage 2 bracket status (advances, eliminations, account failures) typically reflect within 15 minutes of the underlying event. This is separate from the Stage 2 in-matchup checkpoints, where your opponent's balance only reveals at four set times during the trading day (see the Head-to-Head Format FAQ).
Q: Can I use bots or automated/algorithmic trading? A: The same rules that apply to your regular Tradeify accounts apply during Grand Cup 2. Personal bots are allowed under specific conditions — no high-frequency trading, the bot must be solely for your own use, and it cannot be shared across other firms or traders. For full details, see Guidelines for Traders.
Head-to-Head Format
Q: How are matchups decided? A: Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field — Stage 1 ranking does not influence seeding. From Day 2 onward, matchups follow the standard bracket: each winner advances to face the winner of the adjacent slot. Brackets are locked once Day 1 is drawn, so there's no re-bracketing after that point.
Q: Will I know who I'm facing in advance? A: Yes. Brackets are public, so you can see your upcoming matchup (and the full field) at any time.
Q: When do balance updates happen during a matchup?
Section: Head-to-Head Format
− A: Four times per session, at 9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, and 3:00 PM EST. You can always see your own account balance and positions on your trading platform — the four checkpoints control what's visible on the public bracket / leaderboard.
Opponent balances on the bracket also reflect realized profit only — closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never shown. Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see it until those trades close and the next checkpoint runs. Your unrealized swings aren't visible to them either.
Q: Can I see my opponent's trades or P/L in real time? A: No. You only see your opponent's standing at the four checkpoints during the trading day. This is intentional — the head-to-head format is designed so neither trader can react to the other's moves in real time.
− Q: What if I'm winning at the second checkpoint? Should I stop trading? A: That's your call — but remember the participation requirement (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) and that your opponent can still close the gap before the 5:00 PM EST bell. Final standing is what counts; checkpoint standings are just snapshots.
Q: What are the participation requirements for each matchup? A: To qualify for advancement, you must execute at least 3 trades, and each trade must be held for more than 10 seconds. Failure to meet either requirement means automatic disqualification, and your opponent advances.
Q: What if I have a higher ending balance but didn't meet the participation requirement? A: You're disqualified. Participation is a hard requirement, not a tiebreaker — both conditions (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) must be met regardless of how the matchup is going.
Example: Trader A ends the day at $55,000 with only 2 qualifying trades. Trader B ends at $44,000 with 3 qualifying trades. Trader B advances; Trader A is disqualified, even though Trader A had the higher balance.
Q: What happens if both traders in a matchup fail the participation requirements? A: Both are disqualified. The trader they would have faced in the next round gets a bye and advances automatically.
Q: What happens if both traders end the day with the same balance? A: The trader with the better win rate within that day's matchup advances.
Q: Can I be matched against an Outlaw on Day 1? A: Yes. Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field, so any qualifier could face an Outlaw in the first round.
Q: Can I trade Silver during head to head stage? A: No. Only NQ, ES, GC and CL and their micro versions are allowed during head to head.
Outlaws & Bounties
Q: Who are the Outlaws? A: 24 featured traders hand-picked by Tradeify, entering directly into Stage 2 with a target on their backs.
Q: How do I claim an Outlaw bounty? A: Eliminate an Outlaw in your head-to-head matchup. The bounty is added to your earnings automatically — and you can request the payout on demand from your dashboard, no need to wait for the tournament to end.
After
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- Trailing Drawdown: $2,500
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. Abuse will result in account failure at end of session.
How It Works:
- Open qualification — all entrants compete on equal footing
- Ranked by highest ending account balance
- Top 1,000 traders advance to Stage 2
Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
Duration: Tuesday, May 26 (market open, evening) — Tuesday, June 9 (market close). All times ET.
Field: 1,024 traders total — 1,000 Stage 1 qualifiers + 24 Outlaws.
A duel, not a leaderboard.
Section: Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
+ Stage 2 is built like a duel — two traders, one trading day, one shot to outscore your opponent before the bell. Each matchup runs a full Tradeify trading day: opening at 6:00 PM ET and closing at 5:00 PM ET the following day.
You and your opponent trade independently on identical fresh $50,000 simulated accounts — no trailing drawdown, no resets, max position size of 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — but you're being scored against each other.
The twist: balances only reveal four times during the session.
Unlike the qualifier, where the leaderboard refreshes continuously, Stage 2 matchup standings are published at four checkpoints during the trading day. Between checkpoints, you're flying blind on your opponent's position. You can see your own trades and P/L on the platform at all times — but the head-to-head standing only moves four times before the close.
This is what makes Grand Cup 2 feel like a duel: no shadowing, no last-second reactions to your opponent's P/L curve. Pick your spots, hold your line, and see who comes out ahead at the next reveal.
Account Details:
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- No drawdown rules — pure performance
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. If we detect that the max allocation was exceeded, the account will be failed.
- Fresh account each day (no balance carries over between matchups)
Match Format:
- One head-to-head matchup per trading day
Q: Does my balance carry over between days in Stage 2? A: No. Each head-to-head matchup starts on a fresh $50,000 account.
Q: Can I trade minis and micros at the same time in Stage 1? A: No. The limit is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — they cannot be combined.
Q: What's the max position size, and what happens if I exceed it? A: The max position size is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — these cannot be combined under any circumstances. The rule applies in both Stage 1 and Stage 2.
At the end of each trading day, we review all Grand Cup accounts for max allocation breaches. Any account that exceeded the limit at any point during the session — including by combining minis and micros — will be marked as failed before the next session begins, removing it from the leaderboard (Stage 1) or forfeiting that day's matchup (Stage 2).
Q: How do I reset my account? A: From your Grand Cup 2 dashboard. Resets cost $29 and are limited to 3 per trader, Qualifier only.
Q: Can I still reset during the head-to-head bracket? A: No. Once Stage 2 begins, no resets are available.
Q: How often do the leaderboard and bracket update? A: Both run on roughly a 15-minute cadence — they are not real-time. Your Stage 1 leaderboard ranking and Stage 2 bracket status (advances, eliminations, account failures) typically reflect within 15 minutes of the underlying event. This is separate from the Stage 2 in-matchup checkpoints, where your opponent's balance only reveals at four set times during the trading day (see the Head-to-Head Format FAQ).
Q: Can I use bots or automated/algorithmic trading? A: The same rules that apply to your regular Tradeify accounts apply during Grand Cup 2. Personal bots are allowed under specific conditions — no high-frequency trading, the bot must be solely for your own use, and it cannot be shared across other firms or traders. For full details, see Guidelines for Traders.
Head-to-Head Format
Q: How are matchups decided? A: Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field — Stage 1 ranking does not influence seeding. From Day 2 onward, matchups follow the standard bracket: each winner advances to face the winner of the adjacent slot. Brackets are locked once Day 1 is drawn, so there's no re-bracketing after that point.
Q: Will I know who I'm facing in advance? A: Yes. Brackets are public, so you can see your upcoming matchup (and the full field) at any time.
Q: When do balance updates happen during a matchup?
Section: Head-to-Head Format
+ A: Four times per session, at 9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, and 3:00 PM ET. You can always see your own account balance and positions on your trading platform — the four checkpoints control what's visible on the public bracket / leaderboard.
Opponent balances on the bracket also reflect realized profit only — closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never shown. Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see it until those trades close and the next checkpoint runs. Your unrealized swings aren't visible to them either.
Q: Can I see my opponent's trades or P/L in real time? A: No. You only see your opponent's standing at the four checkpoints during the trading day. This is intentional — the head-to-head format is designed so neither trader can react to the other's moves in real time.
+ Q: What if I'm winning at the second checkpoint? Should I stop trading? A: That's your call — but remember the participation requirement (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) and that your opponent can still close the gap before the 5:00 PM ET bell. Final standing is what counts; checkpoint standings are just snapshots.
Q: What are the participation requirements for each matchup? A: To qualify for advancement, you must execute at least 3 trades, and each trade must be held for more than 10 seconds. Failure to meet either requirement means automatic disqualification, and your opponent advances.
Q: What if I have a higher ending balance but didn't meet the participation requirement? A: You're disqualified. Participation is a hard requirement, not a tiebreaker — both conditions (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) must be met regardless of how the matchup is going.
Example: Trader A ends the day at $55,000 with only 2 qualifying trades. Trader B ends at $44,000 with 3 qualifying trades. Trader B advances; Trader A is disqualified, even though Trader A had the higher balance.
Q: What happens if both traders in a matchup fail the participation requirements? A: Both are disqualified. The trader they would have faced in the next round gets a bye and advances automatically.
Q: What happens if both traders end the day with the same balance? A: The trader with the better win rate within that day's matchup advances.
Q: Can I be matched against an Outlaw on Day 1? A: Yes. Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field, so any qualifier could face an Outlaw in the first round.
Q: Can I trade Silver during head to head stage? A: No. Only NQ, ES, GC and CL and their micro versions are allowed during head to head.
Outlaws & Bounties
Q: Who are the Outlaws? A: 24 featured traders hand-picked by Tradeify, entering directly into Stage 2 with a target on their backs.
Q: How do I claim an Outlaw bounty? A: Eliminate an Outlaw in your head-to-head matchup. The bounty is added to your earnings automatically — and you can request the payout on demand from your dashboard, no need to wait for the tournament to end.
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- Trailing Drawdown: $2,500
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. Abuse will result in account failure at end of session.
How It Works:
- Open qualification — all entrants compete on equal footing
- Ranked by highest ending account balance
- Top 1,000 traders advance to Stage 2
Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
Duration: Tuesday, May 26 (market open, evening) — Tuesday, June 9 (market close). All times ET.
Field: 1,024 traders total — 1,000 Stage 1 qualifiers + 24 Outlaws.
A duel, not a leaderboard.
Section: Stage 2 — Head-to-Head Bracket
− Stage 2 is built like a duel — two traders, one trading day, one shot to outscore your opponent before the bell. Each matchup runs a full Tradeify trading day: opening at 6:00 PM EST and closing at 5:00 PM EST the following day.
+ Stage 2 is built like a duel — two traders, one trading day, one shot to outscore your opponent before the bell. Each matchup runs a full Tradeify trading day: opening at 6:00 PM ET and closing at 5:00 PM ET the following day.
You and your opponent trade independently on identical fresh $50,000 simulated accounts — no trailing drawdown, no resets, max position size of 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — but you're being scored against each other.
The twist: balances only reveal four times during the session.
Unlike the qualifier, where the leaderboard refreshes continuously, Stage 2 matchup standings are published at four checkpoints during the trading day. Between checkpoints, you're flying blind on your opponent's position. You can see your own trades and P/L on the platform at all times — but the head-to-head standing only moves four times before the close.
This is what makes Grand Cup 2 feel like a duel: no shadowing, no last-second reactions to your opponent's P/L curve. Pick your spots, hold your line, and see who comes out ahead at the next reveal.
Account Details:
- Starting Balance: $50,000 (Simulated)
- No drawdown rules — pure performance
- Max Position Size: 1 Mini OR 10 Micros (cannot be combined)
- Position size limits are per account, not per asset. If we detect that the max allocation was exceeded, the account will be failed.
- Fresh account each day (no balance carries over between matchups)
Match Format:
- One head-to-head matchup per trading day
Q: Does my balance carry over between days in Stage 2? A: No. Each head-to-head matchup starts on a fresh $50,000 account.
Q: Can I trade minis and micros at the same time in Stage 1? A: No. The limit is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — they cannot be combined.
Q: What's the max position size, and what happens if I exceed it? A: The max position size is 1 Mini OR 10 Micros — these cannot be combined under any circumstances. The rule applies in both Stage 1 and Stage 2.
At the end of each trading day, we review all Grand Cup accounts for max allocation breaches. Any account that exceeded the limit at any point during the session — including by combining minis and micros — will be marked as failed before the next session begins, removing it from the leaderboard (Stage 1) or forfeiting that day's matchup (Stage 2).
Q: How do I reset my account? A: From your Grand Cup 2 dashboard. Resets cost $29 and are limited to 3 per trader, Qualifier only.
Q: Can I still reset during the head-to-head bracket? A: No. Once Stage 2 begins, no resets are available.
Q: How often do the leaderboard and bracket update? A: Both run on roughly a 15-minute cadence — they are not real-time. Your Stage 1 leaderboard ranking and Stage 2 bracket status (advances, eliminations, account failures) typically reflect within 15 minutes of the underlying event. This is separate from the Stage 2 in-matchup checkpoints, where your opponent's balance only reveals at four set times during the trading day (see the Head-to-Head Format FAQ).
Q: Can I use bots or automated/algorithmic trading? A: The same rules that apply to your regular Tradeify accounts apply during Grand Cup 2. Personal bots are allowed under specific conditions — no high-frequency trading, the bot must be solely for your own use, and it cannot be shared across other firms or traders. For full details, see Guidelines for Traders.
Head-to-Head Format
Q: How are matchups decided? A: Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field — Stage 1 ranking does not influence seeding. From Day 2 onward, matchups follow the standard bracket: each winner advances to face the winner of the adjacent slot. Brackets are locked once Day 1 is drawn, so there's no re-bracketing after that point.
Q: Will I know who I'm facing in advance? A: Yes. Brackets are public, so you can see your upcoming matchup (and the full field) at any time.
Q: When do balance updates happen during a matchup?
Section: Head-to-Head Format
− A: Four times per session, at 9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, and 3:00 PM EST. You can always see your own account balance and positions on your trading platform — the four checkpoints control what's visible on the public bracket / leaderboard.
+ A: Four times per session, at 9:00 PM, 8:00 AM, 12:00 PM, and 3:00 PM ET. You can always see your own account balance and positions on your trading platform — the four checkpoints control what's visible on the public bracket / leaderboard.
Opponent balances on the bracket also reflect realized profit only — closed trades. Unrealized P&L from open positions is never shown. Your opponent could be up $100,000 or down $10,000 on open positions and you won't see it until those trades close and the next checkpoint runs. Your unrealized swings aren't visible to them either.
Q: Can I see my opponent's trades or P/L in real time? A: No. You only see your opponent's standing at the four checkpoints during the trading day. This is intentional — the head-to-head format is designed so neither trader can react to the other's moves in real time.
− Q: What if I'm winning at the second checkpoint? Should I stop trading? A: That's your call — but remember the participation requirement (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) and that your opponent can still close the gap before the 5:00 PM EST bell. Final standing is what counts; checkpoint standings are just snapshots.
+ Q: What if I'm winning at the second checkpoint? Should I stop trading? A: That's your call — but remember the participation requirement (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) and that your opponent can still close the gap before the 5:00 PM ET bell. Final standing is what counts; checkpoint standings are just snapshots.
Q: What are the participation requirements for each matchup? A: To qualify for advancement, you must execute at least 3 trades, and each trade must be held for more than 10 seconds. Failure to meet either requirement means automatic disqualification, and your opponent advances.
Q: What if I have a higher ending balance but didn't meet the participation requirement? A: You're disqualified. Participation is a hard requirement, not a tiebreaker — both conditions (3+ trades, each held longer than 10 seconds) must be met regardless of how the matchup is going.
Example: Trader A ends the day at $55,000 with only 2 qualifying trades. Trader B ends at $44,000 with 3 qualifying trades. Trader B advances; Trader A is disqualified, even though Trader A had the higher balance.
Q: What happens if both traders in a matchup fail the participation requirements? A: Both are disqualified. The trader they would have faced in the next round gets a bye and advances automatically.
Q: What happens if both traders end the day with the same balance? A: The trader with the better win rate within that day's matchup advances.
Q: Can I be matched against an Outlaw on Day 1? A: Yes. Day 1 matchups are drawn at random across the full 1,024-trader field, so any qualifier could face an Outlaw in the first round.
Q: Can I trade Silver during head to head stage? A: No. Only NQ, ES, GC and CL and their micro versions are allowed during head to head.
Outlaws & Bounties
Q: Who are the Outlaws? A: 24 featured traders hand-picked by Tradeify, entering directly into Stage 2 with a target on their backs.
Q: How do I claim an Outlaw bounty? A: Eliminate an Outlaw in your head-to-head matchup. The bounty is added to your earnings automatically — and you can request the payout on demand from your dashboard, no need to wait for the tournament to end.
PremierTradeify · Trade as a Company / LLC | Tradeify Help CenterAdded requirement that Tradeify account email must match payment-processor account email, moved from payout section to account creation section.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
You may create a Tradeify account using either personal or business information. However, only one Tradeify account is permitted per user.
⚠️ One Account Per User
Creating separate accounts (for example, one personal account and one under a company/LLC) is not allowed. Each user may hold only one Tradeify account.
Please note that the First Name and Last Name fields do not allow spaces or punctuation, so be sure to keep that in mind when registering. Other than that, it does not matter how you structure it when creating an account.
The key difference between personal and business usage applies during the payout process, not during account creation.
If you wish to receive payouts under your company or LLC, you do not need to create a separate Tradeify account. Continue trading under your existing personal account and complete a KYB (Know Your Business) verification with our payment processor once you become eligible for payouts.
How the Process Works
- Continue trading using your existing Tradeify account.
- Once your payout request is approved, you will receive a link to complete the KYB process with our payment vendor.
- If the KYB process is successfully completed, payouts may then be issued to your company or LLC.
− Important: Your Tradeify account email and your payment-processor account email must match.
KYB Documentation Required
The KYB process requires additional documentation compared to standard KYC (Know Your Customer) verification. The required documents include:
- Incorporation documents (LLC, Corporation, etc.)
- Proof of ownership documents (varies by jurisdiction — in some countries ownership appears directly on incorporation documents, while others require separate documentation such as an Operating Agreement for many US-based LLCs)
- Government-issued photo IDs for all individuals with 25% or greater ownership
Note: The total number of Sim Funded accounts cannot exceed 5.
After
You may create a Tradeify account using either personal or business information. However, only one Tradeify account is permitted per user.
+ Important: Your Tradeify account email and your payment-processor account email must match.
⚠️ One Account Per User
Creating separate accounts (for example, one personal account and one under a company/LLC) is not allowed. Each user may hold only one Tradeify account.
Please note that the First Name and Last Name fields do not allow spaces or punctuation, so be sure to keep that in mind when registering. Other than that, it does not matter how you structure it when creating an account.
The key difference between personal and business usage applies during the payout process, not during account creation.
If you wish to receive payouts under your company or LLC, you do not need to create a separate Tradeify account. Continue trading under your existing personal account and complete a KYB (Know Your Business) verification with our payment processor once you become eligible for payouts.
How the Process Works
- Continue trading using your existing Tradeify account.
- Once your payout request is approved, you will receive a link to complete the KYB process with our payment vendor.
- If the KYB process is successfully completed, payouts may then be issued to your company or LLC.
KYB Documentation Required
The KYB process requires additional documentation compared to standard KYC (Know Your Customer) verification. The required documents include:
- Incorporation documents (LLC, Corporation, etc.)
- Proof of ownership documents (varies by jurisdiction — in some countries ownership appears directly on incorporation documents, while others require separate documentation such as an Operating Agreement for many US-based LLCs)
- Government-issued photo IDs for all individuals with 25% or greater ownership
Note: The total number of Sim Funded accounts cannot exceed 5.
You may create a Tradeify account using either personal or business information. However, only one Tradeify account is permitted per user.
+ Important: Your Tradeify account email and your payment-processor account email must match.
⚠️ One Account Per User
Creating separate accounts (for example, one personal account and one under a company/LLC) is not allowed. Each user may hold only one Tradeify account.
Please note that the First Name and Last Name fields do not allow spaces or punctuation, so be sure to keep that in mind when registering. Other than that, it does not matter how you structure it when creating an account.
The key difference between personal and business usage applies during the payout process, not during account creation.
If you wish to receive payouts under your company or LLC, you do not need to create a separate Tradeify account. Continue trading under your existing personal account and complete a KYB (Know Your Business) verification with our payment processor once you become eligible for payouts.
How the Process Works
- Continue trading using your existing Tradeify account.
- Once your payout request is approved, you will receive a link to complete the KYB process with our payment vendor.
- If the KYB process is successfully completed, payouts may then be issued to your company or LLC.
− Important: Your Tradeify account email and your payment-processor account email must match.
KYB Documentation Required
The KYB process requires additional documentation compared to standard KYC (Know Your Customer) verification. The required documents include:
- Incorporation documents (LLC, Corporation, etc.)
- Proof of ownership documents (varies by jurisdiction — in some countries ownership appears directly on incorporation documents, while others require separate documentation such as an Operating Agreement for many US-based LLCs)
- Government-issued photo IDs for all individuals with 25% or greater ownership
Note: The total number of Sim Funded accounts cannot exceed 5.
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools | Tradeify Help CenterAdded account breach forfeiture notice earlier in article and removed it from lower section.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The biggest challenge with live accounts has always been the same.
You finally make it. You get payouts. You get informed you're moving live. And then it just feels like you've started again.
There's no real sense of progression. No acceleration. No additional upside for doing things properly. If you want to earn more, the only real option is to take more risk.
We wanted to change that.
Instead of live trading being the end of the journey, we built something that actually rewards you for performing well once you're there. We introduced a Performance Reward Pool inside the live environment — something you earn on top of the trading profits you're already making.
You're getting paid twice. Once from your trading profits, and again from the reward pool.
This applies to all current and new live traders, regardless of plan (Select, Growth, or Lightning Funded). For general information about Elite Live eligibility, transition, and account parameters, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Elite Performance Reward Pool (Per Account)
When you go live, every account you take live comes with a reward pool attached to it:
Account Size | Reward Pool (Per Account)
$25K | $2,000
$50K | $4,000
$100K | $8,000
$150K | $12,000
$300k | $15,000
You can run up to 5 accounts. If a trader has multiple live accounts, each account has its own independent reward pool.
Example: 5 x $150K accounts = $12,000 per account = $60,000 total available across all accounts.
This isn't something you gamble for. It's something you earn over time by trading properly.
Performance Multiplier – 1.5x Pool Increase (Per Account)
Once the full pool for that specific account is earned, no further pool payments are available for that account.
If the multiplier was applied, the expanded pool simply allows additional months of eligibility.
Monthly Eligibility Requirements (Per Account)
Each account has a simple monthly objective. To unlock a monthly reward for a specific account, the trader must:
- Achieve 5 profitable days of at least $250 per day
- End the month with profit greater than max trailing drawdown on the Live account:
- $25K: $1,000
- $50K: $2,000
- $100K: $3,000
- $150K: $4,500
- $300k: $6,000
Eligibility is evaluated independently per account.
− Important: If an account is breached, any remaining unpaid pool for that specific account is forfeited.
Real Example – How You Get Paid Twice
Let's walk through a real scenario so you can see how the numbers actually work.
A trader goes live with 5 x $150K accounts.
From day one, they have $60,000 in reward pools available ($12,000 per account x 5).
Month 1
The trader has a strong, controlled month. No big swings, no unnecessary risk.
Across the 5 accounts, they generate $5,000 in profit per account.
That's $25,000 in trading profits.
Because they hit the monthly objective on each account (5 profitable days, profit above $4,500), they also unlock $4,500 per account in rewards from the pool.
Across 5 accounts: $22,500 from the reward pool.
Month 1 total: $47,500 ($25,000 trading + $22,500 rewards)
Month 2
After
The biggest challenge with live accounts has always been the same.
You finally make it. You get payouts. You get informed you're moving live. And then it just feels like you've started again.
There's no real sense of progression. No acceleration. No additional upside for doing things properly. If you want to earn more, the only real option is to take more risk.
We wanted to change that.
Instead of live trading being the end of the journey, we built something that actually rewards you for performing well once you're there. We introduced a Performance Reward Pool inside the live environment — something you earn on top of the trading profits you're already making.
You're getting paid twice. Once from your trading profits, and again from the reward pool.
This applies to all current and new live traders, regardless of plan (Select, Growth, or Lightning Funded). For general information about Elite Live eligibility, transition, and account parameters, see Tradeify Elite Program.
+ Important: If an account is breached, any remaining unpaid pool for that specific account is forfeited.
Elite Performance Reward Pool (Per Account)
When you go live, every account you take live comes with a reward pool attached to it:
Account Size | Reward Pool (Per Account)
$25K | $2,000
$50K | $4,000
$100K | $8,000
$150K | $12,000
$300k | $15,000
You can run up to 5 accounts. If a trader has multiple live accounts, each account has its own independent reward pool.
Example: 5 x $150K accounts = $12,000 per account = $60,000 total available across all accounts.
This isn't something you gamble for. It's something you earn over time by trading properly.
Performance Multiplier – 1.5x Pool Increase (Per Account)
Once the full pool for that specific account is earned, no further pool payments are available for that account.
If the multiplier was applied, the expanded pool simply allows additional months of eligibility.
Monthly Eligibility Requirements (Per Account)
Each account has a simple monthly objective. To unlock a monthly reward for a specific account, the trader must:
- Achieve 5 profitable days of at least $250 per day
- End the month with profit greater than max trailing drawdown on the Live account:
- $25K: $1,000
- $50K: $2,000
- $100K: $3,000
- $150K: $4,500
- $300k: $6,000
Eligibility is evaluated independently per account.
Real Example – How You Get Paid Twice
Let's walk through a real scenario so you can see how the numbers actually work.
A trader goes live with 5 x $150K accounts.
From day one, they have $60,000 in reward pools available ($12,000 per account x 5).
Month 1
The trader has a strong, controlled month. No big swings, no unnecessary risk.
Across the 5 accounts, they generate $5,000 in profit per account.
That's $25,000 in trading profits.
Because they hit the monthly objective on each account (5 profitable days, profit above $4,500), they also unlock $4,500 per account in rewards from the pool.
Across 5 accounts: $22,500 from the reward pool.
Month 1 total: $47,500 ($25,000 trading + $22,500 rewards)
Month 2
The biggest challenge with live accounts has always been the same.
You finally make it. You get payouts. You get informed you're moving live. And then it just feels like you've started again.
There's no real sense of progression. No acceleration. No additional upside for doing things properly. If you want to earn more, the only real option is to take more risk.
We wanted to change that.
Instead of live trading being the end of the journey, we built something that actually rewards you for performing well once you're there. We introduced a Performance Reward Pool inside the live environment — something you earn on top of the trading profits you're already making.
You're getting paid twice. Once from your trading profits, and again from the reward pool.
This applies to all current and new live traders, regardless of plan (Select, Growth, or Lightning Funded). For general information about Elite Live eligibility, transition, and account parameters, see Tradeify Elite Program.
+ Important: If an account is breached, any remaining unpaid pool for that specific account is forfeited.
Elite Performance Reward Pool (Per Account)
When you go live, every account you take live comes with a reward pool attached to it:
Account Size | Reward Pool (Per Account)
$25K | $2,000
$50K | $4,000
$100K | $8,000
$150K | $12,000
$300k | $15,000
You can run up to 5 accounts. If a trader has multiple live accounts, each account has its own independent reward pool.
Example: 5 x $150K accounts = $12,000 per account = $60,000 total available across all accounts.
This isn't something you gamble for. It's something you earn over time by trading properly.
Performance Multiplier – 1.5x Pool Increase (Per Account)
Once the full pool for that specific account is earned, no further pool payments are available for that account.
If the multiplier was applied, the expanded pool simply allows additional months of eligibility.
Monthly Eligibility Requirements (Per Account)
Each account has a simple monthly objective. To unlock a monthly reward for a specific account, the trader must:
- Achieve 5 profitable days of at least $250 per day
- End the month with profit greater than max trailing drawdown on the Live account:
- $25K: $1,000
- $50K: $2,000
- $100K: $3,000
- $150K: $4,500
- $300k: $6,000
Eligibility is evaluated independently per account.
− Important: If an account is breached, any remaining unpaid pool for that specific account is forfeited.
Real Example – How You Get Paid Twice
Let's walk through a real scenario so you can see how the numbers actually work.
A trader goes live with 5 x $150K accounts.
From day one, they have $60,000 in reward pools available ($12,000 per account x 5).
Month 1
The trader has a strong, controlled month. No big swings, no unnecessary risk.
Across the 5 accounts, they generate $5,000 in profit per account.
That's $25,000 in trading profits.
Because they hit the monthly objective on each account (5 profitable days, profit above $4,500), they also unlock $4,500 per account in rewards from the pool.
Across 5 accounts: $22,500 from the reward pool.
Month 1 total: $47,500 ($25,000 trading + $22,500 rewards)
Month 2
PremierTradeify · SPIFF Performance Bonuses - NEW! | Tradeify Help CenterNew page published.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Live Funded Account Scaling and Risk Parameters | Tradeify Help CenterNew page published.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Live Funded Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterNew page published.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Legacy Live Program - Complete Guide | Tradeify Help CenterTimezone abbreviation changed from EST to ET in the December 3, 2025 12:00 AM deadline.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
− SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
After
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
+ SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM ET.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
− SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
+ SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM ET.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite Program | Tradeify Help CenterAdded step-by-step walkthrough example and clarified drawdown lock trigger amounts for each Elite account size.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day. The limit is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value (balance plus open P&L) touches it at any moment during the session, the account fails immediately. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Section: Example Walkthrough
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
The table below shows the exact EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock for each Elite account size:
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
Live Account Transitioned | Starting Balance | Drawdown | Lock Trigger (EOD Balance)
25K | $0 | $1,500 | $1,600
50K | $0 | $2,000 | $2,100
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
After
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day. The limit is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value (balance plus open P&L) touches it at any moment during the session, the account fails immediately. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Section: Example Walkthrough
+ Step by step: At the start of Day 1, the balance is $0 and the drawdown limit is $2,000. During Day 1, the trader makes $500 profit and requests a $500 payout. The payout is pending and is processed the next business day. At the end of Day 1, the balance is $500 and the drawdown moves up by $500. At the start of Day 2, the payout is processed and the balance is back to $0. Only $1,500 of drawdown room remains.
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
The table below shows the exact EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock for each Elite account size:
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
+ The drawdown locks when the end-of-day balance reaches $1,600 on a 25K Elite account ($1,500 drawdown), $2,100 on a 50K account ($2,000 drawdown), $3,100 on a 100K account ($3,000 drawdown), $4,600 on a 150K account ($4,500 drawdown), and $6,100 on a 300K account ($6,000 drawdown). Every account starts with a $0 balance.
Live Account Transitioned | Starting Balance | Drawdown | Lock Trigger (EOD Balance)
25K | $0 | $1,500 | $1,600
50K | $0 | $2,000 | $2,100
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day. The limit is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value (balance plus open P&L) touches it at any moment during the session, the account fails immediately. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Section: Example Walkthrough
+ Step by step: At the start of Day 1, the balance is $0 and the drawdown limit is $2,000. During Day 1, the trader makes $500 profit and requests a $500 payout. The payout is pending and is processed the next business day. At the end of Day 1, the balance is $500 and the drawdown moves up by $500. At the start of Day 2, the payout is processed and the balance is back to $0. Only $1,500 of drawdown room remains.
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
The table below shows the exact EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock for each Elite account size:
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
+ The drawdown locks when the end-of-day balance reaches $1,600 on a 25K Elite account ($1,500 drawdown), $2,100 on a 50K account ($2,000 drawdown), $3,100 on a 100K account ($3,000 drawdown), $4,600 on a 150K account ($4,500 drawdown), and $6,100 on a 300K account ($6,000 drawdown). Every account starts with a $0 balance.
Live Account Transitioned | Starting Balance | Drawdown | Lock Trigger (EOD Balance)
25K | $0 | $1,500 | $1,600
50K | $0 | $2,000 | $2,100
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
PremierTradeify · Introducing Tradeify LIVE: Unlocking Your Full Earning Potential | Tradeify Help CenterNew page published.Oct 17
PremierTradeify · Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies | Tradeify Help CenterImportant payout rule moved earlier in article; wording simplified in policy overview section.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
− ⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
− Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
− The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
Profit Split: 90 Trader / 10 Tradeify
After
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
+ ⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
+ Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
+ The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
Profit Split: 90 Trader / 10 Tradeify
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
+ ⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
+ Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
+ The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
− ⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
− Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
− The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
Profit Split: 90 Trader / 10 Tradeify
PremierTradeify · Growth Funded: Account Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterDaily account reconciliation window changed from 6:00-8:00 p.m. EST/EDT to 5:00-6:00 p.m. ET; timezone notation standardized throughout; summary text added for payout tiers.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
Section: Important Notes
− - Daily account reconciliations occur between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST/EDT.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
Section: Payout Requirements
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
− Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed, once your Rise onboarding is complete.
Section: Payout Window
− - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $4,000
4+ | $1,000 | $3,000 | $4,000 | $5,000
Section: Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
− Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
Payout Number | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,750 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $3,500
4 | $2,250 | $3,500 | $4,000
5 | $2,500 | $4,000 | $4,500
6 | $3,000 | $5,000 | $5,500
- Each subsequent payout after the 6th can be any amount up to $25,000 per account.
Scenarios
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $53,000 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $51,500.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $1,400 in drawdown room.
Section: Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
− Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $52,100 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $50,600.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $500 in drawdown room.
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
After
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
Section: Important Notes
+ - Daily account reconciliations occur between 5:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. ET.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
Section: Payout Requirements
+ To request a payout, your balance must reach at least $26,500 on a $25,000 account, $53,000 on a $50,000 account, $104,500 on a $100,000 account, or $156,500 on a $150,000 account.
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
+ Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For Growth accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the minimum balance needed is $52,100 on a $50,000 account, $103,600 on a $100,000 account, and $155,100 on a $150,000 account.
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed, once your Rise onboarding is complete.
Section: Payout Window
+ - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. ET and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
+ The maximum payout per request on a $25k account is $1,000 for every payout. On a $50k account, it is $1,500 for Payout 1, $2,000 for Payout 2, $2,500 for Payout 3, and $3,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $100k account, it is $2,000 for Payout 1, $2,500 for Payout 2, $3,000 for Payout 3, and $4,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $150k account, it is $2,500 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, $4,000 for Payout 3, and $5,000 for Payout 4 and later.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $4,000
4+ | $1,000 | $3,000 | $4,000 | $5,000
Section: Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ For accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the maximum payout per request is as follows. On a $50k account: $1,500 for Payout 1, $1,750 for Payout 2, $2,000 for Payout 3, $2,250 for Payout 4, $2,500 for Payout 5, and $3,000 for Payout 6. On a $100k account: $2,000 for Payout 1, $2,500 for Payout 2, $3,000 for Payout 3, $3,500 for Payout 4, $4,000 for Payout 5, and $5,000 for Payout 6. On a $150k account: $2,500 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, $3,500 for Payout 3, $4,000 for Payout 4, $4,500 for Payout 5, and $5,500 for Payout 6.
Payout Number | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,750 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $3,500
4 | $2,250 | $3,500 | $4,000
5 | $2,500 | $4,000 | $4,500
6 | $3,000 | $5,000 | $5,500
- Each subsequent payout after the 6th can be any amount up to $25,000 per account.
Scenarios
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $53,000 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $51,500.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $1,400 in drawdown room.
Section: Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $52,100 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $50,600.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $500 in drawdown room.
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
Section: Important Notes
− - Daily account reconciliations occur between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST/EDT.
+ - Daily account reconciliations occur between 5:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. ET.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
Section: Payout Requirements
+ To request a payout, your balance must reach at least $26,500 on a $25,000 account, $53,000 on a $50,000 account, $104,500 on a $100,000 account, or $156,500 on a $150,000 account.
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
− Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
+ Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For Growth accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the minimum balance needed is $52,100 on a $50,000 account, $103,600 on a $100,000 account, and $155,100 on a $150,000 account.
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed, once your Rise onboarding is complete.
Section: Payout Window
− - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
+ - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. ET and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
+ The maximum payout per request on a $25k account is $1,000 for every payout. On a $50k account, it is $1,500 for Payout 1, $2,000 for Payout 2, $2,500 for Payout 3, and $3,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $100k account, it is $2,000 for Payout 1, $2,500 for Payout 2, $3,000 for Payout 3, and $4,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $150k account, it is $2,500 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, $4,000 for Payout 3, and $5,000 for Payout 4 and later.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $4,000
4+ | $1,000 | $3,000 | $4,000 | $5,000
Section: Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
− Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
+ Payout Tiers for Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ For accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the maximum payout per request is as follows. On a $50k account: $1,500 for Payout 1, $1,750 for Payout 2, $2,000 for Payout 3, $2,250 for Payout 4, $2,500 for Payout 5, and $3,000 for Payout 6. On a $100k account: $2,000 for Payout 1, $2,500 for Payout 2, $3,000 for Payout 3, $3,500 for Payout 4, $4,000 for Payout 5, and $5,000 for Payout 6. On a $150k account: $2,500 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, $3,500 for Payout 3, $4,000 for Payout 4, $4,500 for Payout 5, and $5,500 for Payout 6.
Payout Number | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,750 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $3,500
4 | $2,250 | $3,500 | $4,000
5 | $2,500 | $4,000 | $4,500
6 | $3,000 | $5,000 | $5,500
- Each subsequent payout after the 6th can be any amount up to $25,000 per account.
Scenarios
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $53,000 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $51,500.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $1,400 in drawdown room.
Section: Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
− Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
+ Scenarios For Accounts Purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
If you have a Growth Sim Funded $50k account and the balance reaches the minimum required balance of $52,100 to request a payout, you can request up to a $1,500 payout.
This leaves your remaining balance at $50,600.
Remember, in this example, your balance cannot go below $50,100 without "failing" the account. You ARE able to take out that amount, but you would leave yourself with $500 in drawdown room.
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
PremierTradeify · Lightning Funded: Account Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterTime zone changed from EST to ET in multiple locations; plain-English payout tier descriptions added.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Section: Payout Requirements
− Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
− Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
− Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2 Profit Goal | Payout 3 Profit Goal+
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,000 | $2,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500 | $3,000
Important Notes
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
- Payout Profit Goals reset after each payout and to achieve the next payout you move on to the next Payout Profit Goal.
- e.g. for a $150k account when you reach Payout 1 Profit Goal of $9k you can request a payout — but the most you can withdraw on Payout 1 is the $3,000 cap shown in the Maximum Payout Per Request table below; the rest of your profit stays in the account. You now must achieve Payout 2 Profit Goal of $4.5k to take your next payout. (see Payout Profit Goal Table)
- Example: You have a $150k Lightning account (post-Sep 12) and just received your first payout. Your balance is now $159k but your profit goal resets — you need $4,500 in new profit from new trades. Your consistency also resets, now at 25% for Payout 2. This means your highest single profitable day cannot exceed $1,125 ($4,500 × 25%). A safe approach is ~$1,125/day across 4 trading days.
Section: Important Notes
− - Profit is calculated and determined upon account reconciliation, which happens daily between approximately 6:00 P.M. and 8:00 P.M. EST.
Payout Procedure
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed.
Section: Payout Procedure
− - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
- The minimum payout amount is $1,000.
- The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number. These are hard caps — even if you have earned more profit (for example, the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal on a $150K account), you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the remaining profit stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
See this table:
Payout Number | $25K Account | $50K Account | $100K Account | $150K Account
1 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
4+ | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $3,500
- Payouts after the 4th remain capped at the same level as the 4th.
$25K Account Note: For $25K Lightning accounts, the payout amount is fixed at $1,000 for all payouts (the minimum and maximum are both $1,000).
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
After
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Section: Payout Requirements
+ Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the Payout 1 Profit Goal is $1,500 on a $25,000 account, $3,000 on a $50,000 account, $6,000 on a $100,000 account, and $9,000 on a $150,000 account. The Profit Goal for Payout 2 and every payout after it is $1,000 on a $25,000 account, $2,000 on a $50,000 account, $3,500 on a $100,000 account, and $4,500 on a $150,000 account.
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the Profit Goals are as follows. On a $25,000 account, the goal is $1,500 for Payout 1, $1,000 for Payout 2, and $1,000 for Payout 3 and later. On a $50,000 account, the goal is $3,000 for Payout 1, $2,000 for Payout 2, and $2,000 for Payout 3 and later. On a $100,000 account, the goal is $6,000 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, and $2,500 for Payout 3 and later. On a $150,000 account, the goal is $9,000 for Payout 1, $4,500 for Payout 2, and $3,000 for Payout 3 and later.
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2 Profit Goal | Payout 3 Profit Goal+
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,000 | $2,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500 | $3,000
Important Notes
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
- Payout Profit Goals reset after each payout and to achieve the next payout you move on to the next Payout Profit Goal.
- e.g. for a $150k account when you reach Payout 1 Profit Goal of $9k you can request a payout — but the most you can withdraw on Payout 1 is the $3,000 cap shown in the Maximum Payout Per Request table below; the rest of your profit stays in the account. You now must achieve Payout 2 Profit Goal of $4.5k to take your next payout. (see Payout Profit Goal Table)
- Example: You have a $150k Lightning account (post-Sep 12) and just received your first payout. Your balance is now $159k but your profit goal resets — you need $4,500 in new profit from new trades. Your consistency also resets, now at 25% for Payout 2. This means your highest single profitable day cannot exceed $1,125 ($4,500 × 25%). A safe approach is ~$1,125/day across 4 trading days.
Section: Important Notes
+ - Profit is calculated and determined upon account reconciliation, which happens daily between approximately 5:00 P.M. and 6:00 P.M. ET.
Payout Procedure
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed.
Section: Payout Procedure
+ - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. ET and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
- The minimum payout amount is $1,000.
- The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number. These are hard caps — even if you have earned more profit (for example, the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal on a $150K account), you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the remaining profit stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
+ The maximum payout per request on a $25K account is $1,000 for every payout. On a $50K account, it is $2,000 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $2,500 for Payout 4 and later. On a $100K account, it is $2,500 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $3,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $150K account, it is $3,000 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $3,500 for Payout 4 and later.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25K Account | $50K Account | $100K Account | $150K Account
1 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
4+ | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $3,500
- Payouts after the 4th remain capped at the same level as the 4th.
$25K Account Note: For $25K Lightning accounts, the payout amount is fixed at $1,000 for all payouts (the minimum and maximum are both $1,000).
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
- Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Section: Payout Requirements
− Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
+ Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
− Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
+ Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the Payout 1 Profit Goal is $1,500 on a $25,000 account, $3,000 on a $50,000 account, $6,000 on a $100,000 account, and $9,000 on a $150,000 account. The Profit Goal for Payout 2 and every payout after it is $1,000 on a $25,000 account, $2,000 on a $50,000 account, $3,500 on a $100,000 account, and $4,500 on a $150,000 account.
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500
Section: Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
− Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
+ Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET:
+ For accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the Profit Goals are as follows. On a $25,000 account, the goal is $1,500 for Payout 1, $1,000 for Payout 2, and $1,000 for Payout 3 and later. On a $50,000 account, the goal is $3,000 for Payout 1, $2,000 for Payout 2, and $2,000 for Payout 3 and later. On a $100,000 account, the goal is $6,000 for Payout 1, $3,000 for Payout 2, and $2,500 for Payout 3 and later. On a $150,000 account, the goal is $9,000 for Payout 1, $4,500 for Payout 2, and $3,000 for Payout 3 and later.
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2 Profit Goal | Payout 3 Profit Goal+
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $3,000 | $2,500
$150,000 | $9,000 | $4,500 | $3,000
Important Notes
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
- Payout Profit Goals reset after each payout and to achieve the next payout you move on to the next Payout Profit Goal.
- e.g. for a $150k account when you reach Payout 1 Profit Goal of $9k you can request a payout — but the most you can withdraw on Payout 1 is the $3,000 cap shown in the Maximum Payout Per Request table below; the rest of your profit stays in the account. You now must achieve Payout 2 Profit Goal of $4.5k to take your next payout. (see Payout Profit Goal Table)
- Example: You have a $150k Lightning account (post-Sep 12) and just received your first payout. Your balance is now $159k but your profit goal resets — you need $4,500 in new profit from new trades. Your consistency also resets, now at 25% for Payout 2. This means your highest single profitable day cannot exceed $1,125 ($4,500 × 25%). A safe approach is ~$1,125/day across 4 trading days.
Section: Important Notes
− - Profit is calculated and determined upon account reconciliation, which happens daily between approximately 6:00 P.M. and 8:00 P.M. EST.
+ - Profit is calculated and determined upon account reconciliation, which happens daily between approximately 5:00 P.M. and 6:00 P.M. ET.
Payout Procedure
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
- Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed.
Section: Payout Procedure
− - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
+ - Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. ET and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
- The minimum payout amount is $1,000.
- The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number. These are hard caps — even if you have earned more profit (for example, the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal on a $150K account), you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the remaining profit stays in your account for future payouts.
Section: Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
+ The maximum payout per request on a $25K account is $1,000 for every payout. On a $50K account, it is $2,000 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $2,500 for Payout 4 and later. On a $100K account, it is $2,500 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $3,000 for Payout 4 and later. On a $150K account, it is $3,000 for Payouts 1, 2, and 3, and $3,500 for Payout 4 and later.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25K Account | $50K Account | $100K Account | $150K Account
1 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
3 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
4+ | $1,000 | $2,500 | $3,000 | $3,500
- Payouts after the 4th remain capped at the same level as the 4th.
$25K Account Note: For $25K Lightning accounts, the payout amount is fixed at $1,000 for all payouts (the minimum and maximum are both $1,000).
Note: Tradeify reserves the right to move you to a Live Funded Account at any time after a successful payout. Tradeify will contact you via email regarding this decision.
For full details on transitioning to Elite Live, see Tradeify Elite Program.
PremierTradeify · How Do I Get Funded After Passing an Evaluation? | Tradeify Help CenterInformation moved earlier in article: profits earned during evaluation do not carry over to funded account notice repositioned before funded account balance section.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Your funded account starts at your base account size ($50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
− Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Activation fees vary by account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
- Advanced (legacy): $125
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
After
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
+ Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Your funded account starts at your base account size ($50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Activation fees vary by account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
- Advanced (legacy): $125
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
Once you have met all activation objectives, you can activate your funded account immediately. Simply go to your dashboard, find your account card, and select the Activate Account button. There are no activation fees and no waiting period — activation is instant once your objectives are met.
+ Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Funded Account Starting Balance
Your funded account starts at your base account size ($50K, $100K, or $150K) regardless of your evaluation ending balance.
− Important: Profits earned during evaluation do NOT carry over to your funded account.
Example: If you end your evaluation at $53,200, your funded account will still start at $50,000 (your base account size).
Activation Fees
Activation fees vary by account type:
- Growth: No activation fee
- Select: No activation fee
- Advanced (legacy): $125
- Lightning: One-time purchase, no activation fee
PremierTradeify · Rules: Supported Trading Products / Assets | Tradeify Help CenterAdded EUREX support on Tradovate accounts, added clarifying notes about silver and micro contracts, and added summary lists before each instrument table.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
− We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT.
− The full list is below, but you can also check Tradovate's website for more details.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
MINI Equity Futures
Section: MINI Equity Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Section: EUREX Index Futures
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
Mini-DAX | FDXM | EUREX
Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | EUREX
VSTOXX | FVS | EUREX
STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | EUREX
Micro DAX Index | FDXS | EUREX
Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | EUREX
EUREX Bond Futures
Section: EUREX Bond Futures
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Euro-Buxl | FGBX | EUREX
Euro-Schatz | FGBS | EUREX
Euro-Bobl | FGBM | EUREX
Euro-Bund | FGBL | EUREX
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Australian Dollar | 6A | CME
British Pound | 6B | CME
Japanese Yen | 6J | CME
Canadian Dollar | 6C | CME
Swiss Franc | 6S | CME
Euro FX | 6E | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Lean Hogs | HE | CME
Live Cattle | LE | CME
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT
Corn | ZC | CBOT
Wheat | ZW | CBOT
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT
MINI Energy Futures
Section: MINI Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX
MINI Metal Futures
Section: MINI Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Gold | GC | COMEX
Copper | HG | COMEX
Silver | SI | COMEX
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX
Platinum | PL | NYMEX
Palladium | PA | NYMEX
− ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
MICRO Futures (All Types)
Section: MICRO Futures (All Types)
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME
E-Micro Euro | M6E | CME
− ⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables above are supported.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
After
+ We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT, plus EUREX on Tradovate accounts.
+ The full list is below.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
+ ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
+ ⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables below are supported.
MINI Equity Futures
Section: MINI Equity Futures
+ Supported mini equity futures: E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME; Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Section: EUREX Index Futures
+ Supported EUREX index futures: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
Mini-DAX | FDXM | EUREX
Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | EUREX
VSTOXX | FVS | EUREX
STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | EUREX
Micro DAX Index | FDXS | EUREX
Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | EUREX
EUREX Bond Futures
Section: EUREX Bond Futures
+ Supported EUREX bond futures: Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Euro-Buxl | FGBX | EUREX
Euro-Schatz | FGBS | EUREX
Euro-Bobl | FGBM | EUREX
Euro-Bund | FGBL | EUREX
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
+ Supported currency futures: Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME; Euro FX (6E) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Australian Dollar | 6A | CME
British Pound | 6B | CME
Japanese Yen | 6J | CME
Canadian Dollar | 6C | CME
Swiss Franc | 6S | CME
Euro FX | 6E | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
+ Supported agricultural futures: Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Lean Hogs | HE | CME
Live Cattle | LE | CME
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT
Corn | ZC | CBOT
Wheat | ZW | CBOT
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT
MINI Energy Futures
Section: MINI Energy Futures
+ Supported mini energy futures: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX; E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX
MINI Metal Futures
Section: MINI Metal Futures
+ Supported mini metal futures: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Gold | GC | COMEX
Copper | HG | COMEX
Silver | SI | COMEX
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX
Platinum | PL | NYMEX
Palladium | PA | NYMEX
MICRO Futures (All Types)
Section: MICRO Futures (All Types)
+ Supported micro futures: Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME; E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX; Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME; E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME
E-Micro Euro | M6E | CME
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
− We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT.
− The full list is below, but you can also check Tradovate's website for more details.
+ We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT, plus EUREX on Tradovate accounts.
+ The full list is below.
ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
+ ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
+ ⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables below are supported.
MINI Equity Futures
Section: MINI Equity Futures
+ Supported mini equity futures: E-Mini Dow ($5) (YM) on CBOT; E-Mini S&P 500 (ES) on CME; E-Mini NASDAQ (NQ) on CME; E-Mini Russell (RTY) on CME; E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 (EMD) on CME; Nikkei 225 (USD) (NKD) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Section: EUREX Index Futures
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply
+ Supported EUREX index futures: DAX Index (FDAX) on EUREX; Mini-DAX (FDXM) on EUREX; Euro Stoxx 50 (FESX) on EUREX; VSTOXX (FVS) on EUREX; STOXX Europe 600 (FXXP) on EUREX; Micro DAX Index (FDXS) on EUREX; Micro Euro Stoxx 50 (FSXE) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
Mini-DAX | FDXM | EUREX
Euro Stoxx 50 | FESX | EUREX
VSTOXX | FVS | EUREX
STOXX Europe 600 | FXXP | EUREX
Micro DAX Index | FDXS | EUREX
Micro Euro Stoxx 50 | FSXE | EUREX
EUREX Bond Futures
Section: EUREX Bond Futures
− Additional exchange subscriptions apply
+ Supported EUREX bond futures: Euro-Buxl (FGBX) on EUREX; Euro-Schatz (FGBS) on EUREX; Euro-Bobl (FGBM) on EUREX; Euro-Bund (FGBL) on EUREX.
+ Additional exchange subscriptions apply. EUREX products are available on Tradovate accounts only.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Euro-Buxl | FGBX | EUREX
Euro-Schatz | FGBS | EUREX
Euro-Bobl | FGBM | EUREX
Euro-Bund | FGBL | EUREX
Currency Futures
Section: Currency Futures
+ Supported currency futures: Australian Dollar (6A) on CME; British Pound (6B) on CME; Japanese Yen (6J) on CME; Canadian Dollar (6C) on CME; Swiss Franc (6S) on CME; Euro FX (6E) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Australian Dollar | 6A | CME
British Pound | 6B | CME
Japanese Yen | 6J | CME
Canadian Dollar | 6C | CME
Swiss Franc | 6S | CME
Euro FX | 6E | CME
Agricultural Futures
Section: Agricultural Futures
+ Supported agricultural futures: Lean Hogs (HE) on CME; Live Cattle (LE) on CME; Feeder Cattle (GF) on CME; Soybeans (ZS) on CBOT; Soybean Oil (ZL) on CBOT; Corn (ZC) on CBOT; Wheat (ZW) on CBOT; Soybean Meal (ZM) on CBOT.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Lean Hogs | HE | CME
Live Cattle | LE | CME
Feeder Cattle | GF | CME
Soybeans | ZS | CBOT
Soybean Oil | ZL | CBOT
Corn | ZC | CBOT
Wheat | ZW | CBOT
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT
MINI Energy Futures
Section: MINI Energy Futures
+ Supported mini energy futures: Crude Oil (CL) on NYMEX; Natural Gas (NG) on NYMEX; E-Mini Crude Oil (QM) on NYMEX; E-Mini Natural Gas (QG) on NYMEX.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX
MINI Metal Futures
Section: MINI Metal Futures
+ Supported mini metal futures: Gold (GC) on COMEX; Copper (HG) on COMEX; Silver (SI) on COMEX; E-Mini Gold (QO) on COMEX; Platinum (PL) on NYMEX; Palladium (PA) on NYMEX.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Gold | GC | COMEX
Copper | HG | COMEX
Silver | SI | COMEX
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX
Platinum | PL | NYMEX
Palladium | PA | NYMEX
− ⚠️ Note: Silver (SI) here is the full-size 5,000 oz COMEX contract. The CME 1,000 oz Micro Silver (SIL) is not a Tradeify-supported product. There is no micro version of silver in our supported instruments — see the MICRO Futures table below.
MICRO Futures (All Types)
Section: MICRO Futures (All Types)
+ Supported micro futures: Micro E-Mini Dow (MYM) on CBOT; Micro E-Mini S&P 500 (MES) on CME; Micro E-Mini NASDAQ (MNQ) on CME; Micro E-Mini Russell (M2K) on CME; E-Micro Gold (MGC) on COMEX; Micro Crude Oil (MCL) on NYMEX; E-Micro Australian Dollar (M6A) on CME; E-Micro Euro (M6E) on CME.
Name | Symbol | Exchange
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME
E-Micro Euro | M6E | CME
− ⚠️ Note: MGC is E-Micro Gold, not silver. Do not confuse MGC (gold) with the unsupported Micro Silver (SIL). The only micro metal Tradeify supports is MGC. Never assume a micro version of a standard contract exists — only products listed in the tables above are supported.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade cryptocurrency or Bitcoin futures?
A: No. Tradeify does not support any cryptocurrency derivatives, including Bitcoin futures.
Q: Can I use the Tradovate API?
A: The Tradovate API is only available for LIVE funded accounts. It is not available for evaluation or sim funded accounts.
Q: Why does my P&L look different on EUREX products?
A: EUREX contracts are traded in euros but settled in USD. The currency conversion between EUR and USD explains any discrepancy you see between your trading P&L and your account balance.
PremierTradeify · Rules: Daily Loss Limit | Tradeify Help CenterEST changed to ET in legacy account description; all other content unchanged.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
25K | N/A | $600 | $500
50K | $1,250 | $1,250 | $1,000
100K | $2,500 | $2,500 | $1,250
150K | $3,000 | $3,750 | $1,750
DLL Increases at 6% Profit
When your account reaches 6% profit (balance reaches the threshold below), your DLL increases to match your drawdown amount. This larger DLL takes effect the NEXT trading session, not immediately.
Account | Balance Required | Lightning DLL Becomes | Growth DLL Becomes
25K | $26,500 | N/A | $1,000
50K | $53,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
100K | $106,000 | $4,000 | $3,500
150K | $159,000 | $5,250 | $5,000
Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
Section: Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
− If your account was purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST, you have the legacy DLL rules. When you reach the 6% profit threshold, your DLL is completely REMOVED (not just increased).
Example Scenario
Starting a 100K Growth account:
- Starting balance: $100,000
- Daily Loss Limit: $2,500
- Max Trailing Drawdown: $3,500 from high water mark
If you lose $2,500 in one day, the DLL triggers and trading pauses. You can trade again tomorrow.
Warning: If your high water mark is $101,000 and current balance is $99,000, your drawdown is only $2,000 away. Losing $2,500 would hit the drawdown BEFORE the DLL, failing your account.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do Select accounts have a DLL?
A: It depends on your payout policy. Select Daily funded accounts have a DLL ($500 for 25K, $1,000 for 50K, $1,250 for 100K, $1,750 for 150K). Select Flex (5-Day) funded accounts do not have a DLL - only the Max Trailing Drawdown applies.
Q: Does the DLL reset each day?
A: Yes. The DLL resets at the start of each trading session (6:00 PM ET). Yesterday's losses don't count toward today's limit.
After
25K | N/A | $600 | $500
50K | $1,250 | $1,250 | $1,000
100K | $2,500 | $2,500 | $1,250
150K | $3,000 | $3,750 | $1,750
DLL Increases at 6% Profit
When your account reaches 6% profit (balance reaches the threshold below), your DLL increases to match your drawdown amount. This larger DLL takes effect the NEXT trading session, not immediately.
Account | Balance Required | Lightning DLL Becomes | Growth DLL Becomes
25K | $26,500 | N/A | $1,000
50K | $53,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
100K | $106,000 | $4,000 | $3,500
150K | $159,000 | $5,250 | $5,000
Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
Section: Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
+ If your account was purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, you have the legacy DLL rules. When you reach the 6% profit threshold, your DLL is completely REMOVED (not just increased).
Example Scenario
Starting a 100K Growth account:
- Starting balance: $100,000
- Daily Loss Limit: $2,500
- Max Trailing Drawdown: $3,500 from high water mark
If you lose $2,500 in one day, the DLL triggers and trading pauses. You can trade again tomorrow.
Warning: If your high water mark is $101,000 and current balance is $99,000, your drawdown is only $2,000 away. Losing $2,500 would hit the drawdown BEFORE the DLL, failing your account.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do Select accounts have a DLL?
A: It depends on your payout policy. Select Daily funded accounts have a DLL ($500 for 25K, $1,000 for 50K, $1,250 for 100K, $1,750 for 150K). Select Flex (5-Day) funded accounts do not have a DLL - only the Max Trailing Drawdown applies.
Q: Does the DLL reset each day?
A: Yes. The DLL resets at the start of each trading session (6:00 PM ET). Yesterday's losses don't count toward today's limit.
25K | N/A | $600 | $500
50K | $1,250 | $1,250 | $1,000
100K | $2,500 | $2,500 | $1,250
150K | $3,000 | $3,750 | $1,750
DLL Increases at 6% Profit
When your account reaches 6% profit (balance reaches the threshold below), your DLL increases to match your drawdown amount. This larger DLL takes effect the NEXT trading session, not immediately.
Account | Balance Required | Lightning DLL Becomes | Growth DLL Becomes
25K | $26,500 | N/A | $1,000
50K | $53,000 | $2,000 | $2,000
100K | $106,000 | $4,000 | $3,500
150K | $159,000 | $5,250 | $5,000
Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
Section: Legacy Accounts (Purchased Before September 12, 2025)
− If your account was purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST, you have the legacy DLL rules. When you reach the 6% profit threshold, your DLL is completely REMOVED (not just increased).
+ If your account was purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, you have the legacy DLL rules. When you reach the 6% profit threshold, your DLL is completely REMOVED (not just increased).
Example Scenario
Starting a 100K Growth account:
- Starting balance: $100,000
- Daily Loss Limit: $2,500
- Max Trailing Drawdown: $3,500 from high water mark
If you lose $2,500 in one day, the DLL triggers and trading pauses. You can trade again tomorrow.
Warning: If your high water mark is $101,000 and current balance is $99,000, your drawdown is only $2,000 away. Losing $2,500 would hit the drawdown BEFORE the DLL, failing your account.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do Select accounts have a DLL?
A: It depends on your payout policy. Select Daily funded accounts have a DLL ($500 for 25K, $1,000 for 50K, $1,250 for 100K, $1,750 for 150K). Select Flex (5-Day) funded accounts do not have a DLL - only the Max Trailing Drawdown applies.
Q: Does the DLL reset each day?
A: Yes. The DLL resets at the start of each trading session (6:00 PM ET). Yesterday's losses don't count toward today's limit.
PremierTradeify · Rules: Consistency Rule | Tradeify Help CenterLightning Funded Accounts consistency rule effective date changed from EST to ET in two places; Growth Sim and Select rules unchanged.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The Consistency Rule requires traders to show steady performance before requesting a payout.
Specifically, no single day's profit (commissions are not included in profit) should exceed a set percentage of the trader's total profits over a given period.
This means your biggest day's profit must be at or below this percentage of your total profits. If your biggest day exceeds the percentage limit, you do not meet the consistency requirement yet and will need to continue trading smaller profitable days before requesting a payout. Any percentage at or below your limit meets the rule - 19.97% meets a 20% rule, and exactly 20.00% meets it too. Only a figure strictly above your limit fails. This encourages disciplined and steady trading behavior.
- Growth Sim Funded Accounts must follow a 35% Consistency Rule.
- Select Evaluation Accounts must follow a 40% Consistency Rule during the evaluation phase only. There is no consistency rule for Select accounts in funded mode.
− - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM EST must follow a gradual Consistency Rule:
- First payout: 20%
- Second payout: 25%
- Third and subsequent payouts: 30%
− - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM EST maintain the original 20% Consistency Rule for all payouts, without scaling.
To calculate the balance required to meet the Consistency Rule, use the following formula:
Biggest End of Day PnL / Consistency % = Total Balance Needed
For example, if your biggest day's profit is $1,000 and you must follow the 20% rule, the required total balance would be: $1,000 / 0.20 = $5,000. Another example: if your biggest day's profit is $2,682.10, the required total balance would be:
$2,682.10 / 0.20 = $13,410.50
Here's a sample chart using the same 20% rule, showing when an account is in line with the rule (green) and when it is not (red):
Why is the Consistency Rule Important?
Implementing the Consistency Rule is crucial for several reasons:
- Risk Management: It prevents traders from relying on a few high-risk trades to achieve overall profitability.
- Performance Stability: The rule encourages consistent performance, reducing the likelihood of erratic profit spikes.
- Discipline: It ensures traders maintain a steady approach and avoid taking excessive risks in pursuit of quick profits.
How Does the Consistency Rule Work?
No single trading day's profit should exceed the consistency percentage for your account type (40% for Select Evaluation, 35% for Growth, or 20-30% for Lightning Funded) of the total profits accumulated from the first day of trading up to the payout request date. To remain compliant with the 20% rule for Lightning Funded accounts, calculate using this method:
After
The Consistency Rule requires traders to show steady performance before requesting a payout.
Specifically, no single day's profit (commissions are not included in profit) should exceed a set percentage of the trader's total profits over a given period.
This means your biggest day's profit must be at or below this percentage of your total profits. If your biggest day exceeds the percentage limit, you do not meet the consistency requirement yet and will need to continue trading smaller profitable days before requesting a payout. Any percentage at or below your limit meets the rule - 19.97% meets a 20% rule, and exactly 20.00% meets it too. Only a figure strictly above your limit fails. This encourages disciplined and steady trading behavior.
- Growth Sim Funded Accounts must follow a 35% Consistency Rule.
- Select Evaluation Accounts must follow a 40% Consistency Rule during the evaluation phase only. There is no consistency rule for Select accounts in funded mode.
+ - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM ET must follow a gradual Consistency Rule:
- First payout: 20%
- Second payout: 25%
- Third and subsequent payouts: 30%
+ - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM ET maintain the original 20% Consistency Rule for all payouts, without scaling.
To calculate the balance required to meet the Consistency Rule, use the following formula:
Biggest End of Day PnL / Consistency % = Total Balance Needed
For example, if your biggest day's profit is $1,000 and you must follow the 20% rule, the required total balance would be: $1,000 / 0.20 = $5,000. Another example: if your biggest day's profit is $2,682.10, the required total balance would be:
$2,682.10 / 0.20 = $13,410.50
Here's a sample chart using the same 20% rule, showing when an account is in line with the rule (green) and when it is not (red):
Why is the Consistency Rule Important?
Implementing the Consistency Rule is crucial for several reasons:
- Risk Management: It prevents traders from relying on a few high-risk trades to achieve overall profitability.
- Performance Stability: The rule encourages consistent performance, reducing the likelihood of erratic profit spikes.
- Discipline: It ensures traders maintain a steady approach and avoid taking excessive risks in pursuit of quick profits.
How Does the Consistency Rule Work?
No single trading day's profit should exceed the consistency percentage for your account type (40% for Select Evaluation, 35% for Growth, or 20-30% for Lightning Funded) of the total profits accumulated from the first day of trading up to the payout request date. To remain compliant with the 20% rule for Lightning Funded accounts, calculate using this method:
The Consistency Rule requires traders to show steady performance before requesting a payout.
Specifically, no single day's profit (commissions are not included in profit) should exceed a set percentage of the trader's total profits over a given period.
This means your biggest day's profit must be at or below this percentage of your total profits. If your biggest day exceeds the percentage limit, you do not meet the consistency requirement yet and will need to continue trading smaller profitable days before requesting a payout. Any percentage at or below your limit meets the rule - 19.97% meets a 20% rule, and exactly 20.00% meets it too. Only a figure strictly above your limit fails. This encourages disciplined and steady trading behavior.
- Growth Sim Funded Accounts must follow a 35% Consistency Rule.
- Select Evaluation Accounts must follow a 40% Consistency Rule during the evaluation phase only. There is no consistency rule for Select accounts in funded mode.
− - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM EST must follow a gradual Consistency Rule:
+ - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM ET must follow a gradual Consistency Rule:
- First payout: 20%
- Second payout: 25%
- Third and subsequent payouts: 30%
− - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM EST maintain the original 20% Consistency Rule for all payouts, without scaling.
+ - Lightning Funded Accounts purchased before September 12, 2025, at 8:00 AM ET maintain the original 20% Consistency Rule for all payouts, without scaling.
To calculate the balance required to meet the Consistency Rule, use the following formula:
Biggest End of Day PnL / Consistency % = Total Balance Needed
For example, if your biggest day's profit is $1,000 and you must follow the 20% rule, the required total balance would be: $1,000 / 0.20 = $5,000. Another example: if your biggest day's profit is $2,682.10, the required total balance would be:
$2,682.10 / 0.20 = $13,410.50
Here's a sample chart using the same 20% rule, showing when an account is in line with the rule (green) and when it is not (red):
Why is the Consistency Rule Important?
Implementing the Consistency Rule is crucial for several reasons:
- Risk Management: It prevents traders from relying on a few high-risk trades to achieve overall profitability.
- Performance Stability: The rule encourages consistent performance, reducing the likelihood of erratic profit spikes.
- Discipline: It ensures traders maintain a steady approach and avoid taking excessive risks in pursuit of quick profits.
How Does the Consistency Rule Work?
No single trading day's profit should exceed the consistency percentage for your account type (40% for Select Evaluation, 35% for Growth, or 20-30% for Lightning Funded) of the total profits accumulated from the first day of trading up to the payout request date. To remain compliant with the 20% rule for Lightning Funded accounts, calculate using this method:
PremierTradeify · Lightning Funded Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterWarning about original parameters moved earlier, Daily Loss Limit note removed, and timezone abbreviation changed from EST to ET.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
A "Lightning Funded" account allows traders to skip the typical evaluation phases and begin trading simulated funds immediately. This gives Tradeify traders direct access to a simulated funded account with the potential to start earning profits towards their payout from day one.
Tradeify offers Lightning Funded account sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k & $150k. The rules for the Lightning Funded are stated in the table below:
Current Position Limits (September 2025+)
Account Size | Trading Days to Payout | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | None | None | $1,000 | 1 Contract(10 Micros)
$50k | None | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | None | $2,500 | $4,000 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | None | $3,000 | $5,250 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Please note: the Daily Loss Limit for 150k Lightning funded purchases made before March 31st is $3,750.
− ⚠️ Important: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original parameters, including on reset.
Instant Payouts: Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Legacy Position Limits (Pre-September 2025)
− The following limits apply ONLY to accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST. Most accounts use the current limits above.
Account Size | Legacy Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 Contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 Contracts (150 Micros)
Legacy 150K Risk Parameters (Pre-Dashboard Launch)
150K Lightning Funded accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain the following risk parameters, including on reset:
Account Size | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown
$150k | $3,750 | $6,000
For complete profit targets to achieve payouts on these accounts see here.
Lightning Funded Accounts use an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is calculated and based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
This offers more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday fluctuations do not move the drawdown level - it only updates at the end of the day. The level itself is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment during the day, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
After
A "Lightning Funded" account allows traders to skip the typical evaluation phases and begin trading simulated funds immediately. This gives Tradeify traders direct access to a simulated funded account with the potential to start earning profits towards their payout from day one.
+ ⚠️ Important: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original parameters, including on reset.
Tradeify offers Lightning Funded account sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k & $150k. The rules for the Lightning Funded are stated in the table below:
Current Position Limits (September 2025+)
Account Size | Trading Days to Payout | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | None | None | $1,000 | 1 Contract(10 Micros)
$50k | None | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | None | $2,500 | $4,000 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | None | $3,000 | $5,250 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Please note: the Daily Loss Limit for 150k Lightning funded purchases made before March 31st is $3,750.
Instant Payouts: Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Legacy Position Limits (Pre-September 2025)
+ The following limits apply ONLY to accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET. Most accounts use the current limits above.
Account Size | Legacy Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 Contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 Contracts (150 Micros)
Legacy 150K Risk Parameters (Pre-Dashboard Launch)
150K Lightning Funded accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain the following risk parameters, including on reset:
Account Size | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown
$150k | $3,750 | $6,000
For complete profit targets to achieve payouts on these accounts see here.
Lightning Funded Accounts use an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is calculated and based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
This offers more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday fluctuations do not move the drawdown level - it only updates at the end of the day. The level itself is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment during the day, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
A "Lightning Funded" account allows traders to skip the typical evaluation phases and begin trading simulated funds immediately. This gives Tradeify traders direct access to a simulated funded account with the potential to start earning profits towards their payout from day one.
+ ⚠️ Important: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original parameters, including on reset.
Tradeify offers Lightning Funded account sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k & $150k. The rules for the Lightning Funded are stated in the table below:
Current Position Limits (September 2025+)
Account Size | Trading Days to Payout | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | None | None | $1,000 | 1 Contract(10 Micros)
$50k | None | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | None | $2,500 | $4,000 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | None | $3,000 | $5,250 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Please note: the Daily Loss Limit for 150k Lightning funded purchases made before March 31st is $3,750.
− ⚠️ Important: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original parameters, including on reset.
Instant Payouts: Lightning Funded traders can now instantly request payouts directly from the dashboard once the consistency rule and profit objective are met.
Legacy Position Limits (Pre-September 2025)
− The following limits apply ONLY to accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST. Most accounts use the current limits above.
+ The following limits apply ONLY to accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET. Most accounts use the current limits above.
Account Size | Legacy Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 Contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 Contracts (150 Micros)
Legacy 150K Risk Parameters (Pre-Dashboard Launch)
150K Lightning Funded accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain the following risk parameters, including on reset:
Account Size | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown
$150k | $3,750 | $6,000
For complete profit targets to achieve payouts on these accounts see here.
Lightning Funded Accounts use an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is calculated and based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
This offers more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday fluctuations do not move the drawdown level - it only updates at the end of the day. The level itself is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment during the day, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
PremierTradeify · GROWTH™ Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterGROWTH™ evaluation minimum trading days reduced from 3 to 1, consistency rule removed, Daily Loss Limit added, payout policy changed to fixed; timezone notation changed from EST to ET; position size limits clarified for pre-September 12 accounts; activation fee terminology sim...Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradeify offers GROWTH™ evaluation accounts in sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k and $150k.
How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
GROWTH™ evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT™ evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
In summary: GROWTH™ evaluation is the fastest way to get funded. You can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, GROWTH™ has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT™ takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
GROWTH™ evaluation rules
The rules for GROWTH™ evaluation are stated in the table below.
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
− Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
The GROWTH™ evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday swings don't move the drawdown level. It only updates at the end of the day. The level is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
There is no activation fee for GROWTH™ Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
− - There is no time activation fee.
- If you pass a GROWTH™ evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
- Daily activation limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 GROWTH™ Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded accounts active at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
For more information on the payout policies for GROWTH™ Sim Funded accounts click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
After
Tradeify offers GROWTH™ evaluation accounts in sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k and $150k.
How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
GROWTH™ evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT™ evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
+ GROWTH™ evaluation has a minimum of 1 trading day, so you can pass immediately. It has no consistency rule. It has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach). It uses a fixed payout policy, with no choice. SELECT™ evaluation has a minimum of 3 trading days because of its consistency rule. Its consistency rule is 40%, so no single day can be more than 40% of profit. It has no Daily Loss Limit during the evaluation. After passing, you choose the Flex or Daily payout policy.
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
In summary: GROWTH™ evaluation is the fastest way to get funded. You can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, GROWTH™ has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT™ takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
GROWTH™ evaluation rules
The rules for GROWTH™ evaluation are stated in the table below.
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
+ On a $25k GROWTH™ evaluation, the profit target is $1,500, the Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) is $600, the trailing max drawdown is $1,000, and the max position size is 1 contract (10 micros). On a $50k account, the profit target is $3,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $1,250, the trailing max drawdown is $2,000, and the max position size is 4 contracts (40 micros). On a $100k account, the profit target is $6,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $2,500, the trailing max drawdown is $3,500, and the max position size is 8 contracts (80 micros). On a $150k account, the profit target is $9,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $3,750, the trailing max drawdown is $5,000, and the max position size is 12 contracts (120 micros).
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
+ Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ For GROWTH™ accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the max position size is 5 contracts (50 micros) on a 50k account, 10 contracts (100 micros) on a 100k account, and 15 contracts (150 micros) on a 150k account.
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
The GROWTH™ evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday swings don't move the drawdown level. It only updates at the end of the day. The level is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
There is no activation fee for GROWTH™ Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
+ - There is no activation fee.
- If you pass a GROWTH™ evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
- Daily activation limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 GROWTH™ Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded accounts active at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
For more information on the payout policies for GROWTH™ Sim Funded accounts click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
Tradeify offers GROWTH™ evaluation accounts in sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k and $150k.
How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
GROWTH™ evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT™ evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
+ GROWTH™ evaluation has a minimum of 1 trading day, so you can pass immediately. It has no consistency rule. It has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach). It uses a fixed payout policy, with no choice. SELECT™ evaluation has a minimum of 3 trading days because of its consistency rule. Its consistency rule is 40%, so no single day can be more than 40% of profit. It has no Daily Loss Limit during the evaluation. After passing, you choose the Flex or Daily payout policy.
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
In summary: GROWTH™ evaluation is the fastest way to get funded. You can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, GROWTH™ has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT™ takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
GROWTH™ evaluation rules
The rules for GROWTH™ evaluation are stated in the table below.
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
+ On a $25k GROWTH™ evaluation, the profit target is $1,500, the Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) is $600, the trailing max drawdown is $1,000, and the max position size is 1 contract (10 micros). On a $50k account, the profit target is $3,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $1,250, the trailing max drawdown is $2,000, and the max position size is 4 contracts (40 micros). On a $100k account, the profit target is $6,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $2,500, the trailing max drawdown is $3,500, and the max position size is 8 contracts (80 micros). On a $150k account, the profit target is $9,000, the Daily Loss Limit is $3,750, the trailing max drawdown is $5,000, and the max position size is 12 contracts (120 micros).
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
− Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
+ Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET
+ For GROWTH™ accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM ET, the max position size is 5 contracts (50 micros) on a 50k account, 10 contracts (100 micros) on a 100k account, and 15 contracts (150 micros) on a 150k account.
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
The GROWTH™ evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday swings don't move the drawdown level. It only updates at the end of the day. The level is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
There is no activation fee for GROWTH™ Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
GROWTH™ evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
− - There is no time activation fee.
+ - There is no activation fee.
- If you pass a GROWTH™ evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
- Daily activation limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 GROWTH™ Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded accounts active at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
For more information on the payout policies for GROWTH™ Sim Funded accounts click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Pricing Reference | Tradeify Help CenterGrowth and Select pricing added as plain text; Select 300K V2 price reduced from $449 to $349; Lightning pricing and commission fees added as plain text.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts).
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Section: Lightning Funded Pricing
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
- Growth 50K
- Select 25K
- Select 50K
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
CL (Crude Oil) | $5.66
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
After
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts).
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
+ Growth 25K costs $99, and a reset costs $60. Growth 50K costs $145, and a reset costs $95. Growth 100K costs $255, and a reset costs $169. Growth 150K costs $369, and a reset costs $229.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
+ With the standard 40% consistency rule, Select 25K costs $109, and a reset costs $75. Select 50K costs $165, and a reset costs $109. Select 100K costs $265, and a reset costs $169. Select 150K costs $369, and a reset costs $239. Select 300K (limited release) costs $349 (V2; V1 was $449), and resets are not available.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
+ With the 50% Consistency Add-on, Select 25K costs $135, and a reset costs $90. Select 50K costs $205, and a reset costs $135. Select 100K costs $329, and a reset costs $209. Select 150K costs $459, and a reset costs $299. The 50% Consistency Add-on is not available on the Select 300K.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Section: Lightning Funded Pricing
+ Lightning 25K costs $345. Lightning 50K costs $492. Lightning 100K costs $660. Lightning 150K costs $796.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
- Growth 50K
- Select 25K
- Select 50K
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
+ The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.66 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
CL (Crude Oil) | $5.66
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts).
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
+ Growth 25K costs $99, and a reset costs $60. Growth 50K costs $145, and a reset costs $95. Growth 100K costs $255, and a reset costs $169. Growth 150K costs $369, and a reset costs $229.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
+ With the standard 40% consistency rule, Select 25K costs $109, and a reset costs $75. Select 50K costs $165, and a reset costs $109. Select 100K costs $265, and a reset costs $169. Select 150K costs $369, and a reset costs $239. Select 300K (limited release) costs $349 (V2; V1 was $449), and resets are not available.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
+ With the 50% Consistency Add-on, Select 25K costs $135, and a reset costs $90. Select 50K costs $205, and a reset costs $135. Select 100K costs $329, and a reset costs $209. Select 150K costs $459, and a reset costs $299. The 50% Consistency Add-on is not available on the Select 300K.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Section: Lightning Funded Pricing
+ Lightning 25K costs $345. Lightning 50K costs $492. Lightning 100K costs $660. Lightning 150K costs $796.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Lightning 25K | $345
Lightning 50K | $492
Lightning 100K | $660
Lightning 150K | $796
Bundle Discounts
Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on select Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 qualifying accounts of the same type and size in one order and receive an automatic 5% discount. This is the only way to buy more than one account in a single checkout — there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 together.
Eligible Bundle Accounts
- Growth 25K
- Growth 50K
- Select 25K
- Select 50K
- Stacks with promo codes: If you also enter an active promo code, both discounts apply. Example: 5× Select 25K = $545 → bundle 5% off = $517 → with a 40% promo code = approximately $310.
- Single checkout only: The bundle is all-or-nothing: there is no option to buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts together at a discount. To buy any number other than 5, complete separate single-account purchases (each at full price). The discount applies per transaction and won't apply retroactively to a later order.
Activation Fees
There are no activation fees for any current Tradeify account type. The purchase price covers everything needed to start trading.
Platform and Data Fees
- Market data (Non-Professional): Free — you must sign the Non-Professional Agreement on your first Tradovate login. If you do not sign it, you may incur a $300/month professional data fee. Level 2 (L2) and EUREX are optional paid add-ons available on Tradovate accounts only, billed by Tradovate.
- Rithmic: No additional platform fee. Same pricing as Tradovate and other platforms. Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- Tradesea: No additional platform fee. Uses Rithmic data — Level 1 CME only.
- WealthCharts: No additional platform fee. Same price as Tradovate and Rithmic. Operated by a third party with its own login credentials (separate from Tradovate/Tradeify). Level 1 CME market data included; Level 2 and EUREX add-ons are not yet available — coming soon.
- TradingView (optional): Free TradingView accounts have approximately 5-second delayed data. Paid TradingView subscriptions start at $12.95/month (paid directly to TradingView).
Trading Commission Fees
All trades incur commission fees. These are per-contract, round-trip (open + close) fees charged by the exchange and broker. Common instruments:
Section: Trading Commission Fees
+ The round-trip commission per contract is $5.76 for ES (E-mini S&P 500), $5.76 for NQ (E-mini Nasdaq), $1.82 for MES (Micro E-mini S&P), $1.82 for MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq), $5.66 for CL (Crude Oil), and $6.20 for GC (Gold).
Instrument | Round-Trip Commission
ES (E-mini S&P 500) | $5.76
NQ (E-mini Nasdaq) | $5.76
MES (Micro E-mini S&P) | $1.82
MNQ (Micro E-mini Nasdaq) | $1.82
CL (Crude Oil) | $5.66
GC (Gold) | $6.20
Important: Trading 10 micro contracts costs significantly more in commissions than 1 mini contract (e.g., 10 MES = $18.20 vs 1 ES = $5.76). For a full list of commission fees by instrument, see the Trading Commission Fees article.
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
PremierTradeify · Data Feed Issues and Market Data Troubleshooting | Tradeify Help CenterClarified that NinjaTrader uses its own connection type with Tradovate credentials, not a separate Tradovate connection type.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Try incognito/private browsing mode
- Switch to different timeframe and back
- Try a different browser
Tradovate Mobile App
Mobile app shows delayed data:
- Force close and restart the app
- Check your internet connection (try WiFi vs cellular)
- Log out and log back in
- Update app to the latest version
- Restart your phone if issues persist
NinjaTrader Platform
"No data available" or connection errors:
Section: NinjaTrader Platform
− - Verify Tradovate connection status in NinjaTrader
- Check credentials match your Tradeify dashboard exactly
- Ensure "Simulation" is selected (not "Live")
- If recently activated, wait 15 minutes after web platform shows data
- Restart NinjaTrader completely
Understanding Your Market Data
Included FREE with Tradeify
CME Group Level 1 Data :All major futures contracts
✅ Real-time price feeds - No delays during market hours
✅ All supported platforms - Tradovate, NinjaTrader, mobile apps
✅ Top-of-book pricing - Best bid and best ask information
Optional Upgrades (Tradovate accounts only — purchase from Tradovate)
Level 2 Data: Advanced order book information
After
- Try incognito/private browsing mode
- Switch to different timeframe and back
- Try a different browser
Tradovate Mobile App
Mobile app shows delayed data:
- Force close and restart the app
- Check your internet connection (try WiFi vs cellular)
- Log out and log back in
- Update app to the latest version
- Restart your phone if issues persist
NinjaTrader Platform
"No data available" or connection errors:
Section: NinjaTrader Platform
+ - Verify the NinjaTrader connection is connected (NinjaTrader uses its own "NinjaTrader" connection type with your Tradovate credentials; there is no Tradovate connection type)
- Check credentials match your Tradeify dashboard exactly
- Ensure "Simulation" is selected (not "Live")
- If recently activated, wait 15 minutes after web platform shows data
- Restart NinjaTrader completely
Understanding Your Market Data
Included FREE with Tradeify
CME Group Level 1 Data :All major futures contracts
✅ Real-time price feeds - No delays during market hours
✅ All supported platforms - Tradovate, NinjaTrader, mobile apps
✅ Top-of-book pricing - Best bid and best ask information
Optional Upgrades (Tradovate accounts only — purchase from Tradovate)
Level 2 Data: Advanced order book information
- Try incognito/private browsing mode
- Switch to different timeframe and back
- Try a different browser
Tradovate Mobile App
Mobile app shows delayed data:
- Force close and restart the app
- Check your internet connection (try WiFi vs cellular)
- Log out and log back in
- Update app to the latest version
- Restart your phone if issues persist
NinjaTrader Platform
"No data available" or connection errors:
Section: NinjaTrader Platform
− - Verify Tradovate connection status in NinjaTrader
+ - Verify the NinjaTrader connection is connected (NinjaTrader uses its own "NinjaTrader" connection type with your Tradovate credentials; there is no Tradovate connection type)
- Check credentials match your Tradeify dashboard exactly
- Ensure "Simulation" is selected (not "Live")
- If recently activated, wait 15 minutes after web platform shows data
- Restart NinjaTrader completely
Understanding Your Market Data
Included FREE with Tradeify
CME Group Level 1 Data :All major futures contracts
✅ Real-time price feeds - No delays during market hours
✅ All supported platforms - Tradovate, NinjaTrader, mobile apps
✅ Top-of-book pricing - Best bid and best ask information
Optional Upgrades (Tradovate accounts only — purchase from Tradovate)
Level 2 Data: Advanced order book information
PremierTradeify · Platform Connection Troubleshooting | Tradeify Help CenterSupported platforms list changed from Tradovate, WealthCharts, and NinjaTrader to Tradovate with NinjaTrader and TradingView, Rithmic with multiple platforms, and WealthCharts.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
TradingView is a third-party software application that operate independently of Tradeify's systems. Issues arising from these third-party platforms' API connectivity, software bugs, data feed problems, or other technical malfunctions are outside Tradeify's control and support scope. Accounts affected by third-party software issues will not be repaired or adjusted by Tradeify.
Section: 🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
− Supported Platforms: Tradovate, WealthCharts, and NinjaTrader are directly supported by Tradeify.
Quick Diagnosis Checklist
Before diving into specific solutions, run through this quick checklist:
- Internet connection is stable and active
- Platform credentials are correct and current
- Account status is active with Tradeify
- Platform updates - using latest version of software
- System requirements are met for the platform
- Configure and test your stop-loss settings within a practice environment to ensure reliability during live trading.
General Connection Issues - Credential Problems
Symptoms: "Invalid credentials" or "Access denied" errors
Solutions:
- Verify credentials from Tradeify dashboard
After
🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
TradingView is a third-party software application that operate independently of Tradeify's systems. Issues arising from these third-party platforms' API connectivity, software bugs, data feed problems, or other technical malfunctions are outside Tradeify's control and support scope. Accounts affected by third-party software issues will not be repaired or adjusted by Tradeify.
Section: 🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
+ Supported Platforms: Tradovate (with NinjaTrader and TradingView), Rithmic (with Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader), and WealthCharts are supported by Tradeify.
Quick Diagnosis Checklist
Before diving into specific solutions, run through this quick checklist:
- Internet connection is stable and active
- Platform credentials are correct and current
- Account status is active with Tradeify
- Platform updates - using latest version of software
- System requirements are met for the platform
- Configure and test your stop-loss settings within a practice environment to ensure reliability during live trading.
General Connection Issues - Credential Problems
Symptoms: "Invalid credentials" or "Access denied" errors
Solutions:
- Verify credentials from Tradeify dashboard
🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
TradingView is a third-party software application that operate independently of Tradeify's systems. Issues arising from these third-party platforms' API connectivity, software bugs, data feed problems, or other technical malfunctions are outside Tradeify's control and support scope. Accounts affected by third-party software issues will not be repaired or adjusted by Tradeify.
Section: 🚨 Important Third-Party Software Notice
− Supported Platforms: Tradovate, WealthCharts, and NinjaTrader are directly supported by Tradeify.
+ Supported Platforms: Tradovate (with NinjaTrader and TradingView), Rithmic (with Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader), and WealthCharts are supported by Tradeify.
Quick Diagnosis Checklist
Before diving into specific solutions, run through this quick checklist:
- Internet connection is stable and active
- Platform credentials are correct and current
- Account status is active with Tradeify
- Platform updates - using latest version of software
- System requirements are met for the platform
- Configure and test your stop-loss settings within a practice environment to ensure reliability during live trading.
General Connection Issues - Credential Problems
Symptoms: "Invalid credentials" or "Access denied" errors
Solutions:
- Verify credentials from Tradeify dashboard
PremierTradeify · Supported Platforms | Tradeify Help CenterRevised broker selection guidance to present Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts as equal-priced options and added R|Trader to Rithmic's available platforms.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Section: Which platform should I choose?
− Tradovate is a great starting point — it's cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic is ideal if you want access to Tradesea, Quantower, or Sierra Chart. WealthCharts is for traders who specifically want WealthCharts' advanced charting tools.
After
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Section: Which platform should I choose?
+ Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts are equal options at the same price. Choose the broker that gives you the platform you want to use. Tradovate is cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic gives you access to Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader. WealthCharts gives you access to the WealthCharts platform only.
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Section: Which platform should I choose?
− Tradovate is a great starting point — it's cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic is ideal if you want access to Tradesea, Quantower, or Sierra Chart. WealthCharts is for traders who specifically want WealthCharts' advanced charting tools.
+ Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts are equal options at the same price. Choose the broker that gives you the platform you want to use. Tradovate is cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic gives you access to Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader. WealthCharts gives you access to the WealthCharts platform only.
PremierTradeify · Understanding CME Contracts: A Complete Guide | Tradeify Help CenterTrade positioning requirement changed to mandate daily position closure by 4:45 PM ET instead of allowing longer-term holdings with rolling.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Professional traders roll before expiration
- Avoid trading contracts close to expiration
Why This Matters for Your Trading
Liquidity Issues
Trading expired or near-expired contracts can cause:
- Poor fill prices
- Wide bid-ask spreads
- Difficulty entering/exiting positions
- Slippage on larger orders
Contract Selection Best Practices
✅ Trade the front month contract (highest volume)
✅ Check expiration dates before opening positions
Section: Why This Matters for Your Trading
− ✅ Roll positions before expiration if holding longer-term
✅ Use CME calendars to verify active contracts
❌ Don't trade contracts within 1-2 weeks of expiration
❌ Don't assume all months have the same liquidity
❌ Don't roll backwards (from Dec to Nov - always forward)
Common Contract Expiration Schedule
Quarterly Contracts (Most Liquid)
ES, NQ, RTY, YM: March (H), June (M), September (U), December (Z)
Monthly Contracts
Some products trade every month, others only quarterly
Serial Expiration
Contracts expire on the 3rd Friday of the contract month (typically)
How to Stay Informed
After
- Professional traders roll before expiration
- Avoid trading contracts close to expiration
Why This Matters for Your Trading
Liquidity Issues
Trading expired or near-expired contracts can cause:
- Poor fill prices
- Wide bid-ask spreads
- Difficulty entering/exiting positions
- Slippage on larger orders
Contract Selection Best Practices
✅ Trade the front month contract (highest volume)
✅ Check expiration dates before opening positions
Section: Why This Matters for Your Trading
+ ✅ Trade the front-month contract and switch to the next contract before expiration (Tradeify positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET each day)
✅ Use CME calendars to verify active contracts
❌ Don't trade contracts within 1-2 weeks of expiration
❌ Don't assume all months have the same liquidity
❌ Don't roll backwards (from Dec to Nov - always forward)
Common Contract Expiration Schedule
Quarterly Contracts (Most Liquid)
ES, NQ, RTY, YM: March (H), June (M), September (U), December (Z)
Monthly Contracts
Some products trade every month, others only quarterly
Serial Expiration
Contracts expire on the 3rd Friday of the contract month (typically)
How to Stay Informed
- Professional traders roll before expiration
- Avoid trading contracts close to expiration
Why This Matters for Your Trading
Liquidity Issues
Trading expired or near-expired contracts can cause:
- Poor fill prices
- Wide bid-ask spreads
- Difficulty entering/exiting positions
- Slippage on larger orders
Contract Selection Best Practices
✅ Trade the front month contract (highest volume)
✅ Check expiration dates before opening positions
Section: Why This Matters for Your Trading
− ✅ Roll positions before expiration if holding longer-term
+ ✅ Trade the front-month contract and switch to the next contract before expiration (Tradeify positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET each day)
✅ Use CME calendars to verify active contracts
❌ Don't trade contracts within 1-2 weeks of expiration
❌ Don't assume all months have the same liquidity
❌ Don't roll backwards (from Dec to Nov - always forward)
Common Contract Expiration Schedule
Quarterly Contracts (Most Liquid)
ES, NQ, RTY, YM: March (H), June (M), September (U), December (Z)
Monthly Contracts
Some products trade every month, others only quarterly
Serial Expiration
Contracts expire on the 3rd Friday of the contract month (typically)
How to Stay Informed
PremierTradeify · What is a Trading Day? | Tradeify Help CenterTime zone abbreviations changed from EST/EDT to ET in four locations throughout the article.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
− A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
− Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including the 10-second rule on funded accounts: over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
− For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M EST and then another at 7:00 P.M EST on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
After
+ A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. ET to 5:00 P.M. ET the next day.
+ Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. ET to 5:00 P.M. ET on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including the 10-second rule on funded accounts: over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
+ For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M ET and then another at 7:00 P.M ET on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
− A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
− Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
+ A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. ET to 5:00 P.M. ET the next day.
+ Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. ET to 5:00 P.M. ET on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including the 10-second rule on funded accounts: over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
− For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M EST and then another at 7:00 P.M EST on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
+ For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M ET and then another at 7:00 P.M ET on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterReconciliation window changed from 5-8 PM ET to 5-6 PM ET in two locations.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you have met all of your evaluation objectives, go to your dashboard and click Activate Account on the account card. Activation is instant and there are no activation fees.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
− - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
- Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you have met every evaluation objective. Activation is instant once all of these are met. Residents of some countries must also complete identity verification (KYC) before activating.
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
- No, this is not normal. Funded account activation is instant once your objectives are met.
- Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → click Activate Account on your dashboard. There is no waiting period.
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you still see this message more than a few hours after activating, this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your broker (Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts) and account number for investigation.
After
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-6 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you have met all of your evaluation objectives, go to your dashboard and click Activate Account on the account card. Activation is instant and there are no activation fees.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
+ - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-6 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
- Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you have met every evaluation objective. Activation is instant once all of these are met. Residents of some countries must also complete identity verification (KYC) before activating.
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
- No, this is not normal. Funded account activation is instant once your objectives are met.
- Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → click Activate Account on your dashboard. There is no waiting period.
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you still see this message more than a few hours after activating, this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your broker (Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts) and account number for investigation.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
+ A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-6 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you have met all of your evaluation objectives, go to your dashboard and click Activate Account on the account card. Activation is instant and there are no activation fees.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
− - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
+ - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-6 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
- Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you have met every evaluation objective. Activation is instant once all of these are met. Residents of some countries must also complete identity verification (KYC) before activating.
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
- No, this is not normal. Funded account activation is instant once your objectives are met.
- Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → click Activate Account on your dashboard. There is no waiting period.
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you still see this message more than a few hours after activating, this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your broker (Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts) and account number for investigation.
PremierTradeify · Essential Trading Rules Overview | Tradeify Help CenterEST/EDT changed to ET, and Growth account type renamed to Growth Funded with additional rule clarification.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
- Regular Trading Days: Close all positions by 4:45 PM Eastern Time (Monday-Friday)
- Holiday Early Close Days: Close all positions by 12:59 PM Eastern Time
Trading Hours
- Market Open: 6:00 PM Eastern Time (Sunday to Thursday evenings)
- Market Close: 5:00 PM Eastern Time (Monday to Friday)
Automatic Position Closure
Any positions left open when the market closes will be automatically closed by Tradeify. This will not result in account failure or penalties.
Trading Day Definition
Section: Trading Day Definition
− A trading day runs from 6:00 PM EST/EDT to 5:00 PM EST/EDT the next calendar day.
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
- On funded accounts, payout requests require over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
− Growth: 35% limit
Lightning Funded: 20% for the first payout, 25% for the second, 30% from the third (accounts bought after September 12, 2025)
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Restrictions: None - news trading is allowed on all accounts
After
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
- Regular Trading Days: Close all positions by 4:45 PM Eastern Time (Monday-Friday)
- Holiday Early Close Days: Close all positions by 12:59 PM Eastern Time
Trading Hours
- Market Open: 6:00 PM Eastern Time (Sunday to Thursday evenings)
- Market Close: 5:00 PM Eastern Time (Monday to Friday)
Automatic Position Closure
Any positions left open when the market closes will be automatically closed by Tradeify. This will not result in account failure or penalties.
Trading Day Definition
Section: Trading Day Definition
+ A trading day runs from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next calendar day.
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
- On funded accounts, payout requests require over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
+ Growth Funded: 35% limit (the Growth Evaluation has no consistency rule)
Lightning Funded: 20% for the first payout, 25% for the second, 30% from the third (accounts bought after September 12, 2025)
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Restrictions: None - news trading is allowed on all accounts
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
- Regular Trading Days: Close all positions by 4:45 PM Eastern Time (Monday-Friday)
- Holiday Early Close Days: Close all positions by 12:59 PM Eastern Time
Trading Hours
- Market Open: 6:00 PM Eastern Time (Sunday to Thursday evenings)
- Market Close: 5:00 PM Eastern Time (Monday to Friday)
Automatic Position Closure
Any positions left open when the market closes will be automatically closed by Tradeify. This will not result in account failure or penalties.
Trading Day Definition
Section: Trading Day Definition
− A trading day runs from 6:00 PM EST/EDT to 5:00 PM EST/EDT the next calendar day.
+ A trading day runs from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next calendar day.
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
- On funded accounts, payout requests require over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
− Growth: 35% limit
+ Growth Funded: 35% limit (the Growth Evaluation has no consistency rule)
Lightning Funded: 20% for the first payout, 25% for the second, 30% from the third (accounts bought after September 12, 2025)
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Restrictions: None - news trading is allowed on all accounts
PremierTradeify · How Do I Start Trading? | Tradeify Help CenterAdded note that Tradovate setup is covered in this guide, with links to separate setup guides for Rithmic and WealthCharts accounts.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
First choose an account of your preference, sign up and complete your purchase. After that you'll receive immediate access to begin trading. Here's your step-by-step setup process:
Step 1: Account Purchase
First, go to https://www.tradeify.co/#pricing-section to see our current plans and prices. In this case, I am Starting With a Growth 150k account
Once you have signed up to an evaluation you will be sent to the following page:
You can access your Tradovate login details via the 'Go to Dashboard' link or through the email confirmation that you will receive.
If you click on 'Go to Dashboard' you will see your Tradovate login details to begin trading:
Click 'Start Trading', use the Username and Password and following the instructions from Tradovate.
Then click where it says Launch to access to the Simulation Environment (these are simulated accounts)
If it's your first purchase, you will be prompted to sign the Non Professional Data agreement.
This is mandatory step. If you don't sign the agreement, you wont have real time data.
Articles to Help you Setup the Platform:
- Platform | Tradovate Setup and Configuration
- Platform | NinjaTrader 8 Setup Guide
After
First choose an account of your preference, sign up and complete your purchase. After that you'll receive immediate access to begin trading. Here's your step-by-step setup process:
+ This guide shows the setup for a Tradovate account. Rithmic and WealthCharts accounts have their own setup guides. For Rithmic, see the Tradesea Setup Guide, Quantower Setup Guide, Sierra Chart Setup Guide, or R|Trader Pro Setup Guide. For WealthCharts, see the WealthCharts Platform Overview.
Step 1: Account Purchase
First, go to https://www.tradeify.co/#pricing-section to see our current plans and prices. In this case, I am Starting With a Growth 150k account
Once you have signed up to an evaluation you will be sent to the following page:
You can access your Tradovate login details via the 'Go to Dashboard' link or through the email confirmation that you will receive.
If you click on 'Go to Dashboard' you will see your Tradovate login details to begin trading:
Click 'Start Trading', use the Username and Password and following the instructions from Tradovate.
Then click where it says Launch to access to the Simulation Environment (these are simulated accounts)
If it's your first purchase, you will be prompted to sign the Non Professional Data agreement.
This is mandatory step. If you don't sign the agreement, you wont have real time data.
Articles to Help you Setup the Platform:
- Platform | Tradovate Setup and Configuration
- Platform | NinjaTrader 8 Setup Guide
First choose an account of your preference, sign up and complete your purchase. After that you'll receive immediate access to begin trading. Here's your step-by-step setup process:
+ This guide shows the setup for a Tradovate account. Rithmic and WealthCharts accounts have their own setup guides. For Rithmic, see the Tradesea Setup Guide, Quantower Setup Guide, Sierra Chart Setup Guide, or R|Trader Pro Setup Guide. For WealthCharts, see the WealthCharts Platform Overview.
Step 1: Account Purchase
First, go to https://www.tradeify.co/#pricing-section to see our current plans and prices. In this case, I am Starting With a Growth 150k account
Once you have signed up to an evaluation you will be sent to the following page:
You can access your Tradovate login details via the 'Go to Dashboard' link or through the email confirmation that you will receive.
If you click on 'Go to Dashboard' you will see your Tradovate login details to begin trading:
Click 'Start Trading', use the Username and Password and following the instructions from Tradovate.
Then click where it says Launch to access to the Simulation Environment (these are simulated accounts)
If it's your first purchase, you will be prompted to sign the Non Professional Data agreement.
This is mandatory step. If you don't sign the agreement, you wont have real time data.
Articles to Help you Setup the Platform:
- Platform | Tradovate Setup and Configuration
- Platform | NinjaTrader 8 Setup Guide
PremierTradeify · KYC and AML Policy | Tradeify Help CenterIdentity verification timing requirements changed based on account type and geographic location, with separate rules for Tradeify Futures versus Tradeify 247.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
− Tradeify runs two separate verifications. Identity verification (KYC and AML) is required to activate your funded account — it's part of your purchase for Instant Funding accounts, and is required after you pass for evaluation accounts. Payout provider verification is a separate step you complete before your first payout. This guide explains both.
Our KYC and AML Policy
Tradeify is required by regulators and by our vendor and banking partners to enforce both Know Your Customer (KYC) and Anti-Money Laundering (AML) controls on every funded trader. We perform these checks through Sumsub, a regulated identity-verification and AML compliance provider.
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
Section: Our KYC and AML Policy
− You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard. For Instant Funding accounts it's part of your purchase; for evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X) it's required after you pass, before your funded account is activated. You can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
Section: Overview: Two-Step Verification
− - Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required to activate your funded account: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluation accounts.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
Section: When is it required?
− - Instant Funding accounts: identity verification is part of your purchase
− - Evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
- Crypto purchases require identity verification at the time of purchase, regardless of account type.
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
After completing Tradeify verification, you must also complete verification with your payout provider. This is a separate verification process required by the payment processor.
Rise (Default Provider)
Rise is Tradeify's primary payout provider for most countries.
- After your Tradeify KYC is approved, you'll receive a Rise onboarding invitation via email
- Complete Rise's verification process (ID, address verification, tax forms)
- Set up your Rise Wallet for receiving payouts
- Rise supports bank transfers and crypto withdrawals
- Processing typically takes 1-3 business days
If you already have a verified Rise account with the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved.
Section: Rise (Default Provider)
− Tradeify uses Rise exclusively for payouts. If Rise doesn't support your country, contact Tradeify support for assistance.
− If Rise is not available in your country, Tradeify will use Plane as an alternative payout provider.
What Documents Do I Need?
For Tradeify Verification
- Government-issued photo ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Yourself (for liveness selfie check)
For Payout Provider (Rise)
- Government-issued ID
- Proof of address (utility bill, bank statement)
- Tax information (W-9 for US residents, W-8BEN for international)
Frequently Asked Questions
Do I need to complete both verifications?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− Yes. Tradeify identity verification is required to activate your funded account (part of your purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluations), and payout provider verification is required before you receive payouts.
When do I need to complete KYC?
− For Instant Funding accounts, KYC is part of your purchase. For evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X), it's required after you pass — before your funded account is activated. You can start identity verification at any time from your dashboard, and we recommend doing it early to avoid delays.
How long does verification take?
Tradeify verification is usually approved within minutes (automated). Payout provider verification (Rise) typically takes 1-3 business days.
What if my verification fails?
Contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information between your ID and account details.
Which payout provider will I use?
− Rise is the default provider for most countries. If Rise doesn't support your country, you may contact support to explore other options.
Do I have to complete this even if I live in the US?
Yes. All funded traders, both domestic and international, must complete KYC verification.
Is my data secure?
Yes. Both Tradeify and our payout providers use industry-standard encryption and security practices to protect your personal information.
What AML checks does Tradeify perform?
Through Sumsub, we screen every funded trader against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media. Screening is re-run on an ongoing basis, not just at signup. This is a regulatory requirement and is also required by our banking and payout partners.
I already have a Rise account. Do I need to verify again?
If your Rise account is in good standing and uses the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved. You still need to complete Tradeify's verification separately.
After
+ Tradeify runs two separate verifications. Identity verification (KYC and AML) is required for every funded trader. When it is required depends on whether you trade with Tradeify Futures or Tradeify 247 — see "When is it required?" below. Payout provider verification with Rise is a separate step you complete before your first payout. This guide explains both.
Our KYC and AML Policy
Tradeify is required by regulators and by our vendor and banking partners to enforce both Know Your Customer (KYC) and Anti-Money Laundering (AML) controls on every funded trader. We perform these checks through Sumsub, a regulated identity-verification and AML compliance provider.
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
Section: Our KYC and AML Policy
+ You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard, and you can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below, including when it is required for your account.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
Section: Overview: Two-Step Verification
+ - Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required before your first payout, or earlier in the cases listed under Step 1.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
Section: When is it required?
+ - Tradeify Futures (Growth, Select, Lightning): identity verification is required before your first payout
+ - Tradeify Futures, residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates: identity verification is required before you receive a funded account, including Lightning Funded accounts
+ - Tradeify 247 Instant Funding: identity verification is part of your purchase
+ - Tradeify 247 evaluations (2-Step, 1-Step, and legacy APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
- Crypto purchases require identity verification at the time of purchase, regardless of account type.
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
After completing Tradeify verification, you must also complete verification with your payout provider. This is a separate verification process required by the payment processor.
Rise (Default Provider)
Rise is Tradeify's primary payout provider for most countries.
- After your Tradeify KYC is approved, you'll receive a Rise onboarding invitation via email
- Complete Rise's verification process (ID, address verification, tax forms)
- Set up your Rise Wallet for receiving payouts
- Rise supports bank transfers and crypto withdrawals
- Processing typically takes 1-3 business days
If you already have a verified Rise account with the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved.
Section: Rise (Default Provider)
+ Rise is Tradeify's default payout provider.
+ Tradeify Futures: if Rise is not available in your country, Tradeify will use Plane as an alternative payout provider. Tradeify 247 also offers crypto payouts through Confirmo.
What Documents Do I Need?
For Tradeify Verification
- Government-issued photo ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Yourself (for liveness selfie check)
For Payout Provider (Rise)
- Government-issued ID
- Proof of address (utility bill, bank statement)
- Tax information (W-9 for US residents, W-8BEN for international)
Frequently Asked Questions
Do I need to complete both verifications?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ Yes. Both Tradeify identity verification and payout provider verification are required before you receive your first payout (and identity verification may be needed earlier, as explained below).
When do I need to complete KYC?
+ Tradeify Futures: before your first payout; residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates must complete it before they receive a funded account. Tradeify 247: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass and before activation for 2-Step and 1-Step evaluations. On both brands, crypto purchases require it at checkout. You can start identity verification at any time from your dashboard, and we recommend doing it early to avoid delays.
How long does verification take?
Tradeify verification is usually approved within minutes (automated). Payout provider verification (Rise) typically takes 1-3 business days.
What if my verification fails?
Contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information between your ID and account details.
Which payout provider will I use?
+ Rise is the default provider for most countries. If Rise doesn't support your country, Tradeify Futures uses Plane as the alternative payout provider. Tradeify 247 also offers crypto payouts through Confirmo.
Do I have to complete this even if I live in the US?
Yes. All funded traders, both domestic and international, must complete KYC verification.
Is my data secure?
Yes. Both Tradeify and our payout providers use industry-standard encryption and security practices to protect your personal information.
What AML checks does Tradeify perform?
Through Sumsub, we screen every funded trader against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media. Screening is re-run on an ongoing basis, not just at signup. This is a regulatory requirement and is also required by our banking and payout partners.
I already have a Rise account. Do I need to verify again?
If your Rise account is in good standing and uses the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved. You still need to complete Tradeify's verification separately.
− Tradeify runs two separate verifications. Identity verification (KYC and AML) is required to activate your funded account — it's part of your purchase for Instant Funding accounts, and is required after you pass for evaluation accounts. Payout provider verification is a separate step you complete before your first payout. This guide explains both.
+ Tradeify runs two separate verifications. Identity verification (KYC and AML) is required for every funded trader. When it is required depends on whether you trade with Tradeify Futures or Tradeify 247 — see "When is it required?" below. Payout provider verification with Rise is a separate step you complete before your first payout. This guide explains both.
Our KYC and AML Policy
Tradeify is required by regulators and by our vendor and banking partners to enforce both Know Your Customer (KYC) and Anti-Money Laundering (AML) controls on every funded trader. We perform these checks through Sumsub, a regulated identity-verification and AML compliance provider.
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
Section: Our KYC and AML Policy
− You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard. For Instant Funding accounts it's part of your purchase; for evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X) it's required after you pass, before your funded account is activated. You can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below.
+ You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard, and you can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below, including when it is required for your account.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
Section: Overview: Two-Step Verification
− - Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required to activate your funded account: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluation accounts.
+ - Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required before your first payout, or earlier in the cases listed under Step 1.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
Section: When is it required?
− - Instant Funding accounts: identity verification is part of your purchase
− - Evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
+ - Tradeify Futures (Growth, Select, Lightning): identity verification is required before your first payout
+ - Tradeify Futures, residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates: identity verification is required before you receive a funded account, including Lightning Funded accounts
+ - Tradeify 247 Instant Funding: identity verification is part of your purchase
+ - Tradeify 247 evaluations (2-Step, 1-Step, and legacy APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
- Crypto purchases require identity verification at the time of purchase, regardless of account type.
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
After completing Tradeify verification, you must also complete verification with your payout provider. This is a separate verification process required by the payment processor.
Rise (Default Provider)
Rise is Tradeify's primary payout provider for most countries.
- After your Tradeify KYC is approved, you'll receive a Rise onboarding invitation via email
- Complete Rise's verification process (ID, address verification, tax forms)
- Set up your Rise Wallet for receiving payouts
- Rise supports bank transfers and crypto withdrawals
- Processing typically takes 1-3 business days
If you already have a verified Rise account with the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved.
Section: Rise (Default Provider)
− Tradeify uses Rise exclusively for payouts. If Rise doesn't support your country, contact Tradeify support for assistance.
− If Rise is not available in your country, Tradeify will use Plane as an alternative payout provider.
+ Rise is Tradeify's default payout provider.
+ Tradeify Futures: if Rise is not available in your country, Tradeify will use Plane as an alternative payout provider. Tradeify 247 also offers crypto payouts through Confirmo.
What Documents Do I Need?
For Tradeify Verification
- Government-issued photo ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Yourself (for liveness selfie check)
For Payout Provider (Rise)
- Government-issued ID
- Proof of address (utility bill, bank statement)
- Tax information (W-9 for US residents, W-8BEN for international)
Frequently Asked Questions
Do I need to complete both verifications?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− Yes. Tradeify identity verification is required to activate your funded account (part of your purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluations), and payout provider verification is required before you receive payouts.
+ Yes. Both Tradeify identity verification and payout provider verification are required before you receive your first payout (and identity verification may be needed earlier, as explained below).
When do I need to complete KYC?
− For Instant Funding accounts, KYC is part of your purchase. For evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X), it's required after you pass — before your funded account is activated. You can start identity verification at any time from your dashboard, and we recommend doing it early to avoid delays.
+ Tradeify Futures: before your first payout; residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates must complete it before they receive a funded account. Tradeify 247: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass and before activation for 2-Step and 1-Step evaluations. On both brands, crypto purchases require it at checkout. You can start identity verification at any time from your dashboard, and we recommend doing it early to avoid delays.
How long does verification take?
Tradeify verification is usually approved within minutes (automated). Payout provider verification (Rise) typically takes 1-3 business days.
What if my verification fails?
Contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information between your ID and account details.
Which payout provider will I use?
− Rise is the default provider for most countries. If Rise doesn't support your country, you may contact support to explore other options.
+ Rise is the default provider for most countries. If Rise doesn't support your country, Tradeify Futures uses Plane as the alternative payout provider. Tradeify 247 also offers crypto payouts through Confirmo.
Do I have to complete this even if I live in the US?
Yes. All funded traders, both domestic and international, must complete KYC verification.
Is my data secure?
Yes. Both Tradeify and our payout providers use industry-standard encryption and security practices to protect your personal information.
What AML checks does Tradeify perform?
Through Sumsub, we screen every funded trader against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media. Screening is re-run on an ongoing basis, not just at signup. This is a regulatory requirement and is also required by our banking and payout partners.
I already have a Rise account. Do I need to verify again?
If your Rise account is in good standing and uses the same email as your Tradeify account, your Rise verification may be automatically approved. You still need to complete Tradeify's verification separately.
PremierTradeify · Legacy Live Program - Complete Guide | Tradeify Help CenterSPIFF performance bonuses were replaced by Reward Pools; legacy program notice updated accordingly.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
− This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
After
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
+ SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
LEGACY PROGRAM NOTICE
− This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
+ SPIFF performance bonuses described in this article have ended and were replaced by Reward Pools. This article describes the legacy Live program for accounts purchased before December 3, 2025, 12:00 AM EST.
For the current Tradeify Elite Live program, see Tradeify Elite Program.
Traders with accounts purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the legacy program (described here) or the new Tradeify Elite program.
Understanding Your Legacy Live Starting Balance
Key concept: In Legacy Live, your "starting balance" is YOUR money - it's the Sim profits you earned that Tradeify carries forward when you transition to Live.
How it works:
- Your Sim profits (up to 10% per account) are carried forward as your starting balance
- This starting balance IS withdrawable after meeting requirements
- Multiple accounts combine into one: Up to 5 Sim accounts → all carry-over combines into ONE single Live account
- Example: 5 x 150K accounts → up to $75,000 starting balance ($15K × 5) in your single Live account
Your Legacy Live starting balance came from your trading success across all your Sim accounts - it's the reward for your Sim performance, consolidated into one Live account.
Overview
The legacy Live program provided traders with the opportunity to transition from Simulated Funded accounts to a single Live Funded account after completing four payouts. This program included:
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite Program | Tradeify Help CenterArticle clarifies that EOD drawdown limit is enforced in real time during trading sessions despite daily recalculation.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Account Parameters
Elite traders can have up to 5 live accounts depending on how many accounts were eligible to move live.
Elite Live accounts include fixed drawdowns, expanded contract limits, and no Daily Loss Limit (DLL).
The table below outlines the account setup based on the account size that transitions to live. All accounts start with a balance of $0.
Account | Start Balance | EOD Drawdown | Contracts ($0 → DD) | Contracts (Above DD) | DLL
25K Elite | $0 | $1,500 | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | No DLL
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
Section: End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
− The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day — not in real time. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
After
Elite Account Parameters
Elite traders can have up to 5 live accounts depending on how many accounts were eligible to move live.
Elite Live accounts include fixed drawdowns, expanded contract limits, and no Daily Loss Limit (DLL).
The table below outlines the account setup based on the account size that transitions to live. All accounts start with a balance of $0.
Account | Start Balance | EOD Drawdown | Contracts ($0 → DD) | Contracts (Above DD) | DLL
25K Elite | $0 | $1,500 | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | No DLL
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
Section: End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
+ The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day. The limit is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value (balance plus open P&L) touches it at any moment during the session, the account fails immediately. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
Elite Account Parameters
Elite traders can have up to 5 live accounts depending on how many accounts were eligible to move live.
Elite Live accounts include fixed drawdowns, expanded contract limits, and no Daily Loss Limit (DLL).
The table below outlines the account setup based on the account size that transitions to live. All accounts start with a balance of $0.
Account | Start Balance | EOD Drawdown | Contracts ($0 → DD) | Contracts (Above DD) | DLL
25K Elite | $0 | $1,500 | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | No DLL
50K Elite | $0 | $2,000 | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | No DLL
100K Elite | $0 | $3,000 | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | No DLL
150K Elite | $0 | $4,500 | 6 mini / 40 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro | No DLL
300K Elite | $0 | $6,000 | 8 mini / 60 micro | 10 mini / 100 micro | No DLL
These values apply to all Select, Growth, and Lightning accounts.
End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
Section: End-of-Day (EOD) Drawdown
− The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day — not in real time. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
+ The drawdown applied to Elite Live accounts is an End-of-Day (EOD) drawdown, meaning the drawdown limit is recalculated and adjusted once at the end of each trading day. The limit is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value (balance plus open P&L) touches it at any moment during the session, the account fails immediately. As profits accumulate throughout the day, the drawdown limit will move up to reflect those gains at the daily close, locking in a higher floor for the trader.
Payout Requests & Drawdown Adjustment
If a Live Trader submits a payout request before the drawdown has locked — specifically before their account balance reaches $100 above the drawdown limit — the payout will not be processed immediately. Instead, it will be held and processed the next business day, allowing the EOD drawdown adjustment to take place first.
As a result, the processed payout will reduce the trader's available balance after the drawdown has already moved up. This effectively gives the trader less drawdown to work with going into the next trading day, since the payout decreases the balance that the adjusted drawdown is anchored to.
Example Walkthrough
Assume a 50K Elite account with an initial End-of-Day drawdown of $2,000 and a starting balance of $0:
Timeline | Balance | Drawdown Status | Payout Request | Outcome
Start of Day 1 | $0 | $2,000 drawdown limit | — | —
During Day 1 | $500 profit made | $2,000 drawdown limit | Payout of $500 requested | Pending — processed next business day
End of Day 1 | $500 | Drawdown moves up by $500 → new limit reflects $500 gain | — | —
Start of Day 2 | $0 (after payout) | Drawdown adjusted — only $1,500 of room remaining | Payout processed | Effective drawdown reduced to $1,500
Key Takeaway: Even though $500 in profit was made, requesting a payout before the EOD lock means the drawdown adjusts upward first, and then the payout is deducted — leaving the trader with only $1,500 of effective drawdown room instead of $2,000. Traders should factor in the timing of payout requests to preserve maximum drawdown flexibility.
When Does Drawdown Lock?
PremierTradeify · Trading Commission Fees | Tradeify Help CenterE-Mini Silver commission fee removed from fee schedule.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $6.00
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
− E-Mini Silver | QI | COMEX | $5.00
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT | $1.82
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME | $1.82
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX | $2.12
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX | $2.12
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME | $1.60
After
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $6.00
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT | $1.82
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME | $1.82
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX | $2.12
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX | $2.12
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME | $1.60
Soybean Meal | ZM | CBOT | $9.20
Energy Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Crude Oil | CL | NYMEX | $6.00
Natural Gas | NG | NYMEX | $6.20
E-Mini Crude Oil | QM | NYMEX | $5.40
E-Mini Natural Gas | QG | NYMEX | $4.00
Metal Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Gold | GC | COMEX | $6.20
Copper | HG | COMEX | $6.20
Silver | SI | COMEX | $6.20
− E-Mini Silver | QI | COMEX | $5.00
E-Mini Gold | QO | COMEX | $5.00
Platinum | PL | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Palladium | PA | NYMEX | Not listed in fee schedule
Micro Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange | Total Round Trip Cost
Micro E-Mini Dow | MYM | CBOT | $1.82
Micro E-Mini S&P 500 | MES | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini NASDAQ | MNQ | CME | $1.82
Micro E-Mini Russell | M2K | CME | $1.82
E-Micro Gold | MGC | COMEX | $2.12
Micro Crude Oil | MCL | NYMEX | $2.12
E-Micro Australian Dollar | M6A | CME | $1.60
PremierTradeify · Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies | Tradeify Help CenterSelect 300K buffer increased to $6,100 on V2 (from $5,100), daily payout cap increased to $4,000 on V2 (from $3,500), payout timeframe changed to usually 24 hours, and payout cap structure updated with new tiers effective September 1, 2026.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | $500 | $1,000 | $1,250 | $1,750
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Buffer System
The Daily Payout Policy uses a buffer amount that must be exceeded before you can request payouts:
- 25K Account: $1,100 buffer
- 50K Account: $2,100 buffer
- 100K Account: $2,600 buffer
- 150K Account: $3,600 buffer
Section: Buffer System
− Select 300K: $5,100 buffer (balance of $305,100).
You cannot withdraw profits that would bring your account balance below the buffer amount. Profits above the buffer are eligible for withdrawal, up to the payout cap.
Payout Structure
Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility
Profit Split: 90% trader / 10% firm
Payout Caps
This is the Daily Continuity Rule:
To be eligible for a payout on any day:
Accounts purchased Before Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,000 for a 50K account
- $1,500 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,250 for a 50K account
- $1,750 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Section: Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
− Select 300K (Daily) works differently: the cap is $3,500 per day, and 50% of each payout must come from new profit earned since your last payout. The 2× multiplier and the per-size caps above do not apply to the 300K — see 300K Select Account.
This cap resets after each payout cycle.
Minimum payout: $250
Example
A trader with a 50K account has a balance of $53,500 and earned $250 in profit since their last payout.
- 2 × $250 = $500
- The trader is able to request a payout of up to $500 as the trader is more than $500 above the buffer.
- After payout approved the balance is set to $53,000
If instead the trader had earned $700:
- 2 × $700 = $1,400
- But the cap for a 50K account is $1,000
(if account is purchased before Sep 1st,2026 then the cap is $1,000 but if purchased after the cap is $1,250)
- So the trader could request up to $1,000 OR $1,250 (depending on when the account was purchased) as the trader is more than $1,000 above the buffer.
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
− - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours. Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
- Request your next payout once you are eligible again and your previous request has been processed
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
These eligibility criteria apply across all plan types — Select, Growth, and Lightning. Regardless of which payout policy you choose, your path to live trading follows the same qualification criteria.
For detailed information about the Live Transition process, benefits of Live accounts, and what changes when you transition, please see: Tradeify Elite Program
Important Reminders
- Your choice is permanent - Once you select a payout policy for a funded account, you cannot change it. Choose carefully based on your trading style.
- No refunds or exchanges - If you later decide you prefer the other policy, you'll need to purchase and pass another evaluation.
- Both lead to live trading - Neither policy is "better" than the other. They're designed for different trading styles, but both provide a clear path to live funded trading.
- Scaling is the same - Both policies use identical contract scaling structures as your account equity grows.
- Same max funded accounts - You can hold up to 5 funded accounts total, regardless of which policy or account type you choose across all our funded accounts.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I have both policies on different accounts?
A: Yes, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies for each funded account.
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. Keep in mind that your evaluation purchase gives you a set period to activate. If you don't activate your passed evaluation within the allowed timeframe, you may need to purchase a new evaluation.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
− A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 depending on account size — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,000 on a 50K account (since that's the cap). Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $3,500 daily cap with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Q: Can I request another payout while my previous one is still pending or processing?
− A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually 24-48 hours — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
After
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | $500 | $1,000 | $1,250 | $1,750
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Buffer System
The Daily Payout Policy uses a buffer amount that must be exceeded before you can request payouts:
- 25K Account: $1,100 buffer
- 50K Account: $2,100 buffer
- 100K Account: $2,600 buffer
- 150K Account: $3,600 buffer
Section: Buffer System
+ Select 300K: $6,100 buffer on V2 (balance of $306,100); $5,100 on V1 (balance of $305,100).
You cannot withdraw profits that would bring your account balance below the buffer amount. Profits above the buffer are eligible for withdrawal, up to the payout cap.
Payout Structure
Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility
Profit Split: 90% trader / 10% firm
Payout Caps
This is the Daily Continuity Rule:
To be eligible for a payout on any day:
Accounts purchased Before Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,000 for a 50K account
- $1,500 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,250 for a 50K account
- $1,750 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Section: Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
+ Select 300K (Daily) works differently: the cap is $4,000 per day on V2 ($3,500 on V1), and 50% of each payout must come from new profit earned since your last payout. The 2× multiplier and the per-size caps above do not apply to the 300K — see 300K Select Account.
This cap resets after each payout cycle.
Minimum payout: $250
Example
A trader with a 50K account has a balance of $53,500 and earned $250 in profit since their last payout.
- 2 × $250 = $500
- The trader is able to request a payout of up to $500 as the trader is more than $500 above the buffer.
- After payout approved the balance is set to $53,000
If instead the trader had earned $700:
- 2 × $700 = $1,400
- But the cap for a 50K account is $1,000
(if account is purchased before Sep 1st,2026 then the cap is $1,000 but if purchased after the cap is $1,250)
- So the trader could request up to $1,000 OR $1,250 (depending on when the account was purchased) as the trader is more than $1,000 above the buffer.
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
+ - Receive your payout, usually within 24 hours once your Rise onboarding is complete (up to 72 hours over a weekend). Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
- Request your next payout once you are eligible again and your previous request has been processed
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
These eligibility criteria apply across all plan types — Select, Growth, and Lightning. Regardless of which payout policy you choose, your path to live trading follows the same qualification criteria.
For detailed information about the Live Transition process, benefits of Live accounts, and what changes when you transition, please see: Tradeify Elite Program
Important Reminders
- Your choice is permanent - Once you select a payout policy for a funded account, you cannot change it. Choose carefully based on your trading style.
- No refunds or exchanges - If you later decide you prefer the other policy, you'll need to purchase and pass another evaluation.
- Both lead to live trading - Neither policy is "better" than the other. They're designed for different trading styles, but both provide a clear path to live funded trading.
- Scaling is the same - Both policies use identical contract scaling structures as your account equity grows.
- Same max funded accounts - You can hold up to 5 funded accounts total, regardless of which policy or account type you choose across all our funded accounts.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I have both policies on different accounts?
A: Yes, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies for each funded account.
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. You can bank passed evaluations and activate them later when a funded account slot is free.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
+ A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,250/$1,750/$2,500 depending on account size ($600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 for accounts bought before September 1, 2026) — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,250 on a 50K account bought on or after September 1, 2026 ($1,000 if bought before), since that's the cap. Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $4,000 daily cap on V2 ($3,500 on V1) with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Q: Can I request another payout while my previous one is still pending or processing?
+ A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually within 24 hours, up to 72 hours over a weekend — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | $500 | $1,000 | $1,250 | $1,750
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Buffer System
The Daily Payout Policy uses a buffer amount that must be exceeded before you can request payouts:
- 25K Account: $1,100 buffer
- 50K Account: $2,100 buffer
- 100K Account: $2,600 buffer
- 150K Account: $3,600 buffer
Section: Buffer System
− Select 300K: $5,100 buffer (balance of $305,100).
+ Select 300K: $6,100 buffer on V2 (balance of $306,100); $5,100 on V1 (balance of $305,100).
You cannot withdraw profits that would bring your account balance below the buffer amount. Profits above the buffer are eligible for withdrawal, up to the payout cap.
Payout Structure
Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility
Profit Split: 90% trader / 10% firm
Payout Caps
This is the Daily Continuity Rule:
To be eligible for a payout on any day:
Accounts purchased Before Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,000 for a 50K account
- $1,500 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
- They may request up to 2× the profit earned between each payout request, capped at:
- $600 for a 25K account
- $1,250 for a 50K account
- $1,750 for a 100K account
- $2,500 for a 150K account
Section: Accounts purchased After Sep 1st, 2026:
− Select 300K (Daily) works differently: the cap is $3,500 per day, and 50% of each payout must come from new profit earned since your last payout. The 2× multiplier and the per-size caps above do not apply to the 300K — see 300K Select Account.
+ Select 300K (Daily) works differently: the cap is $4,000 per day on V2 ($3,500 on V1), and 50% of each payout must come from new profit earned since your last payout. The 2× multiplier and the per-size caps above do not apply to the 300K — see 300K Select Account.
This cap resets after each payout cycle.
Minimum payout: $250
Example
A trader with a 50K account has a balance of $53,500 and earned $250 in profit since their last payout.
- 2 × $250 = $500
- The trader is able to request a payout of up to $500 as the trader is more than $500 above the buffer.
- After payout approved the balance is set to $53,000
If instead the trader had earned $700:
- 2 × $700 = $1,400
- But the cap for a 50K account is $1,000
(if account is purchased before Sep 1st,2026 then the cap is $1,000 but if purchased after the cap is $1,250)
- So the trader could request up to $1,000 OR $1,250 (depending on when the account was purchased) as the trader is more than $1,000 above the buffer.
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
− - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours. Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
+ - Receive your payout, usually within 24 hours once your Rise onboarding is complete (up to 72 hours over a weekend). Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
- Request your next payout once you are eligible again and your previous request has been processed
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
These eligibility criteria apply across all plan types — Select, Growth, and Lightning. Regardless of which payout policy you choose, your path to live trading follows the same qualification criteria.
For detailed information about the Live Transition process, benefits of Live accounts, and what changes when you transition, please see: Tradeify Elite Program
Important Reminders
- Your choice is permanent - Once you select a payout policy for a funded account, you cannot change it. Choose carefully based on your trading style.
- No refunds or exchanges - If you later decide you prefer the other policy, you'll need to purchase and pass another evaluation.
- Both lead to live trading - Neither policy is "better" than the other. They're designed for different trading styles, but both provide a clear path to live funded trading.
- Scaling is the same - Both policies use identical contract scaling structures as your account equity grows.
- Same max funded accounts - You can hold up to 5 funded accounts total, regardless of which policy or account type you choose across all our funded accounts.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I have both policies on different accounts?
A: Yes, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies for each funded account.
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. Keep in mind that your evaluation purchase gives you a set period to activate. If you don't activate your passed evaluation within the allowed timeframe, you may need to purchase a new evaluation.
+ A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. You can bank passed evaluations and activate them later when a funded account slot is free.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
− A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 depending on account size — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,000 on a 50K account (since that's the cap). Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $3,500 daily cap with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
+ A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,250/$1,750/$2,500 depending on account size ($600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 for accounts bought before September 1, 2026) — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,250 on a 50K account bought on or after September 1, 2026 ($1,000 if bought before), since that's the cap. Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $4,000 daily cap on V2 ($3,500 on V1) with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Q: Can I request another payout while my previous one is still pending or processing?
− A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually 24-48 hours — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
+ A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually within 24 hours, up to 72 hours over a weekend — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
PremierTradeify · Growth Funded: Account Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterPayment issuance timeframe changed from 24-48 hours to 24 hours, with Rise onboarding completion now required.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
Section: Payout Window
− - Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24-48 hours after the withdrawal has been processed.
- Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
After
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
Section: Payout Window
+ - Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed, once your Rise onboarding is complete.
- Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
$50,000 | $53,000
$100,000 | $104,500
$150,000 | $156,500
Account Balance Needed for Growth purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$50,000 | $52,100
$100,000 | $103,600
$150,000 | $155,100
Payout Window
- Payout requests can be submitted directly from your dashboard once payout conditions have been met.
Section: Payout Window
− - Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24-48 hours after the withdrawal has been processed.
+ - Once your payout status is changed to APPROVED, your funds are immediately withdrawn from your account. Payments will be issued within 24 hours after the withdrawal has been processed, once your Rise onboarding is complete.
- Payout requests submitted outside of normal business hours (Mon-Fri, 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST and all Federal holidays) may take up to 72 hours to process.
Maximum Payout Per Request (Payout Tiers)
The minimum payout amounts are:
- $250 for $25k accounts
- $500 for $50k accounts
- $1,000 for $100k accounts
- $1,500 for $150k accounts
The maximum payout is the most you can withdraw per payout request, based on your account size and payout number (see the table below). These are hard caps — even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to the amount shown for that payout number; the rest stays in your account for future payouts.
See this table:
Payout Number | $25k Account | $50k Account | $100k Account | $150k Account
1 | $1,000 | $1,500 | $2,000 | $2,500
2 | $1,000 | $2,000 | $2,500 | $3,000
PremierTradeify · How do I Reset a Failed Evaluation? | Tradeify Help CenterFree resets now also available through Rewards Center prizes, in addition to TradeifyTV giveaways.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
If you break a rule and fail an Evaluation, you can reset your account at any time.
1- Click the "Reset" button on the failed account card.
2- After clicking "Reset", a new pop up will appear where you'll be able to Reset the account with Direct Payment (Only Option).
3- After clicking Submit, a new account with new account numbers will be created on your dashboard. It will have the same account type and settings as your previous account.
Reset FAQs
Q: Why don't I see a Reset button on my account?
A: The most common reason is that your account has expired. Purchase a new account from the dashboard if you'd like to continue trading. Other reasons include: your account is a Lightning Funded or Sim Funded account (which don't have reset options), or your account is still active and hasn't actually failed yet.
Q: How long does a reset last?
A: All Evaluation accounts are one-time purchases. After resetting, your new account remains active until you either pass the Evaluation or fail again. There are no recurring fees or renewal dates.
Q: Can I get my balance restored after a loss?
A: Balance restorations are only provided for confirmed platform-wide incidents affecting many users, such as server outages. Losses from normal trading, market volatility, or exchange-level events (like CME halts) are not eligible for restoration.
Q: Can I get a free reset?
Section: Reset FAQs
− A: Free resets are only available through TradeifyTV giveaways. They cannot be requested or given as accommodations, even for loyal clients or those who have received prior accommodations. This policy ensures fairness for all traders.
Q: Can I use a promo code for resets?
A: No, promo codes and discount codes do not apply to reset purchases. Reset fees have fixed pricing and cannot be discounted.
Q: Do reset credits expire?
A: No, reset credits do not expire. This includes courtesy reset credits. You can save them for future use. All sales are final per our Terms of Service.
Important Notes
- There is no reset option for Lightning Funded or Sim Funded accounts. If you fail these accounts, the failure is permanent and you will need to purchase a new account to continue trading.
- Resets are only available for Evaluation accounts (Growth and Select Evaluations).
After
If you break a rule and fail an Evaluation, you can reset your account at any time.
1- Click the "Reset" button on the failed account card.
2- After clicking "Reset", a new pop up will appear where you'll be able to Reset the account with Direct Payment (Only Option).
3- After clicking Submit, a new account with new account numbers will be created on your dashboard. It will have the same account type and settings as your previous account.
Reset FAQs
Q: Why don't I see a Reset button on my account?
A: The most common reason is that your account has expired. Purchase a new account from the dashboard if you'd like to continue trading. Other reasons include: your account is a Lightning Funded or Sim Funded account (which don't have reset options), or your account is still active and hasn't actually failed yet.
Q: How long does a reset last?
A: All Evaluation accounts are one-time purchases. After resetting, your new account remains active until you either pass the Evaluation or fail again. There are no recurring fees or renewal dates.
Q: Can I get my balance restored after a loss?
A: Balance restorations are only provided for confirmed platform-wide incidents affecting many users, such as server outages. Losses from normal trading, market volatility, or exchange-level events (like CME halts) are not eligible for restoration.
Q: Can I get a free reset?
Section: Reset FAQs
+ A: Free resets are only available through TradeifyTV giveaways and Rewards Center prizes. They cannot be requested or given as accommodations, even for loyal clients or those who have received prior accommodations. This policy ensures fairness for all traders.
Q: Can I use a promo code for resets?
A: No, promo codes and discount codes do not apply to reset purchases. Reset fees have fixed pricing and cannot be discounted.
Q: Do reset credits expire?
A: No, reset credits do not expire. This includes courtesy reset credits. You can save them for future use. All sales are final per our Terms of Service.
Important Notes
- There is no reset option for Lightning Funded or Sim Funded accounts. If you fail these accounts, the failure is permanent and you will need to purchase a new account to continue trading.
- Resets are only available for Evaluation accounts (Growth and Select Evaluations).
If you break a rule and fail an Evaluation, you can reset your account at any time.
1- Click the "Reset" button on the failed account card.
2- After clicking "Reset", a new pop up will appear where you'll be able to Reset the account with Direct Payment (Only Option).
3- After clicking Submit, a new account with new account numbers will be created on your dashboard. It will have the same account type and settings as your previous account.
Reset FAQs
Q: Why don't I see a Reset button on my account?
A: The most common reason is that your account has expired. Purchase a new account from the dashboard if you'd like to continue trading. Other reasons include: your account is a Lightning Funded or Sim Funded account (which don't have reset options), or your account is still active and hasn't actually failed yet.
Q: How long does a reset last?
A: All Evaluation accounts are one-time purchases. After resetting, your new account remains active until you either pass the Evaluation or fail again. There are no recurring fees or renewal dates.
Q: Can I get my balance restored after a loss?
A: Balance restorations are only provided for confirmed platform-wide incidents affecting many users, such as server outages. Losses from normal trading, market volatility, or exchange-level events (like CME halts) are not eligible for restoration.
Q: Can I get a free reset?
Section: Reset FAQs
− A: Free resets are only available through TradeifyTV giveaways. They cannot be requested or given as accommodations, even for loyal clients or those who have received prior accommodations. This policy ensures fairness for all traders.
+ A: Free resets are only available through TradeifyTV giveaways and Rewards Center prizes. They cannot be requested or given as accommodations, even for loyal clients or those who have received prior accommodations. This policy ensures fairness for all traders.
Q: Can I use a promo code for resets?
A: No, promo codes and discount codes do not apply to reset purchases. Reset fees have fixed pricing and cannot be discounted.
Q: Do reset credits expire?
A: No, reset credits do not expire. This includes courtesy reset credits. You can save them for future use. All sales are final per our Terms of Service.
Important Notes
- There is no reset option for Lightning Funded or Sim Funded accounts. If you fail these accounts, the failure is permanent and you will need to purchase a new account to continue trading.
- Resets are only available for Evaluation accounts (Growth and Select Evaluations).
PremierTradeify · Rules: Restricted Countries | Tradeify Help Center58 is now 65.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Barbados | Israel | Pakistan | Turkey
Belarus | Jamaica | Panama | Uganda
Bosnia & Herzegovina | Kazakhstan | Palestine | Ukraine
Botswana | Kosovo | Papua New Guinea | Venezuela
Bulgaria | Kyrgyzstan | Russia | Vietnam
Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Yemen
Burundi | Lebanon | | Zimbabwe
Cambodia | Liberia | |
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
− Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.
After
Barbados | Israel | Pakistan | Turkey
Belarus | Jamaica | Panama | Uganda
Bosnia & Herzegovina | Kazakhstan | Palestine | Ukraine
Botswana | Kosovo | Papua New Guinea | Venezuela
Bulgaria | Kyrgyzstan | Russia | Vietnam
Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Yemen
Burundi | Lebanon | | Zimbabwe
Cambodia | Liberia | |
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
+ Full alphabetical list (65 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.
Barbados | Israel | Pakistan | Turkey
Belarus | Jamaica | Panama | Uganda
Bosnia & Herzegovina | Kazakhstan | Palestine | Ukraine
Botswana | Kosovo | Papua New Guinea | Venezuela
Bulgaria | Kyrgyzstan | Russia | Vietnam
Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Yemen
Burundi | Lebanon | | Zimbabwe
Cambodia | Liberia | |
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
− Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
+ Full alphabetical list (65 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.
PremierTradeify · Rules: Permitted Times to Trade | Tradeify Help CenterAnswer clarified to emphasize positions cannot extend across multiple trading sessions.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
A: Eastern Time (ET). This is Eastern Standard Time (EST) in winter and Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) in summer.
Q: Can I hold positions through the 5-6 PM maintenance break?
A: No. All positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET before the maintenance break.
Q: Will my account fail if I forget to close positions?
A: No. Tradeify will automatically close any open positions at market close. This does not fail your account, but you may experience unfavorable fills.
Q: Does this rule apply to Live accounts?
A: Yes. The no overnight positions rule applies to ALL Tradeify account types, including Live accounts.
Q: How do I know if a holiday has shortened hours?
A: Holiday market hour announcements are always posted in our Discord server. On shortened days, you must close all positions by 12:59 PM ET.
Q: I traded on Rithmic during a holiday half-day. Why can't I request a payout yet?
A: The day still counts as a trading day, but Rithmic records holiday half-day sessions at the next full market close. Your payout becomes available once that session is recorded. For a Friday holiday half-day, that is the following Monday's market close.
Q: Can I stay positioned overnight?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Yes, within a single trading session. A Tradeify trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next calendar day - that's nearly 23 hours. You can hold a position for the entire session. For example, opening a position at 8:00 PM Monday and closing it at 2:00 PM Tuesday is perfectly fine - that's one continuous session.
What you cannot do:
- Hold through the daily close (positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET)
- Hold through the maintenance window (5:00 PM - 6:00 PM ET)
- Hold over the weekend (Friday close to Sunday open)
Q: Can I hold positions over the weekend?
A: No. All positions must be closed before Friday's market close (4:45 PM ET). You cannot carry positions from Friday into the Sunday evening session.
After
A: Eastern Time (ET). This is Eastern Standard Time (EST) in winter and Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) in summer.
Q: Can I hold positions through the 5-6 PM maintenance break?
A: No. All positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET before the maintenance break.
Q: Will my account fail if I forget to close positions?
A: No. Tradeify will automatically close any open positions at market close. This does not fail your account, but you may experience unfavorable fills.
Q: Does this rule apply to Live accounts?
A: Yes. The no overnight positions rule applies to ALL Tradeify account types, including Live accounts.
Q: How do I know if a holiday has shortened hours?
A: Holiday market hour announcements are always posted in our Discord server. On shortened days, you must close all positions by 12:59 PM ET.
Q: I traded on Rithmic during a holiday half-day. Why can't I request a payout yet?
A: The day still counts as a trading day, but Rithmic records holiday half-day sessions at the next full market close. Your payout becomes available once that session is recorded. For a Friday holiday half-day, that is the following Monday's market close.
Q: Can I stay positioned overnight?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: Only within a single trading session - you can never hold a position from one session into the next. A Tradeify trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next calendar day - that's nearly 23 hours. You can hold a position for the entire session. For example, opening a position at 8:00 PM Monday and closing it at 2:00 PM Tuesday is perfectly fine - that's one continuous session.
What you cannot do:
- Hold through the daily close (positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET)
- Hold through the maintenance window (5:00 PM - 6:00 PM ET)
- Hold over the weekend (Friday close to Sunday open)
Q: Can I hold positions over the weekend?
A: No. All positions must be closed before Friday's market close (4:45 PM ET). You cannot carry positions from Friday into the Sunday evening session.
A: Eastern Time (ET). This is Eastern Standard Time (EST) in winter and Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) in summer.
Q: Can I hold positions through the 5-6 PM maintenance break?
A: No. All positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET before the maintenance break.
Q: Will my account fail if I forget to close positions?
A: No. Tradeify will automatically close any open positions at market close. This does not fail your account, but you may experience unfavorable fills.
Q: Does this rule apply to Live accounts?
A: Yes. The no overnight positions rule applies to ALL Tradeify account types, including Live accounts.
Q: How do I know if a holiday has shortened hours?
A: Holiday market hour announcements are always posted in our Discord server. On shortened days, you must close all positions by 12:59 PM ET.
Q: I traded on Rithmic during a holiday half-day. Why can't I request a payout yet?
A: The day still counts as a trading day, but Rithmic records holiday half-day sessions at the next full market close. Your payout becomes available once that session is recorded. For a Friday holiday half-day, that is the following Monday's market close.
Q: Can I stay positioned overnight?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Yes, within a single trading session. A Tradeify trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next calendar day - that's nearly 23 hours. You can hold a position for the entire session. For example, opening a position at 8:00 PM Monday and closing it at 2:00 PM Tuesday is perfectly fine - that's one continuous session.
+ A: Only within a single trading session - you can never hold a position from one session into the next. A Tradeify trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next calendar day - that's nearly 23 hours. You can hold a position for the entire session. For example, opening a position at 8:00 PM Monday and closing it at 2:00 PM Tuesday is perfectly fine - that's one continuous session.
What you cannot do:
- Hold through the daily close (positions must be closed by 4:45 PM ET)
- Hold through the maintenance window (5:00 PM - 6:00 PM ET)
- Hold over the weekend (Friday close to Sunday open)
Q: Can I hold positions over the weekend?
A: No. All positions must be closed before Friday's market close (4:45 PM ET). You cannot carry positions from Friday into the Sunday evening session.
PremierTradeify · Select Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterRemoved "newest" descriptor from Select Plan, changed payout caps for both policies with different values based on account purchase date before or after September 1, 2026, and added "Flex" label to minimum balance requirement.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
− The Tradeify Select Plan is our newest evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) 50% Add-on is available | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
− - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
− - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
Section: Important Considerations
− - No minimum balance required - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
After
+ The Tradeify Select Plan is an evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) 50% Add-on is available | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
+ - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
+ - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
Section: Important Considerations
+ - No minimum balance required (Flex) - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
− The Tradeify Select Plan is our newest evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
+ The Tradeify Select Plan is an evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) 50% Add-on is available | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
− - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
+ - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
− - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps)
+ - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps for accounts bought on or after September 1, 2026; $600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 if bought before)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
Section: Important Considerations
− - No minimum balance required - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
+ - No minimum balance required (Flex) - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
PremierTradeify · SELECT vs Growth: Choosing Your Evaluation Type | Tradeify Help CenterElite Live qualification criteria changed from 5 successful payouts to either 3 payouts on single account or 10 total payouts since last live transition.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Profit Targets Comparison
Account Size | SELECT Profit Target | Growth Profit Target
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,500
$50,000 | $3,000 | $3,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $6,000
$150,000 | $9,000 | $9,000
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Which evaluation is easier to pass?
A: It depends on your trading style. Growth is faster (can pass in 1 day) but requires respecting a daily loss limit. SELECT takes longer (minimum 3 days) but has no daily loss limit, giving you more intraday flexibility. Neither is objectively "easier" - they suit different trading styles.
Q: Can I have both SELECT and Growth accounts at the same time?
A: Yes, you can have multiple evaluation accounts of different types simultaneously, up to the purchase limits. You can also hold up to 5 funded accounts total across any evaluation types.
Q: Do both evaluations lead to Elite Live accounts?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Yes, both SELECT and Growth evaluation paths lead to the same Elite Live program after 5 successful payouts from your Sim Funded accounts.
Q: What if I can't decide between SELECT and Growth?
A: Consider your trading style: If you often have volatile intraday swings and need flexibility, choose SELECT (no daily loss limit). If you trade with tight risk management and want to get funded quickly, choose Growth (can pass in 1 day).
Q: Is the drawdown the same for both?
A: Both use End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, but the amounts differ. SELECT has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,000 (100K), $4,500 (150K). Growth has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,500 (100K), $5,000 (150K).
Summary: SELECT vs Growth
Choose SELECT if: You want no daily loss limit, prefer to choose your payout policy after passing, and can trade consistently over 3+ days.
Choose Growth if: You want to get funded as fast as possible (even in 1 day), trade with controlled daily risk, and don't need to choose a payout policy.
For full details on each evaluation type, see: SELECT Evaluation Accounts | Growth Evaluation Accounts
After
Profit Targets Comparison
Account Size | SELECT Profit Target | Growth Profit Target
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,500
$50,000 | $3,000 | $3,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $6,000
$150,000 | $9,000 | $9,000
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Which evaluation is easier to pass?
A: It depends on your trading style. Growth is faster (can pass in 1 day) but requires respecting a daily loss limit. SELECT takes longer (minimum 3 days) but has no daily loss limit, giving you more intraday flexibility. Neither is objectively "easier" - they suit different trading styles.
Q: Can I have both SELECT and Growth accounts at the same time?
A: Yes, you can have multiple evaluation accounts of different types simultaneously, up to the purchase limits. You can also hold up to 5 funded accounts total across any evaluation types.
Q: Do both evaluations lead to Elite Live accounts?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: Yes, both SELECT and Growth evaluation paths lead to the same Elite Live program: 3 payouts on a single account, or 10 total payouts since your last live transition.
Q: What if I can't decide between SELECT and Growth?
A: Consider your trading style: If you often have volatile intraday swings and need flexibility, choose SELECT (no daily loss limit). If you trade with tight risk management and want to get funded quickly, choose Growth (can pass in 1 day).
Q: Is the drawdown the same for both?
A: Both use End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, but the amounts differ. SELECT has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,000 (100K), $4,500 (150K). Growth has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,500 (100K), $5,000 (150K).
Summary: SELECT vs Growth
Choose SELECT if: You want no daily loss limit, prefer to choose your payout policy after passing, and can trade consistently over 3+ days.
Choose Growth if: You want to get funded as fast as possible (even in 1 day), trade with controlled daily risk, and don't need to choose a payout policy.
For full details on each evaluation type, see: SELECT Evaluation Accounts | Growth Evaluation Accounts
Profit Targets Comparison
Account Size | SELECT Profit Target | Growth Profit Target
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,500
$50,000 | $3,000 | $3,000
$100,000 | $6,000 | $6,000
$150,000 | $9,000 | $9,000
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Which evaluation is easier to pass?
A: It depends on your trading style. Growth is faster (can pass in 1 day) but requires respecting a daily loss limit. SELECT takes longer (minimum 3 days) but has no daily loss limit, giving you more intraday flexibility. Neither is objectively "easier" - they suit different trading styles.
Q: Can I have both SELECT and Growth accounts at the same time?
A: Yes, you can have multiple evaluation accounts of different types simultaneously, up to the purchase limits. You can also hold up to 5 funded accounts total across any evaluation types.
Q: Do both evaluations lead to Elite Live accounts?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Yes, both SELECT and Growth evaluation paths lead to the same Elite Live program after 5 successful payouts from your Sim Funded accounts.
+ A: Yes, both SELECT and Growth evaluation paths lead to the same Elite Live program: 3 payouts on a single account, or 10 total payouts since your last live transition.
Q: What if I can't decide between SELECT and Growth?
A: Consider your trading style: If you often have volatile intraday swings and need flexibility, choose SELECT (no daily loss limit). If you trade with tight risk management and want to get funded quickly, choose Growth (can pass in 1 day).
Q: Is the drawdown the same for both?
A: Both use End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, but the amounts differ. SELECT has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,000 (100K), $4,500 (150K). Growth has $1,000 (25K), $2,000 (50K), $3,500 (100K), $5,000 (150K).
Summary: SELECT vs Growth
Choose SELECT if: You want no daily loss limit, prefer to choose your payout policy after passing, and can trade consistently over 3+ days.
Choose Growth if: You want to get funded as fast as possible (even in 1 day), trade with controlled daily risk, and don't need to choose a payout policy.
For full details on each evaluation type, see: SELECT Evaluation Accounts | Growth Evaluation Accounts
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Pricing Reference | Tradeify Help CenterGrowth Evaluation consistency rule changed to apply only after funding, not during evaluation; Select 300K price reduced to $349 for V2; Select evaluation purchase limit added as 15 per 30 days.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
Section: Account Types Overview
− - Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). 35% consistency rule.
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
− Select 300K (limited release) | $449 | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
The Growth 25K Evaluation is the most affordable option. Check the pricing tables above for current prices. Promo codes may offer additional discounts — check the Tradeify website for any active promotions.
What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
Section: What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
− Growth: Evaluation required. Has Daily Loss Limit. 35% consistency rule. Most affordable option. Select: Evaluation required. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency during evaluation only. Choose Daily or Flex payout paths after passing. Lightning: No evaluation — funded instantly. Progressive consistency (20% → 25% → 30%). No resets available. Higher price point.
Can I get a refund if my account fails?
No. All sales are final per our Terms of Service. If a Growth or Select evaluation fails, you can purchase a reset at a reduced price to try again. Lightning Funded accounts do not have resets — a new account must be purchased.
Are there any hidden fees?
No hidden fees. The only costs are: (1) the account purchase price, (2) trading commissions on each trade, and (3) optional reset fees if your evaluation fails. Market data is free as long as you sign the Non-Professional Agreement. All brokers (Tradovate, Rithmic, WealthCharts) are the same price — no platform surcharges.
Do you offer promo codes or discounts?
Tradeify periodically offers promotional discounts. Check the Tradeify website or dashboard for any currently active promo codes. Promo codes are entered at checkout. Tradeify also offers a permanent 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations — see the Bundle Discounts section above. If you completed a purchase and a promo code was not applied — you forgot to enter it, or you entered it and were still charged the full amount — contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy.
Can I buy multiple accounts at a discount?
Yes. Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 of the same eligible account in one order and the 5% bundle discount applies automatically. It also stacks with any active promo code. The discount only applies in a single transaction and won't apply retroactively to a separate, later order. See the Bundle Discounts section above for full details.
Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
Section: Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
− No. The only multi-account checkout is the 5-account Bundle and save option. To buy any other number, purchase accounts individually (one per checkout) at full price. There is no limit on how many Evaluations you can buy — the 5-account cap applies only to active Sim Funded accounts (per household).
What is the profit split?
Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning) use a 90/10 profit split — you keep 90% of your profits, Tradeify receives 10%. Elite Live accounts use an 80/20 split. This applies from your very first payout.
What platforms can I trade on?
At checkout, you select one of three brokers: Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts. Each broker gives access to different trading platforms. Tradovate gives access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic gives access to Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader. WealthCharts is its own broker and platform — it can only be used to access the WealthCharts platform. See the Supported Platforms article for details.
After
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
Section: Account Types Overview
+ - Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts).
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
+ Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
The Growth 25K Evaluation is the most affordable option. Check the pricing tables above for current prices. Promo codes may offer additional discounts — check the Tradeify website for any active promotions.
What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
Section: What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
+ Growth: Evaluation required. Has Daily Loss Limit. No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts). Most affordable option. Select: Evaluation required. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency during evaluation only. Choose Daily or Flex payout paths after passing. Lightning: No evaluation — funded instantly. Progressive consistency (20% → 25% → 30%). No resets available. Higher price point.
Can I get a refund if my account fails?
No. All sales are final per our Terms of Service. If a Growth or Select evaluation fails, you can purchase a reset at a reduced price to try again. Lightning Funded accounts do not have resets — a new account must be purchased.
Are there any hidden fees?
No hidden fees. The only costs are: (1) the account purchase price, (2) trading commissions on each trade, and (3) optional reset fees if your evaluation fails. Market data is free as long as you sign the Non-Professional Agreement. All brokers (Tradovate, Rithmic, WealthCharts) are the same price — no platform surcharges.
Do you offer promo codes or discounts?
Tradeify periodically offers promotional discounts. Check the Tradeify website or dashboard for any currently active promo codes. Promo codes are entered at checkout. Tradeify also offers a permanent 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations — see the Bundle Discounts section above. If you completed a purchase and a promo code was not applied — you forgot to enter it, or you entered it and were still charged the full amount — contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy.
Can I buy multiple accounts at a discount?
Yes. Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 of the same eligible account in one order and the 5% bundle discount applies automatically. It also stacks with any active promo code. The discount only applies in a single transaction and won't apply retroactively to a separate, later order. See the Bundle Discounts section above for full details.
Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
Section: Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
+ No. The only multi-account checkout is the 5-account Bundle and save option. To buy any other number, purchase accounts individually (one per checkout) at full price. Growth evaluations have no purchase limit; Select evaluations are limited to 15 per 30-day period (300K purchases do not count). The 5-account cap applies to active Sim Funded accounts per household.
What is the profit split?
Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning) use a 90/10 profit split — you keep 90% of your profits, Tradeify receives 10%. Elite Live accounts use an 80/20 split. This applies from your very first payout.
What platforms can I trade on?
At checkout, you select one of three brokers: Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts. Each broker gives access to different trading platforms. Tradovate gives access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic gives access to Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader. WealthCharts is its own broker and platform — it can only be used to access the WealthCharts platform. See the Supported Platforms article for details.
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
Section: Account Types Overview
− - Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). 35% consistency rule.
+ - Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts).
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Growth 100K | $255 | $169
Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Section: Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
− Select 300K (limited release) | $449 | Not available
+ Select 300K (limited release) | $349 (V2; V1 was $449) | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $135 | $90
Select 50K | $205 | $135
Select 100K | $329 | $209
Select 150K | $459 | $299
Select 300K (limited release) | Not available | Not available
The Select 300K is a limited release: no resets, KYC required before purchase, maximum 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Details: 300K Select Account.
Lightning Funded Pricing
Lightning Funded accounts are one-time purchases with no evaluation required. You are funded instantly. No resets are available — if the account fails, a new one must be purchased.
Account Size | Price (One-Time)
Profit Splits
- Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning): 90% to trader / 10% to Tradeify
- Elite Live accounts: 80% to trader / 20% to Tradeify
- Legacy Live accounts: Traders on the Legacy Live program keep their original profit split terms
Refund Policy
All sales are final. Tradeify does not offer refunds on any purchases. This includes account purchases, resets, and any other fees. Please review all account details before purchasing. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately — contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
Frequently Asked Questions
Are Tradeify accounts subscription-based or one-time purchases?
All Tradeify accounts are one-time purchases. There is no recurring billing or monthly subscription. You pay once and trade until you pass (evaluations) or for the life of the account (Lightning Funded).
What is the cheapest Tradeify account?
The Growth 25K Evaluation is the most affordable option. Check the pricing tables above for current prices. Promo codes may offer additional discounts — check the Tradeify website for any active promotions.
What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
Section: What is the difference between Growth, Select, and Lightning?
− Growth: Evaluation required. Has Daily Loss Limit. 35% consistency rule. Most affordable option. Select: Evaluation required. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency during evaluation only. Choose Daily or Flex payout paths after passing. Lightning: No evaluation — funded instantly. Progressive consistency (20% → 25% → 30%). No resets available. Higher price point.
+ Growth: Evaluation required. Has Daily Loss Limit. No consistency rule during the evaluation (35% on funded payouts). Most affordable option. Select: Evaluation required. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency during evaluation only. Choose Daily or Flex payout paths after passing. Lightning: No evaluation — funded instantly. Progressive consistency (20% → 25% → 30%). No resets available. Higher price point.
Can I get a refund if my account fails?
No. All sales are final per our Terms of Service. If a Growth or Select evaluation fails, you can purchase a reset at a reduced price to try again. Lightning Funded accounts do not have resets — a new account must be purchased.
Are there any hidden fees?
No hidden fees. The only costs are: (1) the account purchase price, (2) trading commissions on each trade, and (3) optional reset fees if your evaluation fails. Market data is free as long as you sign the Non-Professional Agreement. All brokers (Tradovate, Rithmic, WealthCharts) are the same price — no platform surcharges.
Do you offer promo codes or discounts?
Tradeify periodically offers promotional discounts. Check the Tradeify website or dashboard for any currently active promo codes. Promo codes are entered at checkout. Tradeify also offers a permanent 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations — see the Bundle Discounts section above. If you completed a purchase and a promo code was not applied — you forgot to enter it, or you entered it and were still charged the full amount — contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy.
Can I buy multiple accounts at a discount?
Yes. Tradeify offers a 5-account bundle discount on Growth 25K, Growth 50K, Select 25K, and Select 50K Evaluations. At checkout, tick the Bundle and save option to buy 5 of the same eligible account in one order and the 5% bundle discount applies automatically. It also stacks with any active promo code. The discount only applies in a single transaction and won't apply retroactively to a separate, later order. See the Bundle Discounts section above for full details.
Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
Section: Can I buy 2, 3, or 4 accounts in one order?
− No. The only multi-account checkout is the 5-account Bundle and save option. To buy any other number, purchase accounts individually (one per checkout) at full price. There is no limit on how many Evaluations you can buy — the 5-account cap applies only to active Sim Funded accounts (per household).
+ No. The only multi-account checkout is the 5-account Bundle and save option. To buy any other number, purchase accounts individually (one per checkout) at full price. Growth evaluations have no purchase limit; Select evaluations are limited to 15 per 30-day period (300K purchases do not count). The 5-account cap applies to active Sim Funded accounts per household.
What is the profit split?
Sim Funded accounts (Growth, Select, Lightning) use a 90/10 profit split — you keep 90% of your profits, Tradeify receives 10%. Elite Live accounts use an 80/20 split. This applies from your very first payout.
What platforms can I trade on?
At checkout, you select one of three brokers: Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts. Each broker gives access to different trading platforms. Tradovate gives access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic gives access to Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader. WealthCharts is its own broker and platform — it can only be used to access the WealthCharts platform. See the Supported Platforms article for details.
PremierTradeify · Supported Platforms | Tradeify Help CenterSingle Stock Futures question and answer removed.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
If you select WealthCharts as your broker, you receive WealthCharts credentials that can only be used with the WealthCharts platform. WealthCharts is operated by a third party and uses its own login — WealthCharts access is only included when you select WealthCharts at checkout, not with Tradovate or Rithmic accounts.
Market data: Level 1 CME data is included. Level 2 depth data and EUREX data are not yet available on WealthCharts accounts and cannot be purchased — coming soon.
For setup instructions, see the WealthCharts Platform Overview.
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
− Can I trade Single Stock Futures on any broker?
− No. Single Stock Futures are carried by Tradovate only — they are not available on Rithmic or WealthCharts. TradingView and NinjaTrader connect through Tradovate, so they reach SSF too. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Tradovate is a great starting point — it's cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic is ideal if you want access to Tradesea, Quantower, or Sierra Chart. WealthCharts is for traders who specifically want WealthCharts' advanced charting tools.
After
If you select WealthCharts as your broker, you receive WealthCharts credentials that can only be used with the WealthCharts platform. WealthCharts is operated by a third party and uses its own login — WealthCharts access is only included when you select WealthCharts at checkout, not with Tradovate or Rithmic accounts.
Market data: Level 1 CME data is included. Level 2 depth data and EUREX data are not yet available on WealthCharts accounts and cannot be purchased — coming soon.
For setup instructions, see the WealthCharts Platform Overview.
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Tradovate is a great starting point — it's cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic is ideal if you want access to Tradesea, Quantower, or Sierra Chart. WealthCharts is for traders who specifically want WealthCharts' advanced charting tools.
If you select WealthCharts as your broker, you receive WealthCharts credentials that can only be used with the WealthCharts platform. WealthCharts is operated by a third party and uses its own login — WealthCharts access is only included when you select WealthCharts at checkout, not with Tradovate or Rithmic accounts.
Market data: Level 1 CME data is included. Level 2 depth data and EUREX data are not yet available on WealthCharts accounts and cannot be purchased — coming soon.
For setup instructions, see the WealthCharts Platform Overview.
Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch platforms after purchasing?
You can use any platform compatible with your broker (e.g., if you have Rithmic credentials, you can switch freely between Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader). However, you cannot switch between brokers (e.g., from Tradovate to Rithmic) without purchasing a new account.
Do all platforms cost the same?
Yes. Tradovate, Rithmic, and WealthCharts accounts are all the same price. There is no surcharge for any platform.
Can I use TradingView with a Rithmic account?
No. TradingView connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use TradingView, you need a Tradovate-based account. Rithmic users can use Tradesea as an alternative web-based charting platform.
Can I use NinjaTrader with a Rithmic account?
No. NinjaTrader connects through Tradovate only. If you want to use NinjaTrader, you need a Tradovate-based account.
− Can I trade Single Stock Futures on any broker?
− No. Single Stock Futures are carried by Tradovate only — they are not available on Rithmic or WealthCharts. TradingView and NinjaTrader connect through Tradovate, so they reach SSF too. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
Are Level 2 and EUREX data available on all brokers?
No. Level 2 (L2) depth of market data and EUREX data are available on Tradovate accounts only, purchased directly from Tradovate. On Rithmic accounts (Tradesea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader) and WealthCharts accounts these add-ons are not yet available and cannot be purchased — support is coming soon. All accounts include free Level 1 CME data. See Level 2 (L2) and EUREX Data: Availability by Broker.
Which platform should I choose?
Tradovate is a great starting point — it's cloud-based, works on any device, and gives you access to NinjaTrader and TradingView. Rithmic is ideal if you want access to Tradesea, Quantower, or Sierra Chart. WealthCharts is for traders who specifically want WealthCharts' advanced charting tools.
PremierTradeify · How Many Simulated Funded Accounts Can I Have at Once? | Tradeify Help CenterHousehold Simulated Funded Account limit now allows up to 8 total when V2 Select 300K accounts are included alongside the 5-account cap.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Account Limits
Evaluation Accounts:
You can have up to 15 select evaluations per 30 days and as many Growth Evaluation accounts as you want - there is no limit on Growth evaluation accounts.
Simulated Funded Accounts:
- An individual user may have up to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time
Section: Account Limits
− - A household is also restricted to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time
You can pass as many evaluations as you want and bank those completions for later. For example, if you pass 10 evaluations, you can activate 5 funded accounts right away and hold the remaining 5 passed evaluations until a funded account slot opens up. You can only activate 5 funded accounts at a time, but having extra passed evaluations ready means you can fill a slot immediately whenever one becomes available rather than having to start and pass a new evaluation from scratch.
Important Notes
- Funded account limit applies per household - All funded accounts across all users in the same household count toward the 5-account limit
- Mix and match account types - Your 5 funded accounts can be any combination of Growth, Select Flex/Daily, and Lightning Funded accounts
- Active accounts only - Failed or expired accounts do not count toward your limit
- Maximum 15 Select evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each Select evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
Example Scenarios
Scenario 1: You have 3 Evaluation accounts and 2 Funded accounts
- Allowed - You can add more Evaluation accounts
- Allowed - You can add 3 more Funded accounts
Scenario 2: You have 10 Evaluation accounts and 5 Funded accounts
After
Account Limits
Evaluation Accounts:
You can have up to 15 select evaluations per 30 days and as many Growth Evaluation accounts as you want - there is no limit on Growth evaluation accounts.
Simulated Funded Accounts:
- An individual user may have up to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time
Section: Account Limits
+ - A household is also restricted to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time (exception: V2 Select 300K funded accounts sit on top of the 5, for up to 8 in total)
You can pass as many evaluations as you want and bank those completions for later. For example, if you pass 10 evaluations, you can activate 5 funded accounts right away and hold the remaining 5 passed evaluations until a funded account slot opens up. You can only activate 5 funded accounts at a time, but having extra passed evaluations ready means you can fill a slot immediately whenever one becomes available rather than having to start and pass a new evaluation from scratch.
Important Notes
- Funded account limit applies per household - All funded accounts across all users in the same household count toward the 5-account limit
- Mix and match account types - Your 5 funded accounts can be any combination of Growth, Select Flex/Daily, and Lightning Funded accounts
- Active accounts only - Failed or expired accounts do not count toward your limit
- Maximum 15 Select evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each Select evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
Example Scenarios
Scenario 1: You have 3 Evaluation accounts and 2 Funded accounts
- Allowed - You can add more Evaluation accounts
- Allowed - You can add 3 more Funded accounts
Scenario 2: You have 10 Evaluation accounts and 5 Funded accounts
Account Limits
Evaluation Accounts:
You can have up to 15 select evaluations per 30 days and as many Growth Evaluation accounts as you want - there is no limit on Growth evaluation accounts.
Simulated Funded Accounts:
- An individual user may have up to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time
Section: Account Limits
− - A household is also restricted to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time
+ - A household is also restricted to 5 Simulated Funded Accounts at any time (exception: V2 Select 300K funded accounts sit on top of the 5, for up to 8 in total)
You can pass as many evaluations as you want and bank those completions for later. For example, if you pass 10 evaluations, you can activate 5 funded accounts right away and hold the remaining 5 passed evaluations until a funded account slot opens up. You can only activate 5 funded accounts at a time, but having extra passed evaluations ready means you can fill a slot immediately whenever one becomes available rather than having to start and pass a new evaluation from scratch.
Important Notes
- Funded account limit applies per household - All funded accounts across all users in the same household count toward the 5-account limit
- Mix and match account types - Your 5 funded accounts can be any combination of Growth, Select Flex/Daily, and Lightning Funded accounts
- Active accounts only - Failed or expired accounts do not count toward your limit
- Maximum 15 Select evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each Select evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
Example Scenarios
Scenario 1: You have 3 Evaluation accounts and 2 Funded accounts
- Allowed - You can add more Evaluation accounts
- Allowed - You can add 3 more Funded accounts
Scenario 2: You have 10 Evaluation accounts and 5 Funded accounts
PremierTradeify · What is a Trading Day? | Tradeify Help CenterPayout qualification requirements changed from one trading day minimum with five-second trade duration to ten-second rule requiring over 50% of trades held longer than ten seconds.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
− To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including trading for at least one trading day after initiating a request and ensuring each trade remains open for at least 5 seconds.
For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M EST and then another at 7:00 P.M EST on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
After
A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
+ To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including the 10-second rule on funded accounts: over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M EST and then another at 7:00 P.M EST on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
Tradeify users should know that trading days are a critical part of the system, consolidated from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT on the following day. It aligns trades and provides clarity on account processing.
The term can cause confusion, so it may be easier to think of it as "Market Session" instead.
− To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including trading for at least one trading day after initiating a request and ensuring each trade remains open for at least 5 seconds.
+ To qualify for a payout in Tradeify, users must fulfill trading activity requirements, including the 10-second rule on funded accounts: over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
For example, if you placed a trade at 10:00 A.M EST and then another at 7:00 P.M EST on the same day, you might think that that's one "trading day," but it's actually two, because the trades fall on two different market sessions.
Rithmic accounts: On the Rithmic broker, a holiday half-day (shortened session) is not recorded until the next full market close. The day still counts as a trading day, but the credit (and any payout based on it) may not post until the following full session closes. For example, a Friday holiday half-day is recorded at the following Monday's market close.
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterReconciliation window timezone changed from EST to ET; account activation process changed from scheduled dashboard update to instant activation via dashboard button; payout timeline updated to 24 hours with weekend exceptions; KYC requirements expanded with country-specific ru...Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
− A: Once you meet your profit target and pass the Evaluation, you will need to wait until the dashboard updates between 5PM and 8 PM EST.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
− A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires. If you had an active subscription from before Tradeify 3.0, that subscription remains active until you cancel it — no new subscriptions are available.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
− Q: Do I get reset credits upon renewal?
− A: If the evaluation is NOT failed then the account will not reset and you will not get a reset credit.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
Account Management:
- How many simulated funded accounts can I have at once?
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
− - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM EST). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
− - Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you've waited for the daily dashboard update (5-8 PM EST).
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
− - No, this is not normal. Funded account activation should happen the same day you pass your evaluation.
− - Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → wait for 5-8 PM EST reconciliation → activate funded account. If you passed late evening, activation may be available the next day after reconciliation.
− - If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard after 8 PM EST.
− - "Account creation in progress" message: If you see this message outside the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window (e.g., mid-day the next day), this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
− - If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your Tradovate username and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
− - Payouts are usually processed within 24 - 48 Hours.
- Can I request another payout while my previous one is still processing?
- No. Only one payout request can be open per account at a time. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved or denied), then request again once you're eligible.
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
− - Only once you request a payout. You'll receive an email to sign up with Rise and complete verification.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
− - No. The previous 7-day requirement has been removed. You can request a payout once your dashboard shows you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
− - Why was I charged $1 when purchasing a free trial?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
- Can I use someone else’s card (a parent, spouse, or friend) to pay?
- No. You can only pay with a credit or debit card in your own name. Payments made with someone else’s card, including a family member’s, are not permitted — even with their permission and even if the billing details match.
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- Try a different browser - Chrome, Firefox, Safari, or Edge
- Clear your browser cookies for the Tradeify website
- "Stubborn cookies" from previous sessions can interfere with promotional codes.
- If the code still doesn't work after trying these steps, contact support. Already completed your purchase? If a code was not applied - you forgot to enter it, or the discounted price showed at checkout but you were charged the full amount, or the code isn't listed in your transaction details - contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy and we will get it corrected.
- I saw a promo code on Instagram/Facebook but it doesn't work
- Most likely cause: The promotion has already expired. Social media platforms (especially Instagram and Facebook) are notorious for continuing to show ads for promotions long after they've ended. We apologize for the confusion this causes.
- Check current promotions: Visit tradeify.co directly for active discounts, or check your email for promotional offers.
- If you believe the promotion should still be active (you just saw it announced recently), contact support and we can verify the code's status.
- If I trade after requesting a payout, which cycle do those profits count toward?
- Before payout approval: All profits (before AND after your request) count toward the same payout cycle. If your payout is denied, everything stays in the current cycle.
- After payout approval, same session: Profits made after approval but in the same trading session count toward your next payout cycle.
- Best practice: After your payout is approved, wait for a new trading session to begin before resuming trading. This ensures your profits clearly count toward the next cycle.
− - Remember: A trading session runs from 6:00 PM EST to 5:00 PM EST the next day. Payout cycles reset at session boundaries, not immediately upon approval.
Trading Rules & Compliance:
- What is a trading day?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
− - A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
- Can I hold positions overnight?
− - No, you cannot.
- What time can I start/stop trading?
− - You can trade from 6:00 PM EST/EDT until 5:00 PM EST/EDT the next day.
- Is news trading allowed?
- Yes, it's allowed.
- Is hedging allowed?
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
− - We do not offer cash stocks, forex, or options. We do offer Single Stock Futures on Tradovate, which track the price of individual companies such as Tesla, Nvidia, and Apple as futures contracts. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
- What time must I close positions?
− - All positions must be closed before 4:45PM EST.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
Section: Platform & Technical:
− - We offer Tradovate, NinjaTrader, and TradingView.
- What happened to ProjectX?
- We offered ProjectX as a platform option for a short time. ProjectX decided to drop all of their clients, so we no longer offer that platform. Please refer to our Supported Platforms article for current and upcoming options.
- Do I have to pay for market data?
- No, we provide you with Level 1 Market data.
- Do I need Level 2 data?
- No, you do not need it, it's optional.
- Why is my market data delayed?
− - Make sure to sign the Non-Professional Agreement in Tradovate Web.
- Why isn't the dashboard showing my updated balance?
- Your account balance now updates in real-time on the dashboard. The only figure that updates once per day - at the end of each trading day - is your Trailing Max Drawdown. If your balance still looks out of date, refresh the page.
- This applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so your balance may look stuck until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- Why aren't my trades showing on the dashboard immediately?
- Your trades, balance, and P&L now update in real-time on the Tradeify dashboard - you'll see them reflected as you trade.
- You can also verify trades in real-time on your trading platform (Tradovate, NinjaTrader, etc.).
- The one exception is your Trailing Max Drawdown, which updates once per day at the end of each trading day.
- Payout processing is unaffected - it uses the trading platform's real-time execution data.
- This real-time behavior applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so trades and P&L for that day may not appear until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- How do I contact Trader TV?
- Email for Trader TV inquiries.
Account Types:
- What's the difference between Sim Funded and Live Funded?
- Sim Funded: Trade in simulated markets, earn real payouts (90/10 split)
Section: Account Types:
− - Live Funded: Trade with real capital in live markets, higher earning potential with daily payouts and scaling opportunities
- When do I get moved to Elite Live?
− - Tradeify monitors individual account performance and may select you for Elite Live transition, typically after 4-5 payouts on a single account.
- Each funded account that received at least one payout can transition to its own Elite Live account.
- See Tradeify Elite Program for full details.
- Can I reset a sim funded account?
- No, you cannot reset a sim funded account.
- I have a Live account. Can I start new evaluations?
- No, you cannot have Sim and Live accounts active simultaneously. See Sim and Live Account Restrictions in the Elite Program article for full details.
- Why is my funded account in simulation mode? Why can't I live trade?
- Your Sim Funded account is working exactly as intended! Sim Funded = simulated trading with real payouts. You trade on simulated markets, but you receive real money when you hit payout thresholds. This is NOT a practice account.
− - Why simulated? Tradeify uses simulation to let you trade with significant capital ($50K-$150K) at minimal upfront cost while you prove consistent profitability.
- Seeing "Demo" or "Simulation" in Tradovate is expected - this is not an error. Your account is set up correctly.
- Path to real capital trading: Consistent performance → qualify for Elite Live → trade with real Tradeify capital.
Section: Competitions:
− Grand Cup:
− - What is the Grand Cup?
− - The Tradeify Grand Cup is our flagship trading competition with major cash prizes. Traders compete in a knockout-style format, with top performers advancing to live Grand Finals for a chance at the Grand Champion title.
- Has there been a Grand Cup before?
− - Yes! The first Tradeify Grand Cup ran from November 2 to December 12, 2025. It featured a $1,000,000 prize pool, 400 prizes, and culminated in LIVE Grand Finals where traders competed for the $200,000 Grand Champion prize.
− - When is the next Grand Cup?
− - The next Grand Cup is planned for Spring 2026. No official dates have been announced yet. Follow Tradeify on social media and join our Discord (discord.gg/tradeify) for official announcements.
− Tradeify Crypto:
− - What is Tradeify Crypto?
− - Tradeify Crypto is a separate prop trading product from Tradeify that lets you trade cryptocurrency instead of futures. It uses the DXTrade platform (not Tradovate), offers 100+ crypto pairs (BTC, ETH, SOL, and more), up to 5x leverage, 24/7 trading, and an 80% profit split. It has its own dashboard, accounts, and support team - completely separate from Futures Prop.
- Can I use my Futures Prop account to trade crypto?
Section: Tradeify 247:
− - No. Futures Prop and Crypto Prop are completely separate products. They have separate dashboards, separate accounts, separate trading platforms (Tradovate vs DXTrade), and separate support teams. You cannot trade crypto on a Futures Prop account.
− - Do the same trading rules apply to Crypto Prop?
− - No. Crypto Prop has its own set of rules including different drawdown percentages, profit targets, and payout policies. The rules are different from Futures Prop. Visit help.tradeifycrypto.co for Crypto Prop rules and documentation.
− - Where do I sign up for Tradeify Crypto or learn more?
− - Visit tradeifycrypto.com to learn more, view pricing, and sign up. For the Crypto Help Center and support articles, visit help.tradeifycrypto.co.
After
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
+ A: Once you have met all of your evaluation objectives, go to your dashboard and click Activate Account on the account card. Activation is instant and there are no activation fees.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
+ A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
Account Management:
- How many simulated funded accounts can I have at once?
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
+ - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
+ - Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you have met every evaluation objective. Activation is instant once all of these are met. Residents of some countries must also complete identity verification (KYC) before activating.
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
+ - No, this is not normal. Funded account activation is instant once your objectives are met.
+ - Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → click Activate Account on your dashboard. There is no waiting period.
+ - If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard.
+ - "Account creation in progress" message: If you still see this message more than a few hours after activating, this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
+ - If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your broker (Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts) and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
+ - Payouts are usually processed within 24 hours once your Rise onboarding is complete. Requests submitted over a weekend can take up to 72 hours, though most are still paid within 24 hours.
- Can I request another payout while my previous one is still processing?
- No. Only one payout request can be open per account at a time. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved or denied), then request again once you're eligible.
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
+ - Before your first payout. You can start identity verification (KYC) in your Tradeify dashboard at any time. Residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates must complete it before receiving a funded account, and crypto purchases require it at checkout. Rise payout verification is a separate step before your first payout.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
+ - It depends on the account. Growth funded accounts need 5 profitable trading days. Select Flex needs 5 winning days. Select Daily has daily eligibility. Lightning has no minimum day count but must meet its profit goal and consistency rule. Your dashboard shows when you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
+ - Why do I see a $1 charge on my card?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
- Can I use someone else’s card (a parent, spouse, or friend) to pay?
- No. You can only pay with a credit or debit card in your own name. Payments made with someone else’s card, including a family member’s, are not permitted — even with their permission and even if the billing details match.
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- Try a different browser - Chrome, Firefox, Safari, or Edge
- Clear your browser cookies for the Tradeify website
- "Stubborn cookies" from previous sessions can interfere with promotional codes.
- If the code still doesn't work after trying these steps, contact support. Already completed your purchase? If a code was not applied - you forgot to enter it, or the discounted price showed at checkout but you were charged the full amount, or the code isn't listed in your transaction details - contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy and we will get it corrected.
- I saw a promo code on Instagram/Facebook but it doesn't work
- Most likely cause: The promotion has already expired. Social media platforms (especially Instagram and Facebook) are notorious for continuing to show ads for promotions long after they've ended. We apologize for the confusion this causes.
- Check current promotions: Visit tradeify.co directly for active discounts, or check your email for promotional offers.
- If you believe the promotion should still be active (you just saw it announced recently), contact support and we can verify the code's status.
- If I trade after requesting a payout, which cycle do those profits count toward?
- Before payout approval: All profits (before AND after your request) count toward the same payout cycle. If your payout is denied, everything stays in the current cycle.
- After payout approval, same session: Profits made after approval but in the same trading session count toward your next payout cycle.
- Best practice: After your payout is approved, wait for a new trading session to begin before resuming trading. This ensures your profits clearly count toward the next cycle.
+ - Remember: A trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next day. Payout cycles reset at session boundaries, not immediately upon approval.
Trading Rules & Compliance:
- What is a trading day?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
+ - A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next day.
- Can I hold positions overnight?
+ - Only within one trading session (6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next day). Every position must be closed by 4:45 PM ET; you cannot hold positions from one session into the next.
- What time can I start/stop trading?
+ - You can trade from 6:00 PM ET until 4:45 PM ET the next day.
- Is news trading allowed?
- Yes, it's allowed.
- Is hedging allowed?
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
+ - No. We do not offer cash stocks, forex, options, or Single Stock Futures. Only the futures products on our supported products list can be traded.
- What time must I close positions?
+ - All positions must be closed before 4:45 PM ET.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
Section: Platform & Technical:
+ - You choose one of three brokers at checkout, all at the same price: Tradovate (also gives access to NinjaTrader and TradingView), Rithmic (also gives access to TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader), or WealthCharts.
- What happened to ProjectX?
- We offered ProjectX as a platform option for a short time. ProjectX decided to drop all of their clients, so we no longer offer that platform. Please refer to our Supported Platforms article for current and upcoming options.
- Do I have to pay for market data?
- No, we provide you with Level 1 Market data.
- Do I need Level 2 data?
- No, you do not need it, it's optional.
- Why is my market data delayed?
+ - On Tradovate, make sure you signed the Non-Professional Agreement in Tradovate Web.
- Why isn't the dashboard showing my updated balance?
- Your account balance now updates in real-time on the dashboard. The only figure that updates once per day - at the end of each trading day - is your Trailing Max Drawdown. If your balance still looks out of date, refresh the page.
- This applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so your balance may look stuck until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- Why aren't my trades showing on the dashboard immediately?
- Your trades, balance, and P&L now update in real-time on the Tradeify dashboard - you'll see them reflected as you trade.
- You can also verify trades in real-time on your trading platform (Tradovate, NinjaTrader, etc.).
- The one exception is your Trailing Max Drawdown, which updates once per day at the end of each trading day.
- Payout processing is unaffected - it uses the trading platform's real-time execution data.
- This real-time behavior applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so trades and P&L for that day may not appear until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- How do I contact Trader TV?
- Email for Trader TV inquiries.
Account Types:
- What's the difference between Sim Funded and Live Funded?
- Sim Funded: Trade in simulated markets, earn real payouts (90/10 split)
Section: Account Types:
+ - Elite Live: Trade with real capital in live markets, with daily payouts at an 80/20 profit split
- When do I get moved to Elite Live?
+ - Tradeify monitors performance and may select you for Elite Live once you reach 3 payouts on a single account, or 10 total payouts since your last live transition across all plan types.
- Each funded account that received at least one payout can transition to its own Elite Live account.
- See Tradeify Elite Program for full details.
- Can I reset a sim funded account?
- No, you cannot reset a sim funded account.
- I have a Live account. Can I start new evaluations?
- No, you cannot have Sim and Live accounts active simultaneously. See Sim and Live Account Restrictions in the Elite Program article for full details.
- Why is my funded account in simulation mode? Why can't I live trade?
- Your Sim Funded account is working exactly as intended! Sim Funded = simulated trading with real payouts. You trade on simulated markets, but you receive real money when you hit payout thresholds. This is NOT a practice account.
+ - Why simulated? Tradeify uses simulation to let you trade with significant capital ($25K-$300K) at minimal upfront cost while you prove consistent profitability.
- Seeing "Demo" or "Simulation" in Tradovate is expected - this is not an error. Your account is set up correctly.
- Path to real capital trading: Consistent performance → qualify for Elite Live → trade with real Tradeify capital.
Section: Competitions:
+ Competitions:
+ - What competitions are running?
+ - The Premier Trading League (PTL) is Tradeify's current competition: a free, simulated head-to-head league played from your Futures dashboard. See the PTL Full Competition Guide (https://help.tradeify.co/en/articles/16829567) for dates, rules, and prizes.
- Has there been a Grand Cup before?
+ - Yes! The first Tradeify Grand Cup ran from November 2 to December 12, 2025, and Grand Cup 2 ended in June 2026. It featured a $1,000,000 prize pool, 400 prizes, and culminated in LIVE Grand Finals where traders competed for the $200,000 Grand Champion prize.
+ - Is the Grand Cup running now?
+ - No. Grand Cup is not currently running and no new dates have been announced. Follow Tradeify on social media and join our Discord (discord.gg/tradeify) for official announcements.
+ Tradeify 247:
+ - What is Tradeify 247?
+ - Tradeify 247 (formerly Tradeify Crypto) is a separate prop trading brand for markets that trade around the clock, such as crypto. It has its own platforms, dashboard, accounts, rules, and support team - completely separate from Tradeify Futures.
- Can I use my Futures Prop account to trade crypto?
Section: Tradeify 247:
+ - No. Tradeify Futures and Tradeify 247 are completely separate products. They have separate dashboards, separate accounts, separate trading platforms, and separate support teams. You cannot trade crypto on a Futures Prop account.
+ - Do the same trading rules apply to Tradeify 247?
+ - No. Tradeify 247 has its own rules, including different drawdown, profit targets, and payout policies. Visit help.tradeify247.co for Tradeify 247 rules and documentation.
+ - Where do I sign up for Tradeify 247 or learn more?
+ - Visit tradeify247.co to learn more, view pricing, and sign up. For the Tradeify 247 Help Center, visit help.tradeify247.co.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
+ A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM ET reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
− A: Once you meet your profit target and pass the Evaluation, you will need to wait until the dashboard updates between 5PM and 8 PM EST.
+ A: Once you have met all of your evaluation objectives, go to your dashboard and click Activate Account on the account card. Activation is instant and there are no activation fees.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
− A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires. If you had an active subscription from before Tradeify 3.0, that subscription remains active until you cancel it — no new subscriptions are available.
+ A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
− Q: Do I get reset credits upon renewal?
− A: If the evaluation is NOT failed then the account will not reset and you will not get a reset credit.
Q: Are there any monthly fees after funding?
A: No, once you pass and activate the evaluation there are no fees at all.
Q: Do you offer practice accounts?
A: No, we do not offer practice accounts.
Account Management:
- How many simulated funded accounts can I have at once?
- You can have up to 5 Funded accounts per Household.
- Are there activation fees?
- No. Growth, Select, and Lightning accounts have no activation fees.
- Can I trade as a company/LLC?
- Yes. You may register your single Tradeify account using business information, or trade under your personal account and complete KYB (Know Your Business) verification when requesting payouts. Only one Tradeify account is permitted per user — personal and business accounts cannot be held in parallel.
- What happens to my account if I don't trade for a week?
- Funded and evaluation accounts require at least one trade per week (Monday-Friday) to remain active. If inactive, your account will be deleted after an email warning.
- What happens to my profits if I want to close my account?
- The profits will be forfeited.
- What happens if I delete my Tradeify account?
- Account deletion is permanent and irreversible. Once deleted, you will not be permitted to register or use Tradeify in the future. If you only want to remove a single failed or expired account, contact support — full deletion is not required.
- How do I remove failed accounts from Tradovate?
Section: Account Management:
− - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM EST). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
+ - Failed accounts are automatically removed from Tradovate during our daily reconciliation process (5-8 PM ET). No action needed - they will disappear from your Tradovate account list automatically.
- Can I pause or put my account on hold?
- No. Accounts cannot be paused or put on hold for any reason. All account types remain active until they fail a rule or the account expires.
- Why won't my passed evaluation account activate?
− - Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you've waited for the daily dashboard update (5-8 PM EST).
+ - Check that: (1) you have fewer than 5 active funded accounts, (2) your account is still active (not expired), and (3) you have met every evaluation objective. Activation is instant once all of these are met. Residents of some countries must also complete identity verification (KYC) before activating.
- Can I reinstate a canceled account?
- Accounts removed due to inactivity cannot be reactivated. Expired accounts cannot be reinstated - you would need to purchase a new account.
- My funded account has been "processing" for multiple days - is this normal?
− - No, this is not normal. Funded account activation should happen the same day you pass your evaluation.
− - Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → wait for 5-8 PM EST reconciliation → activate funded account. If you passed late evening, activation may be available the next day after reconciliation.
− - If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard after 8 PM EST.
− - "Account creation in progress" message: If you see this message outside the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window (e.g., mid-day the next day), this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
− - If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your Tradovate username and account number for investigation.
+ - No, this is not normal. Funded account activation is instant once your objectives are met.
+ - Normal timeline: Pass evaluation → click Activate Account on your dashboard. There is no waiting period.
+ - If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard.
+ - "Account creation in progress" message: If you still see this message more than a few hours after activating, this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
+ - If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your broker (Tradovate, Rithmic, or WealthCharts) and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
− - Payouts are usually processed within 24 - 48 Hours.
+ - Payouts are usually processed within 24 hours once your Rise onboarding is complete. Requests submitted over a weekend can take up to 72 hours, though most are still paid within 24 hours.
- Can I request another payout while my previous one is still processing?
- No. Only one payout request can be open per account at a time. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved or denied), then request again once you're eligible.
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
− - Only once you request a payout. You'll receive an email to sign up with Rise and complete verification.
+ - Before your first payout. You can start identity verification (KYC) in your Tradeify dashboard at any time. Residents of Brazil, China, Italy, Mexico, Romania, South Korea, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, and the United Arab Emirates must complete it before receiving a funded account, and crypto purchases require it at checkout. Rise payout verification is a separate step before your first payout.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
− - No. The previous 7-day requirement has been removed. You can request a payout once your dashboard shows you're eligible.
+ - It depends on the account. Growth funded accounts need 5 profitable trading days. Select Flex needs 5 winning days. Select Daily has daily eligibility. Lightning has no minimum day count but must meet its profit goal and consistency rule. Your dashboard shows when you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
− - Why was I charged $1 when purchasing a free trial?
+ - Why do I see a $1 charge on my card?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
- Can I use someone else’s card (a parent, spouse, or friend) to pay?
- No. You can only pay with a credit or debit card in your own name. Payments made with someone else’s card, including a family member’s, are not permitted — even with their permission and even if the billing details match.
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- Try a different browser - Chrome, Firefox, Safari, or Edge
- Clear your browser cookies for the Tradeify website
- "Stubborn cookies" from previous sessions can interfere with promotional codes.
- If the code still doesn't work after trying these steps, contact support. Already completed your purchase? If a code was not applied - you forgot to enter it, or the discounted price showed at checkout but you were charged the full amount, or the code isn't listed in your transaction details - contact support with your transaction details. This is handled separately from the refund policy and we will get it corrected.
- I saw a promo code on Instagram/Facebook but it doesn't work
- Most likely cause: The promotion has already expired. Social media platforms (especially Instagram and Facebook) are notorious for continuing to show ads for promotions long after they've ended. We apologize for the confusion this causes.
- Check current promotions: Visit tradeify.co directly for active discounts, or check your email for promotional offers.
- If you believe the promotion should still be active (you just saw it announced recently), contact support and we can verify the code's status.
- If I trade after requesting a payout, which cycle do those profits count toward?
- Before payout approval: All profits (before AND after your request) count toward the same payout cycle. If your payout is denied, everything stays in the current cycle.
- After payout approval, same session: Profits made after approval but in the same trading session count toward your next payout cycle.
- Best practice: After your payout is approved, wait for a new trading session to begin before resuming trading. This ensures your profits clearly count toward the next cycle.
− - Remember: A trading session runs from 6:00 PM EST to 5:00 PM EST the next day. Payout cycles reset at session boundaries, not immediately upon approval.
+ - Remember: A trading session runs from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next day. Payout cycles reset at session boundaries, not immediately upon approval.
Trading Rules & Compliance:
- What is a trading day?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
− - A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 P.M. EST/EDT to 5:00 P.M. EST/EDT the next day.
+ - A trading day is counted as at least one trade placed from 6:00 PM ET to 5:00 PM ET the next day.
- Can I hold positions overnight?
− - No, you cannot.
+ - Only within one trading session (6:00 PM ET to 4:45 PM ET the next day). Every position must be closed by 4:45 PM ET; you cannot hold positions from one session into the next.
- What time can I start/stop trading?
− - You can trade from 6:00 PM EST/EDT until 5:00 PM EST/EDT the next day.
+ - You can trade from 6:00 PM ET until 4:45 PM ET the next day.
- Is news trading allowed?
- Yes, it's allowed.
- Is hedging allowed?
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
− - We do not offer cash stocks, forex, or options. We do offer Single Stock Futures on Tradovate, which track the price of individual companies such as Tesla, Nvidia, and Apple as futures contracts. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
+ - No. We do not offer cash stocks, forex, options, or Single Stock Futures. Only the futures products on our supported products list can be traded.
- What time must I close positions?
− - All positions must be closed before 4:45PM EST.
+ - All positions must be closed before 4:45 PM ET.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
Section: Platform & Technical:
− - We offer Tradovate, NinjaTrader, and TradingView.
+ - You choose one of three brokers at checkout, all at the same price: Tradovate (also gives access to NinjaTrader and TradingView), Rithmic (also gives access to TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, and R|Trader), or WealthCharts.
- What happened to ProjectX?
- We offered ProjectX as a platform option for a short time. ProjectX decided to drop all of their clients, so we no longer offer that platform. Please refer to our Supported Platforms article for current and upcoming options.
- Do I have to pay for market data?
- No, we provide you with Level 1 Market data.
- Do I need Level 2 data?
- No, you do not need it, it's optional.
- Why is my market data delayed?
− - Make sure to sign the Non-Professional Agreement in Tradovate Web.
+ - On Tradovate, make sure you signed the Non-Professional Agreement in Tradovate Web.
- Why isn't the dashboard showing my updated balance?
- Your account balance now updates in real-time on the dashboard. The only figure that updates once per day - at the end of each trading day - is your Trailing Max Drawdown. If your balance still looks out of date, refresh the page.
- This applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so your balance may look stuck until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- Why aren't my trades showing on the dashboard immediately?
- Your trades, balance, and P&L now update in real-time on the Tradeify dashboard - you'll see them reflected as you trade.
- You can also verify trades in real-time on your trading platform (Tradovate, NinjaTrader, etc.).
- The one exception is your Trailing Max Drawdown, which updates once per day at the end of each trading day.
- Payout processing is unaffected - it uses the trading platform's real-time execution data.
- This real-time behavior applies to Tradovate. On Rithmic-based platforms (TradeSea, Quantower, Sierra Chart, R|Trader), holiday and early-close half-day sessions are not reconciled until the next full market close, so trades and P&L for that day may not appear until then - this is expected, not a sync error.
- How do I contact Trader TV?
- Email for Trader TV inquiries.
Account Types:
- What's the difference between Sim Funded and Live Funded?
- Sim Funded: Trade in simulated markets, earn real payouts (90/10 split)
Section: Account Types:
− - Live Funded: Trade with real capital in live markets, higher earning potential with daily payouts and scaling opportunities
+ - Elite Live: Trade with real capital in live markets, with daily payouts at an 80/20 profit split
- When do I get moved to Elite Live?
− - Tradeify monitors individual account performance and may select you for Elite Live transition, typically after 4-5 payouts on a single account.
+ - Tradeify monitors performance and may select you for Elite Live once you reach 3 payouts on a single account, or 10 total payouts since your last live transition across all plan types.
- Each funded account that received at least one payout can transition to its own Elite Live account.
- See Tradeify Elite Program for full details.
- Can I reset a sim funded account?
- No, you cannot reset a sim funded account.
- I have a Live account. Can I start new evaluations?
- No, you cannot have Sim and Live accounts active simultaneously. See Sim and Live Account Restrictions in the Elite Program article for full details.
- Why is my funded account in simulation mode? Why can't I live trade?
- Your Sim Funded account is working exactly as intended! Sim Funded = simulated trading with real payouts. You trade on simulated markets, but you receive real money when you hit payout thresholds. This is NOT a practice account.
− - Why simulated? Tradeify uses simulation to let you trade with significant capital ($50K-$150K) at minimal upfront cost while you prove consistent profitability.
+ - Why simulated? Tradeify uses simulation to let you trade with significant capital ($25K-$300K) at minimal upfront cost while you prove consistent profitability.
- Seeing "Demo" or "Simulation" in Tradovate is expected - this is not an error. Your account is set up correctly.
- Path to real capital trading: Consistent performance → qualify for Elite Live → trade with real Tradeify capital.
Section: Competitions:
− Grand Cup:
− - What is the Grand Cup?
− - The Tradeify Grand Cup is our flagship trading competition with major cash prizes. Traders compete in a knockout-style format, with top performers advancing to live Grand Finals for a chance at the Grand Champion title.
+ Competitions:
+ - What competitions are running?
+ - The Premier Trading League (PTL) is Tradeify's current competition: a free, simulated head-to-head league played from your Futures dashboard. See the PTL Full Competition Guide (https://help.tradeify.co/en/articles/16829567) for dates, rules, and prizes.
- Has there been a Grand Cup before?
− - Yes! The first Tradeify Grand Cup ran from November 2 to December 12, 2025. It featured a $1,000,000 prize pool, 400 prizes, and culminated in LIVE Grand Finals where traders competed for the $200,000 Grand Champion prize.
− - When is the next Grand Cup?
− - The next Grand Cup is planned for Spring 2026. No official dates have been announced yet. Follow Tradeify on social media and join our Discord (discord.gg/tradeify) for official announcements.
− Tradeify Crypto:
− - What is Tradeify Crypto?
− - Tradeify Crypto is a separate prop trading product from Tradeify that lets you trade cryptocurrency instead of futures. It uses the DXTrade platform (not Tradovate), offers 100+ crypto pairs (BTC, ETH, SOL, and more), up to 5x leverage, 24/7 trading, and an 80% profit split. It has its own dashboard, accounts, and support team - completely separate from Futures Prop.
+ - Yes! The first Tradeify Grand Cup ran from November 2 to December 12, 2025, and Grand Cup 2 ended in June 2026. It featured a $1,000,000 prize pool, 400 prizes, and culminated in LIVE Grand Finals where traders competed for the $200,000 Grand Champion prize.
+ - Is the Grand Cup running now?
+ - No. Grand Cup is not currently running and no new dates have been announced. Follow Tradeify on social media and join our Discord (discord.gg/tradeify) for official announcements.
+ Tradeify 247:
+ - What is Tradeify 247?
+ - Tradeify 247 (formerly Tradeify Crypto) is a separate prop trading brand for markets that trade around the clock, such as crypto. It has its own platforms, dashboard, accounts, rules, and support team - completely separate from Tradeify Futures.
- Can I use my Futures Prop account to trade crypto?
Section: Tradeify 247:
− - No. Futures Prop and Crypto Prop are completely separate products. They have separate dashboards, separate accounts, separate trading platforms (Tradovate vs DXTrade), and separate support teams. You cannot trade crypto on a Futures Prop account.
− - Do the same trading rules apply to Crypto Prop?
− - No. Crypto Prop has its own set of rules including different drawdown percentages, profit targets, and payout policies. The rules are different from Futures Prop. Visit help.tradeifycrypto.co for Crypto Prop rules and documentation.
− - Where do I sign up for Tradeify Crypto or learn more?
− - Visit tradeifycrypto.com to learn more, view pricing, and sign up. For the Crypto Help Center and support articles, visit help.tradeifycrypto.co.
+ - No. Tradeify Futures and Tradeify 247 are completely separate products. They have separate dashboards, separate accounts, separate trading platforms, and separate support teams. You cannot trade crypto on a Futures Prop account.
+ - Do the same trading rules apply to Tradeify 247?
+ - No. Tradeify 247 has its own rules, including different drawdown, profit targets, and payout policies. Visit help.tradeify247.co for Tradeify 247 rules and documentation.
+ - Where do I sign up for Tradeify 247 or learn more?
+ - Visit tradeify247.co to learn more, view pricing, and sign up. For the Tradeify 247 Help Center, visit help.tradeify247.co.
PremierTradeify · Essential Trading Rules Overview | Tradeify Help CenterGrowth Evaluation daily loss limit now includes $25k account tier ($600); trailing drawdown example clarified as sim funded only; Lightning $150k daily loss limit reduced from $3,750 to $3,000; Select funded accounts now scale positions; payout requests now require 50%+ trades...Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Core Trading Rules by Account Type:
Evaluation Accounts (Growth and Select)
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Evaluation: No daily loss limit
Section: Daily Loss Limits
− - Growth Evaluation: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Drawdown Protection Types
What is a Trailing Drawdown? Understanding a trailing drawdown involves knowing it as a dynamic loss limit mechanism. It calculates maximum allowable losses "trailing" or adjusting with your account's peak value, integrating into Tradeify's risk management strategy.
A trailing drawdown is your account's maximum permissible loss limit. The limit trails your highest end-of-day balance (the high water mark) and only moves up, never down. It is enforced in real time against your net liquidation value, which includes unrealized P&L on open positions - breaching this limit even momentarily results in account failure, reinforcing disciplined trading practices.
All Evaluation Accounts - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Section: Drawdown Protection Types
− - Example: A Growth account with a $2,000 trailing drawdown locks its floor at $50,100 once its end-of-day balance reaches $52,100.
Simulated Funded Accounts
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Flex: No daily loss limit
- Select Daily: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,000 for $50k, $1,250 for $100k, $1,750 for $150k)
- Growth Accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Section: Daily Loss Limits
− - Lightning accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
- Note: 25k Lightning funded does not have Daily Loss Limit protection.
Drawdown Types:
All Funded Accounts (Select, Growth, Lightning) - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Lightning Funded Specifics:
- Lightning accounts only apply the EOD trailing drawdown, ensuring threshold adjustments align strictly with end-of-day balances.
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Section: Position Scaling
− - No scaling restrictions - Use your maximum position size from day one
- Full limits available immediately - No need to build up gradually
Prohibited Activities
- Hedging: Not allowed — this includes opposing positions on correlated products and positions held across multiple accounts. See Rules: Hedging & Correlated Products.
- Exploiting Platform Errors: Strictly forbidden
- HFT Bots: High-frequency trading bots not allowed
Algorithmic Trading
Allowed if:
- You own the strategy exclusively
- Not shared with other traders/firms
- Not high-frequency trading
- Can prove ownership if requested
Microscalping Guidelines
- Over 50% of your trades AND profits must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds
- Applies to funded accounts only, not evaluations. If you do not meet these two criteria you won't be able to request a payout.
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
Section: Payout Eligibility Rules
− - The trade can be as brief as 5 seconds as long as it satisfies the minimum activity requirement.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Growth: 35% limit
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
− Lightning Funded: 20% limit
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Section: News Trading Policy
− Restrictions: Specific rules around major economic events
Details: See full news trading policy for complete guidelines
Need Clarification?
Have questions about specific rules?
- Check our detailed rule articles
- Ask in our Discord community
- Contact support for clarification
Remember: These rules exist to help you become a consistently profitable trader. Following them closely will set you up for long-term success with Tradeify!
Detailed Rule Articles:
- Consistency Rule Details
- Trailing Max Drawdowns
- Daily Loss Limits
- News Trading Policy
After
Core Trading Rules by Account Type:
Evaluation Accounts (Growth and Select)
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Evaluation: No daily loss limit
Section: Daily Loss Limits
+ - Growth Evaluation: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($600 for $25k, $1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Drawdown Protection Types
What is a Trailing Drawdown? Understanding a trailing drawdown involves knowing it as a dynamic loss limit mechanism. It calculates maximum allowable losses "trailing" or adjusting with your account's peak value, integrating into Tradeify's risk management strategy.
A trailing drawdown is your account's maximum permissible loss limit. The limit trails your highest end-of-day balance (the high water mark) and only moves up, never down. It is enforced in real time against your net liquidation value, which includes unrealized P&L on open positions - breaching this limit even momentarily results in account failure, reinforcing disciplined trading practices.
All Evaluation Accounts - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Section: Drawdown Protection Types
+ - Example (Sim Funded only): A 50K Growth funded account with a $2,000 trailing drawdown locks its floor at $50,100 once its end-of-day balance reaches $52,100. Drawdown never locks on evaluation accounts.
Simulated Funded Accounts
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Flex: No daily loss limit
- Select Daily: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,000 for $50k, $1,250 for $100k, $1,750 for $150k)
- Growth Accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Section: Daily Loss Limits
+ - Lightning accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,000 for $150k; none for $25k)
- Note: 25k Lightning funded does not have Daily Loss Limit protection.
Drawdown Types:
All Funded Accounts (Select, Growth, Lightning) - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Lightning Funded Specifics:
- Lightning accounts only apply the EOD trailing drawdown, ensuring threshold adjustments align strictly with end-of-day balances.
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Section: Position Scaling
+ - Scaling - Growth and Lightning use their maximum position size from day one; Select funded accounts scale up as the account grows
- Full limits available immediately - No need to build up gradually
Prohibited Activities
- Hedging: Not allowed — this includes opposing positions on correlated products and positions held across multiple accounts. See Rules: Hedging & Correlated Products.
- Exploiting Platform Errors: Strictly forbidden
- HFT Bots: High-frequency trading bots not allowed
Algorithmic Trading
Allowed if:
- You own the strategy exclusively
- Not shared with other traders/firms
- Not high-frequency trading
- Can prove ownership if requested
Microscalping Guidelines
- Over 50% of your trades AND profits must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds
- Applies to funded accounts only, not evaluations. If you do not meet these two criteria you won't be able to request a payout.
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
Section: Payout Eligibility Rules
+ - On funded accounts, payout requests require over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Growth: 35% limit
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
+ Lightning Funded: 20% for the first payout, 25% for the second, 30% from the third (accounts bought after September 12, 2025)
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Section: News Trading Policy
+ Restrictions: None - news trading is allowed on all accounts
Details: See full news trading policy for complete guidelines
Need Clarification?
Have questions about specific rules?
- Check our detailed rule articles
- Ask in our Discord community
- Contact support for clarification
Remember: These rules exist to help you become a consistently profitable trader. Following them closely will set you up for long-term success with Tradeify!
Detailed Rule Articles:
- Consistency Rule Details
- Trailing Max Drawdowns
- Daily Loss Limits
- News Trading Policy
Core Trading Rules by Account Type:
Evaluation Accounts (Growth and Select)
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Evaluation: No daily loss limit
Section: Daily Loss Limits
− - Growth Evaluation: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
+ - Growth Evaluation: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($600 for $25k, $1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Drawdown Protection Types
What is a Trailing Drawdown? Understanding a trailing drawdown involves knowing it as a dynamic loss limit mechanism. It calculates maximum allowable losses "trailing" or adjusting with your account's peak value, integrating into Tradeify's risk management strategy.
A trailing drawdown is your account's maximum permissible loss limit. The limit trails your highest end-of-day balance (the high water mark) and only moves up, never down. It is enforced in real time against your net liquidation value, which includes unrealized P&L on open positions - breaching this limit even momentarily results in account failure, reinforcing disciplined trading practices.
All Evaluation Accounts - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Section: Drawdown Protection Types
− - Example: A Growth account with a $2,000 trailing drawdown locks its floor at $50,100 once its end-of-day balance reaches $52,100.
+ - Example (Sim Funded only): A 50K Growth funded account with a $2,000 trailing drawdown locks its floor at $50,100 once its end-of-day balance reaches $52,100. Drawdown never locks on evaluation accounts.
Simulated Funded Accounts
Daily Loss Limits
- Select Flex: No daily loss limit
- Select Daily: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,000 for $50k, $1,250 for $100k, $1,750 for $150k)
- Growth Accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
Section: Daily Loss Limits
− - Lightning accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,750 for $150k)
+ - Lightning accounts: Daily loss limit varies by account size ($1,250 for $50k, $2,500 for $100k, $3,000 for $150k; none for $25k)
- Note: 25k Lightning funded does not have Daily Loss Limit protection.
Drawdown Types:
All Funded Accounts (Select, Growth, Lightning) - End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown:
- Recalculates only at market close based on your final daily balance
- Only locks in drawdown improvements when you end the day profitable
- Provides flexibility during the trading day - temporary intraday losses do not move your drawdown limit. The limit itself is still enforced in real time, and touching it fails the account immediately
Lightning Funded Specifics:
- Lightning accounts only apply the EOD trailing drawdown, ensuring threshold adjustments align strictly with end-of-day balances.
Universal Rules (All Account Types)
Position Holding Requirements
All positions must be closed before the market closes each day. No swing trading or holding positions overnight is allowed.
Daily Close Requirements
Important: If you trade during different market sessions on the same calendar day (for example, at 1:00 AM and again at 7:00 PM), these count as two separate trading days for rule compliance purposes.
Position Limits
Maximum Contract Limits
Account Size | Mini Contracts | Micro Equivalent
$25k | 1 contract | 10 micros
$50k | 4 contracts | 40 micros
$100k | 8 contracts | 80 micros
$150k | 12 contracts | 120 micros
Contract Size Conversion
- 10 Micro contracts = 1 Mini contract
- You can hold minis and micros at the same time. Your combined position must stay within your account's contract limit, counted at this 10:1 ratio.
Position Scaling
Section: Position Scaling
− - No scaling restrictions - Use your maximum position size from day one
+ - Scaling - Growth and Lightning use their maximum position size from day one; Select funded accounts scale up as the account grows
- Full limits available immediately - No need to build up gradually
Prohibited Activities
- Hedging: Not allowed — this includes opposing positions on correlated products and positions held across multiple accounts. See Rules: Hedging & Correlated Products.
- Exploiting Platform Errors: Strictly forbidden
- HFT Bots: High-frequency trading bots not allowed
Algorithmic Trading
Allowed if:
- You own the strategy exclusively
- Not shared with other traders/firms
- Not high-frequency trading
- Can prove ownership if requested
Microscalping Guidelines
- Over 50% of your trades AND profits must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds
- Applies to funded accounts only, not evaluations. If you do not meet these two criteria you won't be able to request a payout.
Payout Eligibility Rules
Payout trading day requirements vary by account type:
- Select Daily: Daily payouts available (no minimum trading days between requests)
- Select Flex: 5 winning trading days required per payout cycle
- Growth: 5 profitable trading days required per payout cycle
- Lightning: No minimum trading day requirement
- Minimum Activity: At least 1 trade per week (Monday-Friday) — applies to both evaluation and funded accounts
Section: Payout Eligibility Rules
− - The trade can be as brief as 5 seconds as long as it satisfies the minimum activity requirement.
+ - On funded accounts, payout requests require over 50% of trades held longer than 10 seconds and over 50% of profit from those trades.
- Idle Time Warning: We'll contact you before taking action.
Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
What it means: No single day's profit should be too large compared to your total profits.
Select Evaluation: 40% limit (during evaluation phase only)
Growth: 35% limit
Section: Consistency Rule Quick Guide:
− Lightning Funded: 20% limit
+ Lightning Funded: 20% for the first payout, 25% for the second, 30% from the third (accounts bought after September 12, 2025)
Example: If your biggest day was $2,000 profit and you follow the 20% rule, you need at least $10,000 total profit to be eligible for payouts.
Good Faith Trading
Core Principle: Trade honestly and don't exploit platform errors.
Violations Include:
- Taking advantage of price display errors
- Exploiting system delays
- Any strategy designed to create platform errors
Consequences: Account termination for violations
News Trading Policy
Allowed: Yes, but at your own risk.
Section: News Trading Policy
− Restrictions: Specific rules around major economic events
+ Restrictions: None - news trading is allowed on all accounts
Details: See full news trading policy for complete guidelines
Need Clarification?
Have questions about specific rules?
- Check our detailed rule articles
- Ask in our Discord community
- Contact support for clarification
Remember: These rules exist to help you become a consistently profitable trader. Following them closely will set you up for long-term success with Tradeify!
Detailed Rule Articles:
- Consistency Rule Details
- Trailing Max Drawdowns
- Daily Loss Limits
- News Trading Policy
PremierTradeify · Which Plan is Right for You? | Tradeify Help CenterOne-time purchase prices increased across evaluation tiers, news trading restriction removed, and profit targets adjusted for some account sizes.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Choosing the right account type depends on several key factors: your preferred drawdown tracking method, budget considerations, trading timeline, and risk tolerance. Let's break down each option to help you make a decision.
SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation | Lightning Funded
One-time purchase | One-time purchase | One-time payment
No activation fee | No activation fee | N/A
End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown
No Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit
Can purchase a reset if failed | Can purchase a reset if failed | No resets - replacement only
You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | Immediate funding - skip the evaluation stage
Detailed Account Breakdown
SELECT Evaluation
Best for: Traders who want a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options
Pricing & Costs:
Section: SELECT Evaluation
− - One-time purchase: $95 - $215 (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: Transition to funded account is seamless with no additional costs
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Funded in 3 days: Fast path to funded trading after passing evaluation
Trading Features:
- End of Day trailing drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- No daily loss limits during evaluation
- 40% consistency requirement (encourages stable performance)
− - Tier 1 news trading allowed
- $1,500, $3,000, $6,000, $9,000, $14,000 Profit target to pass the evaluation (25K, 50K, 100K, 150K, 300K accounts)
- Choose your payout policy after passing: Select Flex (5-Day) or Select Daily
Growth Evaluation
Best for: Traders who prefer more flexibility during the trading day with end-of-day risk assessment
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Growth Evaluation
− - One-time purchase: $99 - $349 (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: (transition to a sim funded account is seamless)
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Lower cost but has Daily Loss Limit
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Daily loss limits apply
- End-of-day realized P&L tracking
- More flexibility during trading hours
− - $3000, $6000, $9000 Profit target to pass the Evaluation
Lightning Funded
Best for: Proven traders who want immediate funding who want to skip the evaluation phase
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Lightning Funded
− - One-time payment: $349 - $729 (no recurring fees)
- No monthly subscriptions or hidden fees
- No resets available - must purchase replacement if account fails
- Most cost-effective for long-term successful traders
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Immediate access to funded account
- Skip the evaluation phase entirely
- Daily loss limits apply
- Profit Goals to achieve payouts
- Progressive consistency required for payouts: 20% (first payout) → 25% (second) → 30% (third+)
Drawdown Types for Each Account Type Explained
SELECT Evaluation Features
How it works: Unified evaluation with End of Day drawdown and no daily loss limits, giving you flexibility to choose your funded strategy after passing.
Advantages:
- No activation fees - start immediately after purchasing
- End of Day drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- Choose your payout policy after proving your skills (5-Day Flex or Daily)
- 40% consistency requirement builds sustainable trading habits
- Funded in 3 days after passing
Considerations:
Section: SELECT Evaluation Features
− - One-time purchase cost ($95-$215)
- 40% consistency requirement during evaluation
- Your payout policy choice is permanent once selected
End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown (SELECT, Growth & Lightning Funded)
How it works: Your drawdown limit adjusts only at the end of the trading day based on your highest balance.
Advantages:
- Greater flexibility during trading hours
- Temporary intraday losses do not move the drawdown limit (the limit is still enforced in real time)
- Growth: No activation fee
Considerations:
- Daily loss limits apply
- Growth: Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL)
- Lightning Funded: If you fail the account, you need to replace it with a new one
After
Choosing the right account type depends on several key factors: your preferred drawdown tracking method, budget considerations, trading timeline, and risk tolerance. Let's break down each option to help you make a decision.
SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation | Lightning Funded
One-time purchase | One-time purchase | One-time payment
No activation fee | No activation fee | N/A
End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown
No Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit
Can purchase a reset if failed | Can purchase a reset if failed | No resets - replacement only
You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | Immediate funding - skip the evaluation stage
Detailed Account Breakdown
SELECT Evaluation
Best for: Traders who want a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options
Pricing & Costs:
Section: SELECT Evaluation
+ - One-time purchase: $109 - $369, or $349 for the 300K (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: Transition to funded account is seamless with no additional costs
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Funded in 3 days: Fast path to funded trading after passing evaluation
Trading Features:
- End of Day trailing drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- No daily loss limits during evaluation
- 40% consistency requirement (encourages stable performance)
+ - News trading allowed
- $1,500, $3,000, $6,000, $9,000, $14,000 Profit target to pass the evaluation (25K, 50K, 100K, 150K, 300K accounts)
- Choose your payout policy after passing: Select Flex (5-Day) or Select Daily
Growth Evaluation
Best for: Traders who prefer more flexibility during the trading day with end-of-day risk assessment
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Growth Evaluation
+ - One-time purchase: $99 - $369 (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: (transition to a sim funded account is seamless)
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Lower cost but has Daily Loss Limit
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Daily loss limits apply
- End-of-day realized P&L tracking
- More flexibility during trading hours
+ - $1,500, $3,000, $6,000, $9,000 profit target (25K, 50K, 100K, 150K) to pass the Evaluation
Lightning Funded
Best for: Proven traders who want immediate funding who want to skip the evaluation phase
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Lightning Funded
+ - One-time payment: $345 - $796 (no recurring fees)
- No monthly subscriptions or hidden fees
- No resets available - must purchase replacement if account fails
- Most cost-effective for long-term successful traders
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Immediate access to funded account
- Skip the evaluation phase entirely
- Daily loss limits apply
- Profit Goals to achieve payouts
- Progressive consistency required for payouts: 20% (first payout) → 25% (second) → 30% (third+)
Drawdown Types for Each Account Type Explained
SELECT Evaluation Features
How it works: Unified evaluation with End of Day drawdown and no daily loss limits, giving you flexibility to choose your funded strategy after passing.
Advantages:
- No activation fees - start immediately after purchasing
- End of Day drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- Choose your payout policy after proving your skills (5-Day Flex or Daily)
- 40% consistency requirement builds sustainable trading habits
- Funded in 3 days after passing
Considerations:
Section: SELECT Evaluation Features
+ - One-time purchase cost ($109-$369)
- 40% consistency requirement during evaluation
- Your payout policy choice is permanent once selected
End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown (SELECT, Growth & Lightning Funded)
How it works: Your drawdown limit adjusts only at the end of the trading day based on your highest balance.
Advantages:
- Greater flexibility during trading hours
- Temporary intraday losses do not move the drawdown limit (the limit is still enforced in real time)
- Growth: No activation fee
Considerations:
- Daily loss limits apply
- Growth: Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL)
- Lightning Funded: If you fail the account, you need to replace it with a new one
Choosing the right account type depends on several key factors: your preferred drawdown tracking method, budget considerations, trading timeline, and risk tolerance. Let's break down each option to help you make a decision.
SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation | Lightning Funded
One-time purchase | One-time purchase | One-time payment
No activation fee | No activation fee | N/A
End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown | End of Day Drawdown
No Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit | Daily Loss Limit
Can purchase a reset if failed | Can purchase a reset if failed | No resets - replacement only
You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | You need to pass an evaluation before getting to funded stage | Immediate funding - skip the evaluation stage
Detailed Account Breakdown
SELECT Evaluation
Best for: Traders who want a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options
Pricing & Costs:
Section: SELECT Evaluation
− - One-time purchase: $95 - $215 (no recurring fees)
+ - One-time purchase: $109 - $369, or $349 for the 300K (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: Transition to funded account is seamless with no additional costs
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Funded in 3 days: Fast path to funded trading after passing evaluation
Trading Features:
- End of Day trailing drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- No daily loss limits during evaluation
- 40% consistency requirement (encourages stable performance)
− - Tier 1 news trading allowed
+ - News trading allowed
- $1,500, $3,000, $6,000, $9,000, $14,000 Profit target to pass the evaluation (25K, 50K, 100K, 150K, 300K accounts)
- Choose your payout policy after passing: Select Flex (5-Day) or Select Daily
Growth Evaluation
Best for: Traders who prefer more flexibility during the trading day with end-of-day risk assessment
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Growth Evaluation
− - One-time purchase: $99 - $349 (no recurring fees)
+ - One-time purchase: $99 - $369 (no recurring fees)
- No activation fee: (transition to a sim funded account is seamless)
- Failed account: Can purchase a reset to try again
- Lower cost but has Daily Loss Limit
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Daily loss limits apply
- End-of-day realized P&L tracking
- More flexibility during trading hours
− - $3000, $6000, $9000 Profit target to pass the Evaluation
+ - $1,500, $3,000, $6,000, $9,000 profit target (25K, 50K, 100K, 150K) to pass the Evaluation
Lightning Funded
Best for: Proven traders who want immediate funding who want to skip the evaluation phase
Pricing & Costs:
Section: Lightning Funded
− - One-time payment: $349 - $729 (no recurring fees)
+ - One-time payment: $345 - $796 (no recurring fees)
- No monthly subscriptions or hidden fees
- No resets available - must purchase replacement if account fails
- Most cost-effective for long-term successful traders
Trading Features:
- End-of-day trailing drawdown
- Immediate access to funded account
- Skip the evaluation phase entirely
- Daily loss limits apply
- Profit Goals to achieve payouts
- Progressive consistency required for payouts: 20% (first payout) → 25% (second) → 30% (third+)
Drawdown Types for Each Account Type Explained
SELECT Evaluation Features
How it works: Unified evaluation with End of Day drawdown and no daily loss limits, giving you flexibility to choose your funded strategy after passing.
Advantages:
- No activation fees - start immediately after purchasing
- End of Day drawdown - the limit only updates at the end of the day, but is still enforced in real time
- Choose your payout policy after proving your skills (5-Day Flex or Daily)
- 40% consistency requirement builds sustainable trading habits
- Funded in 3 days after passing
Considerations:
Section: SELECT Evaluation Features
− - One-time purchase cost ($95-$215)
+ - One-time purchase cost ($109-$369)
- 40% consistency requirement during evaluation
- Your payout policy choice is permanent once selected
End-of-Day Trailing Drawdown (SELECT, Growth & Lightning Funded)
How it works: Your drawdown limit adjusts only at the end of the trading day based on your highest balance.
Advantages:
- Greater flexibility during trading hours
- Temporary intraday losses do not move the drawdown limit (the limit is still enforced in real time)
- Growth: No activation fee
Considerations:
- Daily loss limits apply
- Growth: Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL)
- Lightning Funded: If you fail the account, you need to replace it with a new one
PremierTradeify · Welcome to Tradeify | Tradeify Help CenterLightning Funded one-time payment range changed from $349-$729 to $345-$796, evaluation accounts now include $300k option, and payout eligibility clarified.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Welcome to Tradeify, where we turn talented traders into funded professionals. Whether you're new to funded trading or experienced with other firms, this guide will help you understand our platform and get started on your journey to consistent profitability.
What is Tradeify?
Section: What is Tradeify?
− Tradeify is a proprietary trading firm that provides capital to skilled traders. We offer two main pathways: traders can purchase evaluation accounts to prove their skills and advance to funded accounts, or skip the evaluation entirely with Lightning Funded accounts. During both evaluation and sim funded stages, you can earn real payouts while trading with simulated capital before potentially advancing to live funded accounts.
Your Trading Journey with Tradeify
Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
First, review and understand our trading rules, then select the path that fits your style:
Select Evaluation Accounts
- No daily loss limit, EOD trailing drawdown
- 40% consistency rule (minimum 3 trading days to pass)
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Growth Evaluation Accounts
- End of Day drawdown (maximum trailing drawdown calculated at market close), better for traders trying to catch bigger moves
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Lightning Funded Accounts
- Skip evaluation, start earning immediately
Section: Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
− - One-time payment: $349-$729
- No monthly fees, no resets available
Step 2: Complete Your Setup
- Select your Broker
- Receive login credentials and sign your Non-Professional Agreement to receive live market data
- Connect your preferred trading platform
- Join our Discord community for support
Step 3: Start Trading
- Begin trading according to your account rules
- Monitor performance through our dashboard
- Build consistency to qualify for payouts
- Work toward transitioning to live funded accounts
Supported Trading Platforms
What Makes Tradeify Different?
Multiple Funding Paths
Unlike firms with only one option, we offer three distinct routes to funding, allowing you to choose what fits your trading style and budget.
Real-Time Monitoring
You can monitor your balance, profit, daily loss limit, and consistency in real-time through the Tradeify dashboard, your central hub for account management and performance tracking. Your Trailing Max Drawdown is shown there too and updates once per day, at the end of each trading day.
Built-in Journal
Store your data, measure trading performance, track key performance indicators, and monitor the metrics that matter most.
Competitive Profit Splits
Earn 90% of your profits on simulated funded accounts, with opportunities to scale up to live trading.
Trader-Focused Support
Active Discord community, comprehensive help center, and dedicated support team to help you succeed.
Account Sizes Available
Section: Account Sizes Available
− Evaluation Accounts: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k (Growth & Select)
Lightning Funded: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Who is the owner/founder of Tradeify?
A: Brett Simberkoff is the founder and CEO of Tradeify. You can follow him on X (Twitter) at @BrettSimba.
Ready for the next step? Continue to Which Plan is Right for You?
After
Welcome to Tradeify, where we turn talented traders into funded professionals. Whether you're new to funded trading or experienced with other firms, this guide will help you understand our platform and get started on your journey to consistent profitability.
What is Tradeify?
Section: What is Tradeify?
+ Tradeify is a proprietary trading firm that provides capital to skilled traders. We offer two main pathways: traders can purchase evaluation accounts to prove their skills and advance to funded accounts, or skip the evaluation entirely with Lightning Funded accounts. Once you are sim funded, you can earn real payouts while trading with simulated capital, before potentially advancing to Elite Live. Evaluations do not pay out.
Your Trading Journey with Tradeify
Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
First, review and understand our trading rules, then select the path that fits your style:
Select Evaluation Accounts
- No daily loss limit, EOD trailing drawdown
- 40% consistency rule (minimum 3 trading days to pass)
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Growth Evaluation Accounts
- End of Day drawdown (maximum trailing drawdown calculated at market close), better for traders trying to catch bigger moves
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Lightning Funded Accounts
- Skip evaluation, start earning immediately
Section: Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
+ - One-time payment: $345-$796
- No monthly fees, no resets available
Step 2: Complete Your Setup
- Select your Broker
- Receive login credentials and sign your Non-Professional Agreement to receive live market data
- Connect your preferred trading platform
- Join our Discord community for support
Step 3: Start Trading
- Begin trading according to your account rules
- Monitor performance through our dashboard
- Build consistency to qualify for payouts
- Work toward transitioning to live funded accounts
Supported Trading Platforms
What Makes Tradeify Different?
Multiple Funding Paths
Unlike firms with only one option, we offer three distinct routes to funding, allowing you to choose what fits your trading style and budget.
Real-Time Monitoring
You can monitor your balance, profit, daily loss limit, and consistency in real-time through the Tradeify dashboard, your central hub for account management and performance tracking. Your Trailing Max Drawdown is shown there too and updates once per day, at the end of each trading day.
Built-in Journal
Store your data, measure trading performance, track key performance indicators, and monitor the metrics that matter most.
Competitive Profit Splits
Earn 90% of your profits on simulated funded accounts, with opportunities to scale up to live trading.
Trader-Focused Support
Active Discord community, comprehensive help center, and dedicated support team to help you succeed.
Account Sizes Available
Section: Account Sizes Available
+ Evaluation Accounts: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k (Growth & Select), plus $300k (Select, limited release)
Lightning Funded: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Who is the owner/founder of Tradeify?
A: Brett Simberkoff is the founder and CEO of Tradeify. You can follow him on X (Twitter) at @BrettSimba.
Ready for the next step? Continue to Which Plan is Right for You?
Welcome to Tradeify, where we turn talented traders into funded professionals. Whether you're new to funded trading or experienced with other firms, this guide will help you understand our platform and get started on your journey to consistent profitability.
What is Tradeify?
Section: What is Tradeify?
− Tradeify is a proprietary trading firm that provides capital to skilled traders. We offer two main pathways: traders can purchase evaluation accounts to prove their skills and advance to funded accounts, or skip the evaluation entirely with Lightning Funded accounts. During both evaluation and sim funded stages, you can earn real payouts while trading with simulated capital before potentially advancing to live funded accounts.
+ Tradeify is a proprietary trading firm that provides capital to skilled traders. We offer two main pathways: traders can purchase evaluation accounts to prove their skills and advance to funded accounts, or skip the evaluation entirely with Lightning Funded accounts. Once you are sim funded, you can earn real payouts while trading with simulated capital, before potentially advancing to Elite Live. Evaluations do not pay out.
Your Trading Journey with Tradeify
Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
First, review and understand our trading rules, then select the path that fits your style:
Select Evaluation Accounts
- No daily loss limit, EOD trailing drawdown
- 40% consistency rule (minimum 3 trading days to pass)
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Growth Evaluation Accounts
- End of Day drawdown (maximum trailing drawdown calculated at market close), better for traders trying to catch bigger moves
- One-time purchase, no activation fee
- Resets available
Lightning Funded Accounts
- Skip evaluation, start earning immediately
Section: Step 1: Review Trading Rules & Choose Your Account Type
− - One-time payment: $349-$729
+ - One-time payment: $345-$796
- No monthly fees, no resets available
Step 2: Complete Your Setup
- Select your Broker
- Receive login credentials and sign your Non-Professional Agreement to receive live market data
- Connect your preferred trading platform
- Join our Discord community for support
Step 3: Start Trading
- Begin trading according to your account rules
- Monitor performance through our dashboard
- Build consistency to qualify for payouts
- Work toward transitioning to live funded accounts
Supported Trading Platforms
What Makes Tradeify Different?
Multiple Funding Paths
Unlike firms with only one option, we offer three distinct routes to funding, allowing you to choose what fits your trading style and budget.
Real-Time Monitoring
You can monitor your balance, profit, daily loss limit, and consistency in real-time through the Tradeify dashboard, your central hub for account management and performance tracking. Your Trailing Max Drawdown is shown there too and updates once per day, at the end of each trading day.
Built-in Journal
Store your data, measure trading performance, track key performance indicators, and monitor the metrics that matter most.
Competitive Profit Splits
Earn 90% of your profits on simulated funded accounts, with opportunities to scale up to live trading.
Trader-Focused Support
Active Discord community, comprehensive help center, and dedicated support team to help you succeed.
Account Sizes Available
Section: Account Sizes Available
− Evaluation Accounts: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k (Growth & Select)
+ Evaluation Accounts: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k (Growth & Select), plus $300k (Select, limited release)
Lightning Funded: $25k, $50k, $100k, $150k
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Who is the owner/founder of Tradeify?
A: Brett Simberkoff is the founder and CEO of Tradeify. You can follow him on X (Twitter) at @BrettSimba.
Ready for the next step? Continue to Which Plan is Right for You?
PremierTradeify · Rules: Trailing Max Drawdowns | Tradeify Help Center$156,100 is now $155,350.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Day 2: End with $101,000 → Limit stays at $99,500 (only moves up, never down)
CRITICAL: Even though EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time against your net liquidation value (your balance plus unrealized P&L on any open positions). If your net liquidation value hits the drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately - even if you might have recovered by end of day.
Example - an intraday dip does NOT get undone by recovering:
- Starting balance: $25,000, Drawdown: $1,000, Floor: $24,000
- 10:15 AM: net liquidation value drops to $22,000 - $22,000 is BELOW the $24,000 floor, so the account FAILS the instant it touched $24,000
- Close: recovering to $25,500 changes nothing - the account was already failed and cannot be restored
When Does Drawdown Lock?
On Sim Funded accounts (not Evaluations), your drawdown locks in place once you profit beyond the drawdown amount by $100, or immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. After locking, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor that never moves up again.
Account Size | Growth | Lightning | Select Flex | Select Daily
25K | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100
50K | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100
100K | $103,600 | $104,100 | $103,100 | $102,600
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
− 150K | $155,100 | $156,100 | $154,600 | $153,600
The table shows the EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock. The lock can also trigger immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. Once locked, the drawdown floor becomes fixed at $100 above starting balance (e.g., $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K) and never moves up again.
Example: A 50K Growth account with $2,000 drawdown locks when EOD balance reaches $52,100. The drawdown floor becomes $50,100 and never moves up again. This same mechanism applies to all funded account types including Select Flex and Select Daily.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade aggressively during the day knowing EOD drawdown only updates at end of day?
A: No. While EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time. If your balance hits the current drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately.
Q: I dipped below my drawdown floor during the day but finished green - is my account still active?
A: No. The account failed at the moment your net liquidation value touched the floor. Recovering later in the day does not undo it - a drawdown breach is a hard breach with no recovery. For example, on a 25K account with a $24,000 floor, dropping to $22,000 during the day fails the account immediately, even if you close at $25,500.
Q: Does drawdown lock on Evaluation accounts?
A: No. Drawdown only locks on Sim Funded accounts. Evaluation accounts do not have drawdown locking.
Q: Can I recover from hitting my drawdown limit?
A: No. Hitting the Max Trailing Drawdown is a hard breach - your account fails permanently. This is different from the Daily Loss Limit which only pauses trading.
Q: How do I check my current drawdown limit?
After
- Day 2: End with $101,000 → Limit stays at $99,500 (only moves up, never down)
CRITICAL: Even though EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time against your net liquidation value (your balance plus unrealized P&L on any open positions). If your net liquidation value hits the drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately - even if you might have recovered by end of day.
Example - an intraday dip does NOT get undone by recovering:
- Starting balance: $25,000, Drawdown: $1,000, Floor: $24,000
- 10:15 AM: net liquidation value drops to $22,000 - $22,000 is BELOW the $24,000 floor, so the account FAILS the instant it touched $24,000
- Close: recovering to $25,500 changes nothing - the account was already failed and cannot be restored
When Does Drawdown Lock?
On Sim Funded accounts (not Evaluations), your drawdown locks in place once you profit beyond the drawdown amount by $100, or immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. After locking, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor that never moves up again.
Account Size | Growth | Lightning | Select Flex | Select Daily
25K | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100
50K | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100
100K | $103,600 | $104,100 | $103,100 | $102,600
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
+ 150K | $155,100 | $155,350 | $154,600 | $153,600
The table shows the EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock. The lock can also trigger immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. Once locked, the drawdown floor becomes fixed at $100 above starting balance (e.g., $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K) and never moves up again.
Example: A 50K Growth account with $2,000 drawdown locks when EOD balance reaches $52,100. The drawdown floor becomes $50,100 and never moves up again. This same mechanism applies to all funded account types including Select Flex and Select Daily.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade aggressively during the day knowing EOD drawdown only updates at end of day?
A: No. While EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time. If your balance hits the current drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately.
Q: I dipped below my drawdown floor during the day but finished green - is my account still active?
A: No. The account failed at the moment your net liquidation value touched the floor. Recovering later in the day does not undo it - a drawdown breach is a hard breach with no recovery. For example, on a 25K account with a $24,000 floor, dropping to $22,000 during the day fails the account immediately, even if you close at $25,500.
Q: Does drawdown lock on Evaluation accounts?
A: No. Drawdown only locks on Sim Funded accounts. Evaluation accounts do not have drawdown locking.
Q: Can I recover from hitting my drawdown limit?
A: No. Hitting the Max Trailing Drawdown is a hard breach - your account fails permanently. This is different from the Daily Loss Limit which only pauses trading.
Q: How do I check my current drawdown limit?
- Day 2: End with $101,000 → Limit stays at $99,500 (only moves up, never down)
CRITICAL: Even though EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time against your net liquidation value (your balance plus unrealized P&L on any open positions). If your net liquidation value hits the drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately - even if you might have recovered by end of day.
Example - an intraday dip does NOT get undone by recovering:
- Starting balance: $25,000, Drawdown: $1,000, Floor: $24,000
- 10:15 AM: net liquidation value drops to $22,000 - $22,000 is BELOW the $24,000 floor, so the account FAILS the instant it touched $24,000
- Close: recovering to $25,500 changes nothing - the account was already failed and cannot be restored
When Does Drawdown Lock?
On Sim Funded accounts (not Evaluations), your drawdown locks in place once you profit beyond the drawdown amount by $100, or immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. After locking, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor that never moves up again.
Account Size | Growth | Lightning | Select Flex | Select Daily
25K | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100 | $26,100
50K | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100 | $52,100
100K | $103,600 | $104,100 | $103,100 | $102,600
Section: When Does Drawdown Lock?
− 150K | $155,100 | $156,100 | $154,600 | $153,600
+ 150K | $155,100 | $155,350 | $154,600 | $153,600
The table shows the EOD balance required to trigger the drawdown lock. The lock can also trigger immediately when you request a payout - whichever comes first. Once locked, the drawdown floor becomes fixed at $100 above starting balance (e.g., $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K) and never moves up again.
Example: A 50K Growth account with $2,000 drawdown locks when EOD balance reaches $52,100. The drawdown floor becomes $50,100 and never moves up again. This same mechanism applies to all funded account types including Select Flex and Select Daily.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade aggressively during the day knowing EOD drawdown only updates at end of day?
A: No. While EOD drawdown only UPDATES at end of day, it is ENFORCED in real-time. If your balance hits the current drawdown limit during trading, your account fails immediately.
Q: I dipped below my drawdown floor during the day but finished green - is my account still active?
A: No. The account failed at the moment your net liquidation value touched the floor. Recovering later in the day does not undo it - a drawdown breach is a hard breach with no recovery. For example, on a 25K account with a $24,000 floor, dropping to $22,000 during the day fails the account immediately, even if you close at $25,500.
Q: Does drawdown lock on Evaluation accounts?
A: No. Drawdown only locks on Sim Funded accounts. Evaluation accounts do not have drawdown locking.
Q: Can I recover from hitting my drawdown limit?
A: No. Hitting the Max Trailing Drawdown is a hard breach - your account fails permanently. This is different from the Daily Loss Limit which only pauses trading.
Q: How do I check my current drawdown limit?
PremierTradeify · Rules: Supported Trading Products / Assets | Tradeify Help CenterAdded explanation of root symbols, month codes, year formats, and reference to contract selection guide.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT.
The full list is below, but you can also check Tradovate's website for more details.
MINI Equity Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Additional exchange subscriptions apply
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
After
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT.
The full list is below, but you can also check Tradovate's website for more details.
+ ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
MINI Equity Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Additional exchange subscriptions apply
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
We support instruments from the following exchanges: CME, COMEX, NYMEX, and CBOT.
The full list is below, but you can also check Tradovate's website for more details.
+ ℹ️ The symbols below are root symbols. Your trading platform adds a month code and year to each one. For example, MGCZ6 is the December 2026 E-Micro Gold (MGC) contract, and ESH7 is the March 2027 E-mini S&P 500 (ES) contract. On TradingView and TradeSea the full year is used instead (MGCZ2026). If the root symbol is listed here, that product is supported. See How to Select the Correct Trading Contract for the month codes and which contract month to trade.
MINI Equity Futures
Name | Symbol | Exchange
E-Mini Dow ($5) | YM | CBOT
E-Mini S&P 500 | ES | CME
E-Mini NASDAQ | NQ | CME
E-Mini Russell | RTY | CME
E-Mini S&P Midcap 400 | EMD | CME
Nikkei 225 (USD) | NKD | CME
EUREX Index Futures
Additional exchange subscriptions apply
Name | Symbol | Exchange
DAX Index | FDAX | EUREX
PremierTradeify · GROWTH™ Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterAdded weekly inactivity requirement: at least one trade per week or account closure risk after warning.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
Q: What's the difference between GROWTH™ and SELECT™ evaluation?
A: (1) GROWTH™ can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT™ requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) GROWTH™ HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT™ has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) GROWTH™ has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT™ lets you choose Flex or Daily AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article.
Q: Can I choose my payout policy on GROWTH™ like I can with SELECT™?
A: No. GROWTH™ accounts use a fixed payout structure. With SELECT™, you choose Flex (5-Day) or Daily payouts after passing. If you want that choice, consider SELECT™ evaluation instead.
Q: Is there a time limit to complete GROWTH™ evaluation?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: No. Your account stays active as long as you keep it active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. Take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
After
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
Q: What's the difference between GROWTH™ and SELECT™ evaluation?
A: (1) GROWTH™ can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT™ requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) GROWTH™ HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT™ has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) GROWTH™ has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT™ lets you choose Flex or Daily AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article.
Q: Can I choose my payout policy on GROWTH™ like I can with SELECT™?
A: No. GROWTH™ accounts use a fixed payout structure. With SELECT™, you choose Flex (5-Day) or Daily payouts after passing. If you want that choice, consider SELECT™ evaluation instead.
Q: Is there a time limit to complete GROWTH™ evaluation?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: No. There is no deadline to hit the profit target, as long as you don't breach the trailing drawdown. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
Q: What's the difference between GROWTH™ and SELECT™ evaluation?
A: (1) GROWTH™ can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT™ requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) GROWTH™ HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT™ has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) GROWTH™ has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT™ lets you choose Flex or Daily AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article.
Q: Can I choose my payout policy on GROWTH™ like I can with SELECT™?
A: No. GROWTH™ accounts use a fixed payout structure. With SELECT™, you choose Flex (5-Day) or Daily payouts after passing. If you want that choice, consider SELECT™ evaluation instead.
Q: Is there a time limit to complete GROWTH™ evaluation?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: No. Your account stays active as long as you keep it active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. Take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
+ A: No. There is no deadline to hit the profit target, as long as you don't breach the trailing drawdown. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterAdded requirement that evaluation accounts must have at least one trade per week or face closure after inactivity warning.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you meet your profit target and pass the Evaluation, you will need to wait until the dashboard updates between 5PM and 8 PM EST.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires. If you had an active subscription from before Tradeify 3.0, that subscription remains active until you cancel it — no new subscriptions are available.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Do I get reset credits upon renewal?
A: If the evaluation is NOT failed then the account will not reset and you will not get a reset credit.
After
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you meet your profit target and pass the Evaluation, you will need to wait until the dashboard updates between 5PM and 8 PM EST.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires. If you had an active subscription from before Tradeify 3.0, that subscription remains active until you cancel it — no new subscriptions are available.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Do I get reset credits upon renewal?
A: If the evaluation is NOT failed then the account will not reset and you will not get a reset credit.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Is there a time limit for evaluations?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation.
+ A: There is no time limit to complete a Growth or Select Evaluation. However, the weekly inactivity rule still applies to evaluations: you must place at least one trade per week (Monday through Friday) on each evaluation account, or the account can be closed for inactivity after an email warning.
Q: How long does it take for my account to become active after purchase?
A: Accounts activate instantly after purchase - you'll receive login credentials via email and can start trading right away. However, if you purchase during the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window, your account activation may be delayed until reconciliation completes (usually within 1-2 hours). This is rare but can happen if your payment processes during this window.
Q: How do I get funded after passing an evaluation?
A: Once you meet your profit target and pass the Evaluation, you will need to wait until the dashboard updates between 5PM and 8 PM EST.
Q: Do I get a completion certificate when I pass an evaluation?
A: Completion certificates are not currently available, but we're working on adding this feature soon! For now, your achievement is reflected in your funded account status - once you pass, you can activate your Sim Funded account from the dashboard and begin trading for real payouts.
Q: Are Tradeify accounts one-time purchases or subscriptions?
A: All Tradeify accounts (Evaluations, Lightning Funded, etc.) are one-time purchases. There are no recurring charges or subscription fees. You pay once and your account remains active until you either pass, fail, or the account expires. If you had an active subscription from before Tradeify 3.0, that subscription remains active until you cancel it — no new subscriptions are available.
Q: Can I change my email address?
A: No, email changes are generally not permitted. Your email address is tied to your account identity, trading history, and payout verification. In rare circumstances, our compliance department may consider a request. If you believe you have a valid reason for an email change, please ask to speak with a support agent for a review.
Q: Do I get reset credits upon renewal?
A: If the evaluation is NOT failed then the account will not reset and you will not get a reset credit.
PremierTradeify · Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks | Tradeify Help CenterArticle updated today; new section added explaining how to sell unwanted prizes for partial Gems refund within 24 hours.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Getting Started
- General FAQ
- Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Tradeify Rewards Center rewards guide: earn XP and Gems from missions, level up to 50, open TradePacks in the Shop, redeem Vault prize codes, plus leaderboard, seasons, limits and FAQs.
Section: Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
− Updated over 3 weeks ago
Table of contents
The Rewards Center is Tradeify's rewards program. Trading, journaling, passing evaluations, taking payouts, and taking part in the community earn you two things: XP, which raises your level and your leaderboard rank, and Gems, which you spend in the Shop to open TradePacks and win prizes such as discount codes, evaluation credits, and account resets.
In short:
- Missions pay XP, which raises your level and leaderboard rank and is never spent, and Gems, which you spend.
- Gems buy TradePacks in the Shop. Every pack you open awards one random prize card.
- Prizes land in your Vault as codes you redeem at checkout on the Tradeify site.
- Your first pack is effectively free: setting your leaderboard name pays 2,000 Gems, exactly the price of a Paper Pack.
- Gems, XP, and prizes belong to your Tradeify user account, not to any single trading account, and they do not expire.
The sidebar link reads Rewards Center and the page header reads Rewards Center. Both names refer to the same page.
⚠️ Before you start
- Gems have no cash value. Gems cannot be bought, sold, given to another trader, or withdrawn. They exist only to open TradePacks inside the Rewards Center.
- TradePacks are a game of chance. Odds are published for every pack, each open is independent, there is no pity timer and no guaranteed prize after a number of opens, and a pack open cannot be reversed or refunded.
When missions credit
Missions credit at six different times, and every mission card states which one applies to it:
- Instant. Profile, leaderboard name, Discord connect, social follows, the daily journal note, and sharing your trader card. The card reads "Credited the moment you complete it."
- Within a few minutes. The Discord activity mission, counted by the community bot.
- After the trading day closes. In the Game is counted from your daily trade summary once the trading day closes, usually by 23:45 UTC. Green Print and Win Streak need the day's P&L to be final, so they count after midnight UTC, usually by 00:15 UTC. If you close a trade at lunchtime and check the mission an hour later, it has not been counted yet.
- Within about half an hour. Milestone events — evaluation passes, approved payouts, Live promotions, a 150K funding — credit within an hour of the event reaching your account data, usually about 30 minutes.
- After a manual check. The social sharing mission pays from a link to your post and is verified by the team before it credits.
- Settled at the end of the month. The monthly missions (Top 100, Top 10, King of the Hill, Hold the Line) are decided from the final standings once the month closes in UTC, and settle usually within 15 minutes of the close — in practice, right at the start of the first day of the new month. They show as pending all month until then.
Rewards earned during end-of-day reconciliation: Tradeify's reconciliation process runs roughly 5:00 PM to 6:00 PM ET. A reward that lands in that window can take up to an hour to become claimable. Nothing is lost — wait an hour and check again.
Claiming your rewards
Some missions credit the reward straight into your balance. Others hold it until you press Claim on the mission card. Anything waiting to be claimed also appears in the dropdown under the level and Gems pill in the dashboard header.
Unclaimed rewards are never lost. They stay there until you claim them.
Section: Selling a prize you don’t want
Reward not showing? Check in this order
- Have you accepted the Rewards Center Terms & Conditions? Nothing pays out or spends until you have, and the prompt returns whenever the terms change.
- Is it a trading mission? Those count Tradovate accounts only, and the mission card says so. Rithmic and WealthCharts trades do not count yet.
- Has the trading day closed? Trading missions cannot be counted before your daily trade summary exists.
- Is it a milestone? Evaluation passes, payouts, promotions, and allocations credit within about half an hour of the event reaching your account data — and events from before the program launched do not count at all.
- Is it just waiting to be claimed? Open the level and Gems pill in the header; anything owed to you is listed there.
If all five check out and a full day has passed since the close, contact support from your trader dashboard.
The Shop and TradePacks
The Shop is where you spend Gems. Each TradePack costs a fixed number of Gems and awards one card, which is a random prize drawn from that pack's published prize pool.
There are five TradePacks:
Pack | Cost | Notes
Paper | 2,000 Gems | Entry pack — discounts and merch credit, with a small chance at an evaluation
After
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Getting Started
- General FAQ
- Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Tradeify Rewards Center rewards guide: earn XP and Gems from missions, level up to 50, open TradePacks in the Shop, redeem Vault prize codes, plus leaderboard, seasons, limits and FAQs.
Section: Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
+ Updated today
Table of contents
The Rewards Center is Tradeify's rewards program. Trading, journaling, passing evaluations, taking payouts, and taking part in the community earn you two things: XP, which raises your level and your leaderboard rank, and Gems, which you spend in the Shop to open TradePacks and win prizes such as discount codes, evaluation credits, and account resets.
In short:
- Missions pay XP, which raises your level and leaderboard rank and is never spent, and Gems, which you spend.
- Gems buy TradePacks in the Shop. Every pack you open awards one random prize card.
- Prizes land in your Vault as codes you redeem at checkout on the Tradeify site.
- Your first pack is effectively free: setting your leaderboard name pays 2,000 Gems, exactly the price of a Paper Pack.
- Gems, XP, and prizes belong to your Tradeify user account, not to any single trading account, and they do not expire.
The sidebar link reads Rewards Center and the page header reads Rewards Center. Both names refer to the same page.
⚠️ Before you start
- Gems have no cash value. Gems cannot be bought, sold, given to another trader, or withdrawn. They exist only to open TradePacks inside the Rewards Center.
- TradePacks are a game of chance. Odds are published for every pack, each open is independent, there is no pity timer and no guaranteed prize after a number of opens, and a pack open cannot be reversed or refunded.
When missions credit
Missions credit at six different times, and every mission card states which one applies to it:
- Instant. Profile, leaderboard name, Discord connect, social follows, the daily journal note, and sharing your trader card. The card reads "Credited the moment you complete it."
- Within a few minutes. The Discord activity mission, counted by the community bot.
- After the trading day closes. In the Game is counted from your daily trade summary once the trading day closes, usually by 23:45 UTC. Green Print and Win Streak need the day's P&L to be final, so they count after midnight UTC, usually by 00:15 UTC. If you close a trade at lunchtime and check the mission an hour later, it has not been counted yet.
- Within about half an hour. Milestone events — evaluation passes, approved payouts, Live promotions, a 150K funding — credit within an hour of the event reaching your account data, usually about 30 minutes.
- After a manual check. The social sharing mission pays from a link to your post and is verified by the team before it credits.
- Settled at the end of the month. The monthly missions (Top 100, Top 10, King of the Hill, Hold the Line) are decided from the final standings once the month closes in UTC, and settle usually within 15 minutes of the close — in practice, right at the start of the first day of the new month. They show as pending all month until then.
Rewards earned during end-of-day reconciliation: Tradeify's reconciliation process runs roughly 5:00 PM to 6:00 PM ET. A reward that lands in that window can take up to an hour to become claimable. Nothing is lost — wait an hour and check again.
Claiming your rewards
Some missions credit the reward straight into your balance. Others hold it until you press Claim on the mission card. Anything waiting to be claimed also appears in the dropdown under the level and Gems pill in the dashboard header.
Unclaimed rewards are never lost. They stay there until you claim them.
Section: Selling a prize you don’t want
+ Selling a prize you don’t want
+ Not every pull is going to fit your account — you can land a free reset for an account type you don’t hold, or a prize that just isn’t useful to you. When that happens, you don’t have to keep it. You can sell it back for a partial Gems refund.
+ You have 24 hours from the moment you open the pack to sell that prize. The sell option sits right on the card in your Vault and disappears once the 24 hour window closes.
+ Selling returns 60% of the Gems you spent on the pack that awarded it. The refund is based on the pack’s cost, not an individual value assigned to the prize itself.
+ After 24 hours, the sell option is gone. The prize is yours to keep or redeem whenever you like — unredeemed prizes don’t expire, so there’s no rush if you’d rather hold onto it instead of selling.
+ Example: you pull a free reset for an account type you don’t currently hold. You can leave it sitting in your Vault for whenever you do hold that account type, since it never expires, or sell it back within the 24 hour window for 60% of the Gems that pack cost you.
Reward not showing? Check in this order
- Have you accepted the Rewards Center Terms & Conditions? Nothing pays out or spends until you have, and the prompt returns whenever the terms change.
- Is it a trading mission? Those count Tradovate accounts only, and the mission card says so. Rithmic and WealthCharts trades do not count yet.
- Has the trading day closed? Trading missions cannot be counted before your daily trade summary exists.
- Is it a milestone? Evaluation passes, payouts, promotions, and allocations credit within about half an hour of the event reaching your account data — and events from before the program launched do not count at all.
- Is it just waiting to be claimed? Open the level and Gems pill in the header; anything owed to you is listed there.
If all five check out and a full day has passed since the close, contact support from your trader dashboard.
The Shop and TradePacks
The Shop is where you spend Gems. Each TradePack costs a fixed number of Gems and awards one card, which is a random prize drawn from that pack's published prize pool.
There are five TradePacks:
Pack | Cost | Notes
Paper | 2,000 Gems | Entry pack — discounts and merch credit, with a small chance at an evaluation
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Getting Started
- General FAQ
- Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
Tradeify Rewards Center rewards guide: earn XP and Gems from missions, level up to 50, open TradePacks in the Shop, redeem Vault prize codes, plus leaderboard, seasons, limits and FAQs.
Section: Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks
− Updated over 3 weeks ago
+ Updated today
Table of contents
The Rewards Center is Tradeify's rewards program. Trading, journaling, passing evaluations, taking payouts, and taking part in the community earn you two things: XP, which raises your level and your leaderboard rank, and Gems, which you spend in the Shop to open TradePacks and win prizes such as discount codes, evaluation credits, and account resets.
In short:
- Missions pay XP, which raises your level and leaderboard rank and is never spent, and Gems, which you spend.
- Gems buy TradePacks in the Shop. Every pack you open awards one random prize card.
- Prizes land in your Vault as codes you redeem at checkout on the Tradeify site.
- Your first pack is effectively free: setting your leaderboard name pays 2,000 Gems, exactly the price of a Paper Pack.
- Gems, XP, and prizes belong to your Tradeify user account, not to any single trading account, and they do not expire.
The sidebar link reads Rewards Center and the page header reads Rewards Center. Both names refer to the same page.
⚠️ Before you start
- Gems have no cash value. Gems cannot be bought, sold, given to another trader, or withdrawn. They exist only to open TradePacks inside the Rewards Center.
- TradePacks are a game of chance. Odds are published for every pack, each open is independent, there is no pity timer and no guaranteed prize after a number of opens, and a pack open cannot be reversed or refunded.
When missions credit
Missions credit at six different times, and every mission card states which one applies to it:
- Instant. Profile, leaderboard name, Discord connect, social follows, the daily journal note, and sharing your trader card. The card reads "Credited the moment you complete it."
- Within a few minutes. The Discord activity mission, counted by the community bot.
- After the trading day closes. In the Game is counted from your daily trade summary once the trading day closes, usually by 23:45 UTC. Green Print and Win Streak need the day's P&L to be final, so they count after midnight UTC, usually by 00:15 UTC. If you close a trade at lunchtime and check the mission an hour later, it has not been counted yet.
- Within about half an hour. Milestone events — evaluation passes, approved payouts, Live promotions, a 150K funding — credit within an hour of the event reaching your account data, usually about 30 minutes.
- After a manual check. The social sharing mission pays from a link to your post and is verified by the team before it credits.
- Settled at the end of the month. The monthly missions (Top 100, Top 10, King of the Hill, Hold the Line) are decided from the final standings once the month closes in UTC, and settle usually within 15 minutes of the close — in practice, right at the start of the first day of the new month. They show as pending all month until then.
Rewards earned during end-of-day reconciliation: Tradeify's reconciliation process runs roughly 5:00 PM to 6:00 PM ET. A reward that lands in that window can take up to an hour to become claimable. Nothing is lost — wait an hour and check again.
Claiming your rewards
Some missions credit the reward straight into your balance. Others hold it until you press Claim on the mission card. Anything waiting to be claimed also appears in the dropdown under the level and Gems pill in the dashboard header.
Unclaimed rewards are never lost. They stay there until you claim them.
Section: Selling a prize you don’t want
+ Selling a prize you don’t want
+ Not every pull is going to fit your account — you can land a free reset for an account type you don’t hold, or a prize that just isn’t useful to you. When that happens, you don’t have to keep it. You can sell it back for a partial Gems refund.
+ You have 24 hours from the moment you open the pack to sell that prize. The sell option sits right on the card in your Vault and disappears once the 24 hour window closes.
+ Selling returns 60% of the Gems you spent on the pack that awarded it. The refund is based on the pack’s cost, not an individual value assigned to the prize itself.
+ After 24 hours, the sell option is gone. The prize is yours to keep or redeem whenever you like — unredeemed prizes don’t expire, so there’s no rush if you’d rather hold onto it instead of selling.
+ Example: you pull a free reset for an account type you don’t currently hold. You can leave it sitting in your Vault for whenever you do hold that account type, since it never expires, or sell it back within the 24 hour window for 60% of the Gems that pack cost you.
Reward not showing? Check in this order
- Have you accepted the Rewards Center Terms & Conditions? Nothing pays out or spends until you have, and the prompt returns whenever the terms change.
- Is it a trading mission? Those count Tradovate accounts only, and the mission card says so. Rithmic and WealthCharts trades do not count yet.
- Has the trading day closed? Trading missions cannot be counted before your daily trade summary exists.
- Is it a milestone? Evaluation passes, payouts, promotions, and allocations credit within about half an hour of the event reaching your account data — and events from before the program launched do not count at all.
- Is it just waiting to be claimed? Open the level and Gems pill in the header; anything owed to you is listed there.
If all five check out and a full day has passed since the close, contact support from your trader dashboard.
The Shop and TradePacks
The Shop is where you spend Gems. Each TradePack costs a fixed number of Gems and awards one card, which is a random prize drawn from that pack's published prize pool.
There are five TradePacks:
Pack | Cost | Notes
Paper | 2,000 Gems | Entry pack — discounts and merch credit, with a small chance at an evaluation
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Pricing Reference | Tradeify Help CenterValues changed: $155 to $169, $215 to $229.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). 35% consistency rule.
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
− Growth 100K | $255 | $155
− Growth 150K | $369 | $215
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $449 | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
After
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). 35% consistency rule.
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
+ Growth 100K | $255 | $169
+ Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $449 | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Tradeify Pricing Reference — This article is a comprehensive pricing guide for Tradeify Futures Prop trading accounts. All plans are one-time purchases with no recurring billing.
Account Types Overview
Tradeify offers three account types, all available in 25K, 50K, 100K, and 150K sizes:
- Growth Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Has Daily Loss Limit (DLL). 35% consistency rule.
- Select Evaluation — One-time purchase. Pass the evaluation to get funded. No DLL during evaluation. 40% consistency rule during evaluation only, with an optional 50% Consistency Add-on available at purchase. Choose between Daily or Flex payout paths after passing.
- Lightning Funded — One-time purchase. Skip the evaluation entirely and get funded instantly. No resets available. Progressive consistency rule (20% → 25% → 30%).
Growth Evaluation Pricing
Growth Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation to get funded. Resets are available if your account fails.
Account Size | Price (One-Time) | Reset Fee
Growth 25K | $99 | $60
Growth 50K | $145 | $95
Section: Growth Evaluation Pricing
− Growth 100K | $255 | $155
− Growth 150K | $369 | $215
+ Growth 100K | $255 | $169
+ Growth 150K | $369 | $229
Select Evaluation Pricing
Select Evaluations are one-time purchases. Pass the evaluation and choose between Select Daily or Select Flex payout paths. Resets are available if your account fails.
Select Evaluation with 40% Consistency:
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
Select 25K | $109 | $75
Select 50K | $165 | $109
Select 100K | $265 | $169
Select 150K | $369 | $239
Select 300K (limited release) | $449 | Not available
Select Evaluation with 50% Consistency Add-on:
The 50% Consistency Add-on raises your consistency limit from 40% to 50%, allowing a single day to account for up to half of your total profit — meaning you can pass your evaluation in as little as 2 trading days instead of 3.
Account Size | Price | Reset Fee
PremierTradeify · Know Your Trader (KYT) Policy | Tradeify Help CenterInterview duration changed from 10-15 minutes to less than 10 minutes.Oct 2
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Know Your Trader (KYT) is Tradeify's trader verification interview. It is a short, AI-conducted interview in which you explain your own trading activity. It is separate from Know Your Customer (KYC), which verifies your identity. KYT verifies that the person trading the account is the person who holds it and understands how it is being traded.
Purpose
KYT protects the integrity of the Tradeify platform and the traders on it. It helps us confirm that:
- Each account is traded by the person who registered it.
- Trading activity reflects the account holder's own decisions.
- Our rules on account ownership, account sharing, and fair trading are being followed.
When KYT Applies
Tradeify may require a KYT interview at any stage of an account's lifecycle, including before funding, before a payout, or following a review of account activity. Being asked to complete a KYT interview is not an accusation of wrongdoing. It is a routine verification step, and Tradeify may request it at its discretion.
How the Interview Works
Format. KYT is a conversational interview conducted by an AI interviewer. You will receive a secure link by email.
Personalized questions. Questions are generated from your own trading history on Tradeify. No two interviews are identical, and you will not be asked generic or scripted questions.
Language. You may complete the interview in any language you choose. Answer in the language you are most comfortable with.
− Duration. The interview typically takes [10-15] minutes. You will be told how to complete it and by when.
Human review. The AI does not make decisions. Every interview is reviewed by a member of the Tradeify team, who considers your responses alongside your account activity.
Your Responsibilities
When you complete a KYT interview, you agree to:
- Complete the interview yourself, without assistance from another person.
- Not use another person, software, AI tools, or any other aid to generate or dictate your answers.
- Not record, share, or distribute the interview questions.
- Answer truthfully and in your own words.
- Complete the interview within the deadline provided.
Outcomes
After review, one of the following will apply:
- Verified. Your responses are consistent with your trading activity and no further action is required.
- Additional information requested. We may ask you to clarify your responses or provide supporting information.
After
Know Your Trader (KYT) is Tradeify's trader verification interview. It is a short, AI-conducted interview in which you explain your own trading activity. It is separate from Know Your Customer (KYC), which verifies your identity. KYT verifies that the person trading the account is the person who holds it and understands how it is being traded.
Purpose
KYT protects the integrity of the Tradeify platform and the traders on it. It helps us confirm that:
- Each account is traded by the person who registered it.
- Trading activity reflects the account holder's own decisions.
- Our rules on account ownership, account sharing, and fair trading are being followed.
When KYT Applies
Tradeify may require a KYT interview at any stage of an account's lifecycle, including before funding, before a payout, or following a review of account activity. Being asked to complete a KYT interview is not an accusation of wrongdoing. It is a routine verification step, and Tradeify may request it at its discretion.
How the Interview Works
Format. KYT is a conversational interview conducted by an AI interviewer. You will receive a secure link by email.
Personalized questions. Questions are generated from your own trading history on Tradeify. No two interviews are identical, and you will not be asked generic or scripted questions.
Language. You may complete the interview in any language you choose. Answer in the language you are most comfortable with.
+ Duration. The interview typically takes less than 10 minutes. You will be told how to complete it and by when.
Human review. The AI does not make decisions. Every interview is reviewed by a member of the Tradeify team, who considers your responses alongside your account activity.
Your Responsibilities
When you complete a KYT interview, you agree to:
- Complete the interview yourself, without assistance from another person.
- Not use another person, software, AI tools, or any other aid to generate or dictate your answers.
- Not record, share, or distribute the interview questions.
- Answer truthfully and in your own words.
- Complete the interview within the deadline provided.
Outcomes
After review, one of the following will apply:
- Verified. Your responses are consistent with your trading activity and no further action is required.
- Additional information requested. We may ask you to clarify your responses or provide supporting information.
Know Your Trader (KYT) is Tradeify's trader verification interview. It is a short, AI-conducted interview in which you explain your own trading activity. It is separate from Know Your Customer (KYC), which verifies your identity. KYT verifies that the person trading the account is the person who holds it and understands how it is being traded.
Purpose
KYT protects the integrity of the Tradeify platform and the traders on it. It helps us confirm that:
- Each account is traded by the person who registered it.
- Trading activity reflects the account holder's own decisions.
- Our rules on account ownership, account sharing, and fair trading are being followed.
When KYT Applies
Tradeify may require a KYT interview at any stage of an account's lifecycle, including before funding, before a payout, or following a review of account activity. Being asked to complete a KYT interview is not an accusation of wrongdoing. It is a routine verification step, and Tradeify may request it at its discretion.
How the Interview Works
Format. KYT is a conversational interview conducted by an AI interviewer. You will receive a secure link by email.
Personalized questions. Questions are generated from your own trading history on Tradeify. No two interviews are identical, and you will not be asked generic or scripted questions.
Language. You may complete the interview in any language you choose. Answer in the language you are most comfortable with.
− Duration. The interview typically takes [10-15] minutes. You will be told how to complete it and by when.
+ Duration. The interview typically takes less than 10 minutes. You will be told how to complete it and by when.
Human review. The AI does not make decisions. Every interview is reviewed by a member of the Tradeify team, who considers your responses alongside your account activity.
Your Responsibilities
When you complete a KYT interview, you agree to:
- Complete the interview yourself, without assistance from another person.
- Not use another person, software, AI tools, or any other aid to generate or dictate your answers.
- Not record, share, or distribute the interview questions.
- Answer truthfully and in your own words.
- Complete the interview within the deadline provided.
Outcomes
After review, one of the following will apply:
- Verified. Your responses are consistent with your trading activity and no further action is required.
- Additional information requested. We may ask you to clarify your responses or provide supporting information.
PremierTradeify · 300K Select Account | Tradeify Help CenterPage removed from the help center.Oct 1
PremierTradeify · Risk & Compliance Guidelines: FAQ | Tradeify Help CenterArticle added requirement that purchases and payments must be made by and in the name of the account owner, not third parties.Oct 1
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Does one single factor decide the outcome?
Except where a specific rule provides otherwise, no single document, device, IP, trade, payment method, or verification result independently determines an outcome.
Successful completion of one verification step also does not establish compliance with every other requirement. For example, identity verification alone does not establish ownership, trading independence, geographic eligibility, or payment compliance. Tradeify evaluates relevant information collectively.
Your Account and Identity
Can someone else access or trade my account?
No. Each trader must personally own, control, verify, and operate their account. Prohibited conduct includes:
- allowing another person to trade, access, or verify the account
- trading another person's account
- sharing credentials for third-party control
- exchanging account ownership
- misrepresenting who actually owns, controls, or trades the account
Family, business, or employment relationships — or the other party's permission — do not authorize account or identity sharing.
Section: Can someone else buy or pay for my account?
What verification may be required?
Tradeify may require KYC, KYB, AML, identity, residency, payment, or other verification at any stage of participation, including through Tradeify's authorized third-party verification and payments providers.
Users must submit authentic, valid, accurate, current, and unaltered information belonging to the person or entity being verified. Tradeify may require:
- government ID
- liveness/facial verification
- proof of address
- business documentation
- payment or payout-provider verification
- other documentation reasonably required to establish identity, ownership, residency, or eligibility
Submitting documentation does not guarantee approval, and prior verification does not preclude re-verification. Attempts to falsify, manipulate, substitute, or circumvent verification may result in restriction or termination.
For details on the verification process, see our KYC and AML Policy.
Does where I live matter?
A platform's technical permissiveness does not make an action compliant.
What counts as manipulative or non-genuine trading?
Prohibited conduct includes:
- manipulative or disruptive trading
- prohibited high-frequency trading
- non-genuine activity designed to manipulate metrics
- artificial behavior circumventing requirements
- exploitation of simulated conditions
- coordinated risk-distribution schemes
Tradeify evaluates overall pattern, not individual trades in isolation.
Payments and Payouts
What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
Section: What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
− Payment methods must be legitimate and authorized. Review may follow:
- unauthorized instruments
- third-party payment methods
- suspected stolen payment data
- fraudulent transactions
- promotional or refund abuse
- repeated chargebacks
- attempts to obtain both a reversal and the corresponding benefit
A chargeback or dispute does not itself determine contractual rights. Tradeify may require resolution of outstanding obligations before restoring eligibility, where permitted.
See also our Chargeback Policy.
Can my payout be reviewed?
Yes. Payouts are subject to Tradeify's payout rules and Compliance review, before or after processing, where eligibility, identity, ownership, trading, payment, or compliance questions arise. This includes:
- payout information inconsistent with the verified holder
After
Does one single factor decide the outcome?
Except where a specific rule provides otherwise, no single document, device, IP, trade, payment method, or verification result independently determines an outcome.
Successful completion of one verification step also does not establish compliance with every other requirement. For example, identity verification alone does not establish ownership, trading independence, geographic eligibility, or payment compliance. Tradeify evaluates relevant information collectively.
Your Account and Identity
Can someone else access or trade my account?
No. Each trader must personally own, control, verify, and operate their account. Prohibited conduct includes:
- allowing another person to trade, access, or verify the account
- trading another person's account
- sharing credentials for third-party control
- exchanging account ownership
- misrepresenting who actually owns, controls, or trades the account
Family, business, or employment relationships — or the other party's permission — do not authorize account or identity sharing.
Section: Can someone else buy or pay for my account?
+ Can someone else buy or pay for my account?
+ No. Every purchase must be made by you, in your own name, using a payment method in your own name. This applies even if you are the one who trades the account, completes KYC, and requests payouts.
+ A family member or friend may not purchase an account for you or pay with their card, even with their permission. If someone wants to help, they can send you the money and you make the purchase yourself.
What verification may be required?
Tradeify may require KYC, KYB, AML, identity, residency, payment, or other verification at any stage of participation, including through Tradeify's authorized third-party verification and payments providers.
Users must submit authentic, valid, accurate, current, and unaltered information belonging to the person or entity being verified. Tradeify may require:
- government ID
- liveness/facial verification
- proof of address
- business documentation
- payment or payout-provider verification
- other documentation reasonably required to establish identity, ownership, residency, or eligibility
Submitting documentation does not guarantee approval, and prior verification does not preclude re-verification. Attempts to falsify, manipulate, substitute, or circumvent verification may result in restriction or termination.
For details on the verification process, see our KYC and AML Policy.
Does where I live matter?
A platform's technical permissiveness does not make an action compliant.
What counts as manipulative or non-genuine trading?
Prohibited conduct includes:
- manipulative or disruptive trading
- prohibited high-frequency trading
- non-genuine activity designed to manipulate metrics
- artificial behavior circumventing requirements
- exploitation of simulated conditions
- coordinated risk-distribution schemes
Tradeify evaluates overall pattern, not individual trades in isolation.
Payments and Payouts
What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
Section: What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
+ Payment methods must be legitimate, authorized, and in your own name. Third-party payment methods are not permitted. Review may follow:
- unauthorized instruments
- third-party payment methods
- suspected stolen payment data
- fraudulent transactions
- promotional or refund abuse
- repeated chargebacks
- attempts to obtain both a reversal and the corresponding benefit
A chargeback or dispute does not itself determine contractual rights. Tradeify may require resolution of outstanding obligations before restoring eligibility, where permitted.
See also our Chargeback Policy.
Can my payout be reviewed?
Yes. Payouts are subject to Tradeify's payout rules and Compliance review, before or after processing, where eligibility, identity, ownership, trading, payment, or compliance questions arise. This includes:
- payout information inconsistent with the verified holder
Does one single factor decide the outcome?
Except where a specific rule provides otherwise, no single document, device, IP, trade, payment method, or verification result independently determines an outcome.
Successful completion of one verification step also does not establish compliance with every other requirement. For example, identity verification alone does not establish ownership, trading independence, geographic eligibility, or payment compliance. Tradeify evaluates relevant information collectively.
Your Account and Identity
Can someone else access or trade my account?
No. Each trader must personally own, control, verify, and operate their account. Prohibited conduct includes:
- allowing another person to trade, access, or verify the account
- trading another person's account
- sharing credentials for third-party control
- exchanging account ownership
- misrepresenting who actually owns, controls, or trades the account
Family, business, or employment relationships — or the other party's permission — do not authorize account or identity sharing.
Section: Can someone else buy or pay for my account?
+ Can someone else buy or pay for my account?
+ No. Every purchase must be made by you, in your own name, using a payment method in your own name. This applies even if you are the one who trades the account, completes KYC, and requests payouts.
+ A family member or friend may not purchase an account for you or pay with their card, even with their permission. If someone wants to help, they can send you the money and you make the purchase yourself.
What verification may be required?
Tradeify may require KYC, KYB, AML, identity, residency, payment, or other verification at any stage of participation, including through Tradeify's authorized third-party verification and payments providers.
Users must submit authentic, valid, accurate, current, and unaltered information belonging to the person or entity being verified. Tradeify may require:
- government ID
- liveness/facial verification
- proof of address
- business documentation
- payment or payout-provider verification
- other documentation reasonably required to establish identity, ownership, residency, or eligibility
Submitting documentation does not guarantee approval, and prior verification does not preclude re-verification. Attempts to falsify, manipulate, substitute, or circumvent verification may result in restriction or termination.
For details on the verification process, see our KYC and AML Policy.
Does where I live matter?
A platform's technical permissiveness does not make an action compliant.
What counts as manipulative or non-genuine trading?
Prohibited conduct includes:
- manipulative or disruptive trading
- prohibited high-frequency trading
- non-genuine activity designed to manipulate metrics
- artificial behavior circumventing requirements
- exploitation of simulated conditions
- coordinated risk-distribution schemes
Tradeify evaluates overall pattern, not individual trades in isolation.
Payments and Payouts
What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
Section: What are the rules for payment methods and chargebacks?
− Payment methods must be legitimate and authorized. Review may follow:
+ Payment methods must be legitimate, authorized, and in your own name. Third-party payment methods are not permitted. Review may follow:
- unauthorized instruments
- third-party payment methods
- suspected stolen payment data
- fraudulent transactions
- promotional or refund abuse
- repeated chargebacks
- attempts to obtain both a reversal and the corresponding benefit
A chargeback or dispute does not itself determine contractual rights. Tradeify may require resolution of outstanding obligations before restoring eligibility, where permitted.
See also our Chargeback Policy.
Can my payout be reviewed?
Yes. Payouts are subject to Tradeify's payout rules and Compliance review, before or after processing, where eligibility, identity, ownership, trading, payment, or compliance questions arise. This includes:
- payout information inconsistent with the verified holder
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite Program | Tradeify Help CenterRemoved discount on first purchase in Elite-Only Mode; all purchases now at full price.Sep 30
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Traders whose accounts were purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the Legacy Live program and the Elite Live program. Accounts purchased on or after December 3, 2025 follow the Elite Live program only. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Section: Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
− Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. A discount is available on your first individual purchase in this mode, but it applies to single accounts only — bundles are excluded. After that first discounted purchase, all subsequent purchases are at full price.
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
After
Traders whose accounts were purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the Legacy Live program and the Elite Live program. Accounts purchased on or after December 3, 2025 follow the Elite Live program only. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Section: Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
+ Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. No Discount will be available to use. all purchases are at full price.
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
Traders whose accounts were purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the Legacy Live program and the Elite Live program. Accounts purchased on or after December 3, 2025 follow the Elite Live program only. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Section: Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
− Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. A discount is available on your first individual purchase in this mode, but it applies to single accounts only — bundles are excluded. After that first discounted purchase, all subsequent purchases are at full price.
+ Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. No Discount will be available to use. all purchases are at full price.
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
PremierTradeify · Know Your Trader (KYT) Policy | Tradeify Help CenterSep 29
PremierTradeify · GROWTH™ Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterRebranded Growth Evaluation to GROWTH™ and SELECT Evaluation to SELECT™ throughout article, plus minor wording clarifications.Sep 29
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
− Tradeify offers Growth Evaluation accounts with account sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k & $150k.
− How Growth Differs from SELECT Evaluation
− Growth Evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
− In summary: Growth Evaluation is the fastest way to get funded - you can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, Growth has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
− Growth Evaluation Rules
− The rules for Growth Evaluation are stated in the table below.
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
− The Growth Evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is calculated and based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
− The Growth Evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, as intraday fluctuations do not move the drawdown level - it only updates at the end of the day. The level itself is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment during the day, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
− There is no activation fee for Growth Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
Section: Billing & Purchase Model
− Growth Evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
- There is no time activation fee.
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
− - If you pass an Evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
− - Daily Activation Limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 Growth Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded active accounts at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
Section: Reset Credits
− For more information on the payout policies for the Growth Sim Funded account click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− Q: Does Growth Evaluation have a consistency rule?
− A: No, Growth Evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass your Growth Evaluation in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. This differs from SELECT Evaluation, which requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days to pass.
− Q: Does Growth Evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
− A: Yes, Growth Evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach). The limits are: $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit this limit, trading is stopped for the day but your account is not failed. This differs from SELECT Evaluation, which has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
− Q: Can I pass Growth Evaluation in one day?
− A: Yes, Growth Evaluation can be passed in just 1 trading day because there is no consistency requirement. You simply need to hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. This is the fastest evaluation option - SELECT requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
− Q: What's the difference between Growth and SELECT Evaluation?
− A: The main differences are: (1) Growth can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) Growth HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) Growth has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT lets you choose your payout policy (Flex or Daily) AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article for a full breakdown.
− Q: Can I choose my payout policy on Growth like I can with SELECT?
− A: No, Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy. Unlike SELECT, where you choose between Flex (5-Day) or Daily payout policies after passing, Growth accounts use a predetermined payout structure. If you want flexibility in choosing your payout policy, consider SELECT Evaluation instead.
− Q: Is there a time limit to complete Growth Evaluation?
− A: No, there is no time limit to complete a Growth Evaluation. Your account remains active as long as you keep your account active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. You can take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT Evaluation - neither has a time limit.
After
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
+ Tradeify offers GROWTH™ evaluation accounts in sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k and $150k.
+ How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
+ GROWTH™ evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT™ evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
+ In summary: GROWTH™ evaluation is the fastest way to get funded. You can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, GROWTH™ has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT™ takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
+ GROWTH™ evaluation rules
+ The rules for GROWTH™ evaluation are stated in the table below.
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
+ The GROWTH™ evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
+ GROWTH™ evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday swings don't move the drawdown level. It only updates at the end of the day. The level is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
+ There is no activation fee for GROWTH™ Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
Section: Billing & Purchase Model
+ GROWTH™ evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
- There is no time activation fee.
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
+ - If you pass a GROWTH™ evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
+ - Daily activation limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 GROWTH™ Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded accounts active at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
Section: Reset Credits
+ For more information on the payout policies for GROWTH™ Sim Funded accounts click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
+ A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
+ Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
+ A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
+ Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
+ A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
+ Q: What's the difference between GROWTH™ and SELECT™ evaluation?
+ A: (1) GROWTH™ can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT™ requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) GROWTH™ HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT™ has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) GROWTH™ has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT™ lets you choose Flex or Daily AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article.
+ Q: Can I choose my payout policy on GROWTH™ like I can with SELECT™?
+ A: No. GROWTH™ accounts use a fixed payout structure. With SELECT™, you choose Flex (5-Day) or Daily payouts after passing. If you want that choice, consider SELECT™ evaluation instead.
+ Q: Is there a time limit to complete GROWTH™ evaluation?
+ A: No. Your account stays active as long as you keep it active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. Take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
Section: How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
− Tradeify offers Growth Evaluation accounts with account sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k & $150k.
− How Growth Differs from SELECT Evaluation
− Growth Evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
+ Tradeify offers GROWTH™ evaluation accounts in sizes of $25k, $50k, $100k and $150k.
+ How GROWTH™ differs from SELECT™ evaluation
+ GROWTH™ evaluation is NOT the same as SELECT™ evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | Growth Evaluation | SELECT Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 1 day (can pass immediately) | 3 days (due to consistency rule)
Consistency Rule | None | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit)
Daily Loss Limit | Yes (soft breach) | None during evaluation
Payout Policy | Fixed policy (no choice) | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily)
− In summary: Growth Evaluation is the fastest way to get funded - you can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, Growth has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
− Growth Evaluation Rules
− The rules for Growth Evaluation are stated in the table below.
+ In summary: GROWTH™ evaluation is the fastest way to get funded. You can pass in just 1 trading day because there is NO consistency requirement. However, GROWTH™ has a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach) that you must respect. SELECT™ takes longer (minimum 3 days) but gives you more intraday flexibility with no daily loss limit.
+ GROWTH™ evaluation rules
+ The rules for GROWTH™ evaluation are stated in the table below.
Account Size | Profit Target | Daily Loss Limit (Soft Breach) | Trailing Max Drawdown | Max Position Size
$25k | $1,500 | $600 | $1,000 | 1 Contract (10 Micros)
$50k | $3,000 | $1,250 | $2,000 | 4 Contracts (40 Micros)
$100k | $6,000 | $2,500 | $3,500 | 8 Contracts (80 Micros)
$150k | $9,000 | $3,750 | $5,000 | 12 Contracts (120 Micros)
Note: Position Size for accounts purchased before September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
Account Size | Position Size
50k | 5 Contracts (50 Micros)
100k | 10 contracts (100 Micros)
150k | 15 contracts (150 Micros)
Section: GROWTH™ evaluation rules
− The Growth Evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is calculated and based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
+ The GROWTH™ evaluation uses an End of Day Trailing Max Drawdown, which is based on the account balance at the end of the trading day.
For more information on this type of drawdown, see our full article here.
− The Growth Evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, as intraday fluctuations do not move the drawdown level - it only updates at the end of the day. The level itself is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment during the day, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
− There is no activation fee for Growth Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
+ GROWTH™ evaluation accounts offer more flexibility during the trading day, because intraday swings don't move the drawdown level. It only updates at the end of the day. The level is still enforced in real time: if your net liquidation value touches it at any moment, the account fails immediately, even if you recover before the close.
+ There is no activation fee for GROWTH™ Simulated Funded accounts, and the Simulated Funded counterpart cannot be reset.
Billing & Purchase Model
Section: Billing & Purchase Model
− Growth Evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
+ GROWTH™ evaluation accounts are a one-time purchase. There are no recurring subscription charges.
Passing the Evaluation / Activations
- There is no time activation fee.
Section: Passing the Evaluation / Activations
− - If you pass an Evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
− - Daily Activation Limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 Growth Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded active accounts at any time.
+ - If you pass a GROWTH™ evaluation, your account information will update and you can activate instantly.
+ - Daily activation limit: You can activate a maximum of 5 GROWTH™ Funded accounts per day. The limit resets every 24 hours (UTC). Additional qualified accounts must wait until the next day. You cannot have more than 5 sim funded accounts active at any time.
Reset Credits
- Using a Reset Credit does not affect your account timeline. Your account remains active from the original purchase date.
Section: Reset Credits
− For more information on the payout policies for the Growth Sim Funded account click here.
+ For more information on the payout policies for GROWTH™ Sim Funded accounts click here.
Frequently Asked Questions
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− Q: Does Growth Evaluation have a consistency rule?
− A: No, Growth Evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass your Growth Evaluation in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. This differs from SELECT Evaluation, which requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days to pass.
− Q: Does Growth Evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
− A: Yes, Growth Evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach). The limits are: $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit this limit, trading is stopped for the day but your account is not failed. This differs from SELECT Evaluation, which has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
− Q: Can I pass Growth Evaluation in one day?
− A: Yes, Growth Evaluation can be passed in just 1 trading day because there is no consistency requirement. You simply need to hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. This is the fastest evaluation option - SELECT requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
− Q: What's the difference between Growth and SELECT Evaluation?
− A: The main differences are: (1) Growth can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) Growth HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) Growth has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT lets you choose your payout policy (Flex or Daily) AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article for a full breakdown.
− Q: Can I choose my payout policy on Growth like I can with SELECT?
− A: No, Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy. Unlike SELECT, where you choose between Flex (5-Day) or Daily payout policies after passing, Growth accounts use a predetermined payout structure. If you want flexibility in choosing your payout policy, consider SELECT Evaluation instead.
− Q: Is there a time limit to complete Growth Evaluation?
− A: No, there is no time limit to complete a Growth Evaluation. Your account remains active as long as you keep your account active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. You can take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT Evaluation - neither has a time limit.
+ Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a consistency rule?
+ A: No. GROWTH™ evaluation does NOT have a consistency requirement. You can pass in as few as 1 trading day by hitting the profit target. SELECT™ evaluation requires 40% consistency and takes a minimum of 3 trading days.
+ Q: Does GROWTH™ evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
+ A: Yes. GROWTH™ evaluation DOES have a Daily Loss Limit (soft breach): $600 (25K), $1,250 (50K), $2,500 (100K), $3,750 (150K). If you hit it, trading stops for the day but your account is not failed. SELECT™ evaluation has NO daily loss limit during the evaluation phase.
+ Q: Can I pass GROWTH™ evaluation in one day?
+ A: Yes. Because there is no consistency requirement, you can pass in 1 trading day. Hit the profit target while staying within the drawdown and daily loss limits. SELECT™ requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to its 40% consistency rule.
+ Q: What's the difference between GROWTH™ and SELECT™ evaluation?
+ A: (1) GROWTH™ can pass in 1 day with no consistency rule, while SELECT™ requires 3+ days due to 40% consistency. (2) GROWTH™ HAS a daily loss limit (soft breach), while SELECT™ has NO daily loss limit during evaluation. (3) GROWTH™ has a fixed payout policy, while SELECT™ lets you choose Flex or Daily AFTER passing. See the comparison table at the top of this article.
+ Q: Can I choose my payout policy on GROWTH™ like I can with SELECT™?
+ A: No. GROWTH™ accounts use a fixed payout structure. With SELECT™, you choose Flex (5-Day) or Daily payouts after passing. If you want that choice, consider SELECT™ evaluation instead.
+ Q: Is there a time limit to complete GROWTH™ evaluation?
+ A: No. Your account stays active as long as you keep it active and don't breach the trailing drawdown. Take as long as you need to hit the profit target. The same applies to SELECT™ evaluation.
PremierTradeify · Rewards Center: Levels, XP, Missions, and TradePacks | Tradeify Help CenterSep 29
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterRemoved troubleshooting for reCAPTCHA/payment errors and added policy section stating only cards in account holder's name are permitted.Sep 28
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
- No. The previous 7-day requirement has been removed. You can request a payout once your dashboard shows you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
- Why was I charged $1 when purchasing a free trial?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- What happens if my payment fails when purchasing an account?
- If your payment fails during checkout, no account will be created. Simply retry the purchase with a valid payment method.
- If you see a pending charge but did not receive an account, the hold will be released by your bank within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- My promo code isn't working / says I can't use it
After
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
- No. The previous 7-day requirement has been removed. You can request a payout once your dashboard shows you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
- Why was I charged $1 when purchasing a free trial?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
+ - Can I use someone else’s card (a parent, spouse, or friend) to pay?
+ - No. You can only pay with a credit or debit card in your own name. Payments made with someone else’s card, including a family member’s, are not permitted — even with their permission and even if the billing details match.
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- What happens if my payment fails when purchasing an account?
- If your payment fails during checkout, no account will be created. Simply retry the purchase with a valid payment method.
- If you see a pending charge but did not receive an account, the hold will be released by your bank within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- My promo code isn't working / says I can't use it
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- Is there a minimum number of trading days required for payout?
- No. The previous 7-day requirement has been removed. You can request a payout once your dashboard shows you're eligible.
- How do I request a payout?
- Log into your dashboard, navigate to your account, and select 'Request Payout'. Complete KYC with Rise when prompted. Funds will be sent to your Rise wallet.
- Can I get a refund?
- No. Tradeify does not offer refunds. By completing your purchase, you agreed to our Terms of Service which states all sales are final. This applies to all accounts regardless of whether they have been traded on. One exception: if a promo or discount code was not applied to your purchase, that is handled separately - contact support with your transaction details and we will get it corrected.
- Why was I charged $1 when purchasing a free trial?
- This is a temporary authorization hold to verify your card is valid. It is automatically refunded within 3-5 business days.
- I'm getting a reCAPTCHA or payment error
- This usually means your billing information doesn't match your card (especially the zip code). If your information is correct, contact your bank - they may be blocking the transaction.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
+ - Can I use someone else’s card (a parent, spouse, or friend) to pay?
+ - No. You can only pay with a credit or debit card in your own name. Payments made with someone else’s card, including a family member’s, are not permitted — even with their permission and even if the billing details match.
- Why was my card declined?
- Common causes:
- Billing mismatch: Your billing address (especially zip code) doesn't match what's on file with your card issuer.
- Bank blocking: Your bank may be blocking the transaction as a security measure. Contact them to authorize it.
- Restricted country: Tradeify cannot accept payments from certain countries due to regulatory restrictions. If you're in a restricted region, the payment will be declined on our end.
- Card verification: You may see a temporary $1 authorization hold - this is normal and refunds automatically within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information matches your card exactly, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- What happens if my payment fails when purchasing an account?
- If your payment fails during checkout, no account will be created. Simply retry the purchase with a valid payment method.
- If you see a pending charge but did not receive an account, the hold will be released by your bank within 3-5 business days.
- To resolve: Verify your billing information, contact your bank to authorize the transaction, or try a different payment method.
- My promo code isn't working / says I can't use it
PremierTradeify · Risk & Compliance Guidelines: FAQ | Tradeify Help CenterSep 22
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help CenterSummary table updated; step count increased from 10 to 11; opponent P&L refresh changed from twice daily to every 15 minutes; leaderboard refresh changed from twice daily to every 15 minutes; new step added on Tradovate login with PTLOP account.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
− Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
− Updated today
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one.
Company selection in the Waiting Room.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Section: Step 5 — Log in to Tradovate
− Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Section: Step 7 — Trade the session
− Step 6 — Trade the session
− Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
− [Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
− Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Section: Step 9 — Check the leaderboard
− Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
− Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard refreshes twice a day at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and ties break on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
− Step 9 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Section: Step 11 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
− Step 10 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
- No Company, no trading — the Company pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
Section: Quick Reference
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
− - Leaderboard and opponent P&L refresh at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
After
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
+ Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, username, creator Company, Waiting Room, tournament login on Tradovate (PTLOP account), first match, leaderboard, resets, Cut Day.
+ Updated in the last hour
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one.
Company selection in the Waiting Room.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Section: Step 5 — Log in to Tradovate
+ Step 5 — Log in to Tradovate
+ Your PTL account is a Tradovate account whose number starts with PTLOP. It uses the same Tradovate username and password as any other Tradeify account — you will find them in your Tradeify dashboard. There is no separate tournament login and no separate password. Go to trader.tradovate.com, log in with those credentials, then pick the PTLOP account from the account dropdown at the top of the platform. If you already trade a Tradeify evaluation or funded account, nothing changes: same login, one more account in the list.
+ Step 6 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Section: Step 7 — Trade the session
+ Step 7 — Trade the session
+ Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match and refreshes every 15 minutes.
+ Step 8 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Section: Step 9 — Check the leaderboard
+ Step 9 — Check the leaderboard
+ Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard every 15 minutes. Tie breaks are based on on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
+ Step 10 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Section: Step 11 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
+ Step 11 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
- No Company, no trading — the Company pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
Section: Quick Reference
+ - Log in on Tradovate with your usual Tradeify credentials and select the PTLOP account — there is no separate tournament password.
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
+ - Leaderboard and opponent P&L refreshes every 15 minutes.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
− Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
− Updated today
+ Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, username, creator Company, Waiting Room, tournament login on Tradovate (PTLOP account), first match, leaderboard, resets, Cut Day.
+ Updated in the last hour
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one.
Company selection in the Waiting Room.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Section: Step 5 — Log in to Tradovate
− Step 5 — Your first match opens
+ Step 5 — Log in to Tradovate
+ Your PTL account is a Tradovate account whose number starts with PTLOP. It uses the same Tradovate username and password as any other Tradeify account — you will find them in your Tradeify dashboard. There is no separate tournament login and no separate password. Go to trader.tradovate.com, log in with those credentials, then pick the PTLOP account from the account dropdown at the top of the platform. If you already trade a Tradeify evaluation or funded account, nothing changes: same login, one more account in the list.
+ Step 6 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Section: Step 7 — Trade the session
− Step 6 — Trade the session
− Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
− [Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
− Step 7 — The session closes
+ Step 7 — Trade the session
+ Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match and refreshes every 15 minutes.
+ Step 8 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Section: Step 9 — Check the leaderboard
− Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
− Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard refreshes twice a day at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and ties break on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
− Step 9 — If you need a reset
+ Step 9 — Check the leaderboard
+ Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard every 15 minutes. Tie breaks are based on on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
+ Step 10 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Section: Step 11 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
− Step 10 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
+ Step 11 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
- No Company, no trading — the Company pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
Section: Quick Reference
+ - Log in on Tradovate with your usual Tradeify credentials and select the PTLOP account — there is no separate tournament password.
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
− - Leaderboard and opponent P&L refresh at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET.
+ - Leaderboard and opponent P&L refreshes every 15 minutes.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterSummary description: Leaderboard update frequency changed from twice daily (8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET) to every 15 minutes; added tournament login FAQ section; summary text updated to remove specific prize references.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator companies (teams), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
− Updated today
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a Company before you can trade. Company selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
Section: Scoring and the leaderboard
− The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
− If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the tCompany total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
The most likely reason is that you have not picked a Company. Company selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator Companies.
Section: How do I log in to my tournament account?
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your Company choice, so you can switch Companies between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Section: How often does the leaderboard update?
− Twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
After
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
+ Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator Companies, tournament login (Tradovate PTLOP account), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, prizes, Rise payouts, Grand Final.
+ Updated in the last hour
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a Company before you can trade. Company selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
Section: Scoring and the leaderboard
+ The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates every 15 minutes, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
+ If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
The most likely reason is that you have not picked a Company. Company selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator Companies.
Section: How do I log in to my tournament account?
+ How do I log in to my tournament account?
+ Your PTL account is a Tradovate account whose number starts with PTLOP. It uses the same Tradovate username and password as any other Tradeify account — you will find them in your Tradeify dashboard. There is no separate tournament login and no separate password. Go to trader.tradovate.com, log in with those credentials, then pick the PTLOP account from the account dropdown at the top of the platform. If you already trade a Tradeify evaluation or funded account, nothing changes: same login, one more account in the list.
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your Company choice, so you can switch Companies between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Section: How often does the leaderboard update?
+ Every 15 minutes. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator companies (teams), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
− Updated today
+ Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator Companies, tournament login (Tradovate PTLOP account), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, prizes, Rise payouts, Grand Final.
+ Updated in the last hour
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a Company before you can trade. Company selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
Section: Scoring and the leaderboard
− The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
+ The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates every 15 minutes, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
− If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the tCompany total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
+ If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
The most likely reason is that you have not picked a Company. Company selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator Companies.
Section: How do I log in to my tournament account?
+ How do I log in to my tournament account?
+ Your PTL account is a Tradovate account whose number starts with PTLOP. It uses the same Tradovate username and password as any other Tradeify account — you will find them in your Tradeify dashboard. There is no separate tournament login and no separate password. Go to trader.tradovate.com, log in with those credentials, then pick the PTLOP account from the account dropdown at the top of the platform. If you already trade a Tradeify evaluation or funded account, nothing changes: same login, one more account in the list.
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your Company choice, so you can switch Companies between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Section: How often does the leaderboard update?
− Twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
+ Every 15 minutes. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
PremierTradeify · Grand Cup 2: Group Stage & Head-to-Head Bracket | Tradeify Help CenterAdded notice that Grand Cup 2 ended June 9, 2026 and is no longer accepting entries, directing users to the current Premier Trading League competition instead.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
You made the cut. Welcome to Stage 2 of Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws — the head-to-head knockout bracket. This guide walks you through what changes on your dashboard, how matchups are scored, the bounty system, and the rules that decide whether you advance each round.
⚠️ Each matchup is a brand-new account
Every round of the bracket gives you a fresh Grand Cup account starting at $50,000. The account number uses the same GCUPXXXXXXXXXX format as your Qualifier account, but it's a different account — balances do not carry over between rounds. Win the round and you get another fresh $50,000 account for the next matchup. Lose, and you're out.
How the bracket works
Stage 2 is a single-elimination tournament. 1,024 traders enter Round 1 — the top 1,000 finishers from the Qualifier, plus 24 Outlaws — and each round halves the field until one trader is crowned Grand Champion.
- Every round, you're paired with a specific opponent
- Each matchup lasts one trading session on a fresh $50,000 account
- Whoever has the higher balance when the session ends advances
- If both balances are equal, the trader with the higher win rate advances — meaning the percentage of closed trades in that matchup that were profitable
- The other trader is eliminated
- Rounds continue: 1 → 2 → 3 … → 9 → 👑 (Grand Final)
The numbered tiles on the right side of your dashboard track your progress through the bracket. The highlighted tile is the round you're currently in. Each round has a themed name (Shark Tank, for example) shown next to your account number.
After
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
You made the cut. Welcome to Stage 2 of Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws — the head-to-head knockout bracket. This guide walks you through what changes on your dashboard, how matchups are scored, the bounty system, and the rules that decide whether you advance each round.
⚠️ Each matchup is a brand-new account
Every round of the bracket gives you a fresh Grand Cup account starting at $50,000. The account number uses the same GCUPXXXXXXXXXX format as your Qualifier account, but it's a different account — balances do not carry over between rounds. Win the round and you get another fresh $50,000 account for the next matchup. Lose, and you're out.
How the bracket works
Stage 2 is a single-elimination tournament. 1,024 traders enter Round 1 — the top 1,000 finishers from the Qualifier, plus 24 Outlaws — and each round halves the field until one trader is crowned Grand Champion.
- Every round, you're paired with a specific opponent
- Each matchup lasts one trading session on a fresh $50,000 account
- Whoever has the higher balance when the session ends advances
- If both balances are equal, the trader with the higher win rate advances — meaning the percentage of closed trades in that matchup that were profitable
- The other trader is eliminated
- Rounds continue: 1 → 2 → 3 … → 9 → 👑 (Grand Final)
The numbered tiles on the right side of your dashboard track your progress through the bracket. The highlighted tile is the round you're currently in. Each round has a themed name (Shark Tank, for example) shown next to your account number.
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
You made the cut. Welcome to Stage 2 of Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws — the head-to-head knockout bracket. This guide walks you through what changes on your dashboard, how matchups are scored, the bounty system, and the rules that decide whether you advance each round.
⚠️ Each matchup is a brand-new account
Every round of the bracket gives you a fresh Grand Cup account starting at $50,000. The account number uses the same GCUPXXXXXXXXXX format as your Qualifier account, but it's a different account — balances do not carry over between rounds. Win the round and you get another fresh $50,000 account for the next matchup. Lose, and you're out.
How the bracket works
Stage 2 is a single-elimination tournament. 1,024 traders enter Round 1 — the top 1,000 finishers from the Qualifier, plus 24 Outlaws — and each round halves the field until one trader is crowned Grand Champion.
- Every round, you're paired with a specific opponent
- Each matchup lasts one trading session on a fresh $50,000 account
- Whoever has the higher balance when the session ends advances
- If both balances are equal, the trader with the higher win rate advances — meaning the percentage of closed trades in that matchup that were profitable
- The other trader is eliminated
- Rounds continue: 1 → 2 → 3 … → 9 → 👑 (Grand Final)
The numbered tiles on the right side of your dashboard track your progress through the bracket. The highlighted tile is the round you're currently in. Each round has a themed name (Shark Tank, for example) shown next to your account number.
PremierTradeify · Grand Cup 2: Getting Started & Dashboard Overview | Tradeify Help CenterAdded notice that Grand Cup 2 ended on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries, with reference to current Premier Trading League competition.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
⚠️ Don't see your Grand Cup account yet?
The most common cause is that your KYC verification isn't complete. Make sure your KYC is approved before the competition starts so you don't miss the Qualifier. If you're stuck on verification, contact support.
Where to find your dashboard
Once you've signed up for Grand Cup 2, a dedicated Grand Cup card appears on your Tradeify dashboard. Open it and you'll see everything you need to compete in one place:
- Your platform credentials (top of the card)
- Your Grand Cup account number (GCUPXXXXXXXXXX)
- Your current rank, stage, and advancement status
- Account metrics — balance, trailing drawdown, total profit, contract limits
- The Reset button (Qualifier only)
Reading your dashboard
Stage indicator
At the top, you'll see the current competition stage:
After
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
⚠️ Don't see your Grand Cup account yet?
The most common cause is that your KYC verification isn't complete. Make sure your KYC is approved before the competition starts so you don't miss the Qualifier. If you're stuck on verification, contact support.
Where to find your dashboard
Once you've signed up for Grand Cup 2, a dedicated Grand Cup card appears on your Tradeify dashboard. Open it and you'll see everything you need to compete in one place:
- Your platform credentials (top of the card)
- Your Grand Cup account number (GCUPXXXXXXXXXX)
- Your current rank, stage, and advancement status
- Account metrics — balance, trailing drawdown, total profit, contract limits
- The Reset button (Qualifier only)
Reading your dashboard
Stage indicator
At the top, you'll see the current competition stage:
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
⚠️ Don't see your Grand Cup account yet?
The most common cause is that your KYC verification isn't complete. Make sure your KYC is approved before the competition starts so you don't miss the Qualifier. If you're stuck on verification, contact support.
Where to find your dashboard
Once you've signed up for Grand Cup 2, a dedicated Grand Cup card appears on your Tradeify dashboard. Open it and you'll see everything you need to compete in one place:
- Your platform credentials (top of the card)
- Your Grand Cup account number (GCUPXXXXXXXXXX)
- Your current rank, stage, and advancement status
- Account metrics — balance, trailing drawdown, total profit, contract limits
- The Reset button (Qualifier only)
Reading your dashboard
Stage indicator
At the top, you'll see the current competition stage:
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws — Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterAdded notice that Grand Cup 2 ended on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries, with reference to current Premier Trading League competition.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
What is Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws?
Grand Cup 2 is our biggest tournament yet — a bracket-driven simulated trading competition with $1,000,000 in guaranteed prizes and payouts to the top 1,000 traders.
Unlike the original Grand Cup's open free-for-all, Grand Cup 2 introduces a head-to-head knockout format: qualify in Stage 1, then go one-on-one against another trader each day until only one Champion remains. We've also added 24 Outlaws — featured traders dropped directly into the bracket with bounties of $5,000 or more on their heads. Eliminate one, and the bounty is yours, even if you don't make it to the later rounds.
⚠️ Before You Sign Up
- Free entry — open to traders from non-restricted countries only.
- Mandatory: all participants must be subscribed to Tradeify TV on YouTube to register.
- One entry per person.
- Only one account per household is eligible to compete in TGC2.
- KYC verification is mandatory — you must complete KYC to participate.
📅 Registration
- Signup Opens: Wednesday, May 6, 2026
- Registration Closes: Friday, May 22, 2026 (last day of the qualifier)
After
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
What is Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws?
Grand Cup 2 is our biggest tournament yet — a bracket-driven simulated trading competition with $1,000,000 in guaranteed prizes and payouts to the top 1,000 traders.
Unlike the original Grand Cup's open free-for-all, Grand Cup 2 introduces a head-to-head knockout format: qualify in Stage 1, then go one-on-one against another trader each day until only one Champion remains. We've also added 24 Outlaws — featured traders dropped directly into the bracket with bounties of $5,000 or more on their heads. Eliminate one, and the bounty is yours, even if you don't make it to the later rounds.
⚠️ Before You Sign Up
- Free entry — open to traders from non-restricted countries only.
- Mandatory: all participants must be subscribed to Tradeify TV on YouTube to register.
- One entry per person.
- Only one account per household is eligible to compete in TGC2.
- KYC verification is mandatory — you must complete KYC to participate.
📅 Registration
- Signup Opens: Wednesday, May 6, 2026
- Registration Closes: Friday, May 22, 2026 (last day of the qualifier)
Section: ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ ⚠️ Grand Cup 2 has ended
+ Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws concluded on 9 June 2026 and is no longer accepting entries or trades. This page is kept for reference only. The current competition is the Premier Trading League — see that guide for tournament rules, login and dashboard help.
What is Tradeify Grand Cup 2: The Outlaws?
Grand Cup 2 is our biggest tournament yet — a bracket-driven simulated trading competition with $1,000,000 in guaranteed prizes and payouts to the top 1,000 traders.
Unlike the original Grand Cup's open free-for-all, Grand Cup 2 introduces a head-to-head knockout format: qualify in Stage 1, then go one-on-one against another trader each day until only one Champion remains. We've also added 24 Outlaws — featured traders dropped directly into the bracket with bounties of $5,000 or more on their heads. Eliminate one, and the bounty is yours, even if you don't make it to the later rounds.
⚠️ Before You Sign Up
- Free entry — open to traders from non-restricted countries only.
- Mandatory: all participants must be subscribed to Tradeify TV on YouTube to register.
- One entry per person.
- Only one account per household is eligible to compete in TGC2.
- KYC verification is mandatory — you must complete KYC to participate.
📅 Registration
- Signup Opens: Wednesday, May 6, 2026
- Registration Closes: Friday, May 22, 2026 (last day of the qualifier)
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help CenterCompany selection requirement description simplified, removing mention of mandatory status and trading restrictions.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
Updated today
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
− Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. This step is mandatory: picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
− Company selection in the Waiting Room. No Company, no trading.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
After
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
Updated today
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one.
+ Company selection in the Waiting Room.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
Updated today
Table of contents
This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Step 3 — Pick your Company
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
− Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. This step is mandatory: picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
− Company selection in the Waiting Room. No Company, no trading.
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one.
+ Company selection in the Waiting Room.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterClarified that traders with NO COMPANY status must select a company before trading, rather than stating selection is mandatory before first trade.Sep 21
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
The day before the league starts, Company selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2; you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
Companies
Section: Companies
− Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 Company, and you start contributing to your new Company from Open 2.
Companies are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
At the end of each league, packs drop to Companies that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every Company starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
One thing your Company does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own Company-mates as often as anyone else. Joining a Company changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
After
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
The day before the league starts, Company selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2; you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
Companies
Section: Companies
+ Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one - but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 Company, and you start contributing to your new Company from Open 2.
Companies are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
At the end of each league, packs drop to Companies that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every Company starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
One thing your Company does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own Company-mates as often as anyone else. Joining a Company changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
The day before the league starts, Company selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2; you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
Companies
Section: Companies
− Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
+ Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. If your profile says NO COMPANY, please select one - but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 Company, and you start contributing to your new Company from Open 2.
Companies are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
At the end of each league, packs drop to Companies that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every Company starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
One thing your Company does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own Company-mates as often as anyone else. Joining a Company changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help CenterChanged terminology from "team" to "Company" throughout the dashboard walkthrough and updated the last modified timestamp from over a week ago to today.Sep 20
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
− Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator team, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
− Updated over a week ago
Table of contents
− This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, teams, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
− Step 3 — Pick your team
− Team selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator teams. This step is mandatory: picking a team is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
− Team selection in the Waiting Room. No team, no trading.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard refreshes twice a day at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and ties break on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
Step 9 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Step 10 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
Section: Quick Reference
− - No team, no trading — the team pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
- Leaderboard and opponent P&L refresh at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
After
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
+ Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
+ Updated today
Table of contents
+ This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
+ Step 3 — Pick your Company
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. This step is mandatory: picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
+ Company selection in the Waiting Room. No Company, no trading.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard refreshes twice a day at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and ties break on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
Step 9 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Step 10 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
Section: Quick Reference
+ - No Company, no trading — the Company pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
- Leaderboard and opponent P&L refresh at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
Section: Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough
− Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator team, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
− Updated over a week ago
+ Step-by-step Premier Trading League (PTL) dashboard walkthrough: registration, display username, picking a creator Company, the Waiting Room, your first match, leaderboard points, resets and Cut Day.
+ Updated today
Table of contents
− This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, teams, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
+ This walkthrough follows the Premier Trading League from registration through to your first match, one step at a time. Each step tells you what to do, and where a screenshot exists it shows what you should be seeing at that point. For the full rules — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the prize breakdown — see the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide.
Step 1 — Register
Head to the PTL registration page from Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and sign up. Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. Remember: one entry per person, one per household, and you must be KYC verified.
The registration page. Open 1 registration closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET.
Step 2 — Set your username
Set your display username when you register. You compete under that name on the leaderboard and your real name is never shown. Once confirmed it cannot be changed, so choose carefully.
Setting your display username. Once confirmed, it cannot be changed.
Section: Step 3 — Pick your Company
− Step 3 — Pick your team
− Team selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator teams. This step is mandatory: picking a team is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
− Team selection in the Waiting Room. No team, no trading.
+ Step 3 — Pick your Company
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1. Pick one of the 16 creator Companies. This step is mandatory: picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room, and you cannot place a single trade until you have chosen.
+ Company selection in the Waiting Room. No Company, no trading.
Step 4 — You land in the Waiting Room
After registering, your Tradeify dashboard drops you into the Waiting Room. This is home base until the league starts — you will see a countdown to trading opening on Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET.
The Waiting Room right after registration, showing the countdown to Open 1.
Step 5 — Your first match opens
Match 1 opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET (the session runs through Tuesday 22 September, closing at 4:45 PM ET). You are paired with one random opponent from the whole field, and you both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account on Tradovate.
A match at session open — your fresh $50,000 account and your opponent for this session.
Step 6 — Trade the session
Trade ES, NQ, GC or CL — or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL). Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account — one position, one product at a time; Tradovate simply rejects anything over the limit. There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail the account. Your opponent's P&L is visible during the match but refreshes only twice a day, so treat it as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
[Screenshot coming soon] Mid-session. The opponent P&L updates at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, not in real time.
Step 7 — The session closes
At 4:45 PM ET on match day, the system automatically closes any open position at market price — you never need to flatten yourself. Whatever the account shows at close is your result for the match.
Step 8 — Check the leaderboard
Your points land on the leaderboard: +3 for winning the head-to-head, +1 each for a draw (within $50), +1 per $500 of profit (capped at +20 per match), and −1 per $500 of loss with no cap. The leaderboard refreshes twice a day at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and ties break on matchup wins, then total P&L, then biggest single match.
Step 9 — If you need a reset
Had a disaster session? You get one reset per league: a single-match reset ($25) that removes one match from your record, or a full reset ($50) back to zero — full resets only exist in Matches 1–3. Resets work in Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only, never Match 4 or 8, and if you use one you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut. Fees are non-refundable.
Step 10 — Survive Cut Day, then race for the final
After Match 4 (Thursday 1 October for Open 1), the bottom half of the field is relegated. Survive, and Matches 5–8 are your run at the top 500 cash prizes — and the top 4 seats at the Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on 11 December.
[Screenshot coming soon] Cut Day. Everything before this was positioning.
Quick Reference
Section: Quick Reference
− - No team, no trading — the team pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
+ - No Company, no trading — the Company pick in the Waiting Room gates your first order.
- Every match: fresh $50,000, random opponent, auto-flatten at 4:45 PM ET.
- Leaderboard and opponent P&L refresh at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET.
- Position limit: one mini or ten micros total, enforced by Tradovate.
- One reset per league — Matches 1–3 and 5–7 only; score in Match 4 after using one.
- All times ET. US daylight saving ends 1 November, mid-Open 2.
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterUpdated timestamp changed from "this week" to "today"; terminology changed from "team" to "Company" throughout the article; minor punctuation adjustment.Sep 20
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator teams, head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
− Updated this week
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Section: ⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
− - You must pick a team before you can trade. Team selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
PTL is not a knockout. A bad match does not end your run — it costs you points, and you go again on the next matchup. And because all trading is simulated, no real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Key Dates
| Open 1 | Open 2
Registration opens | Tue 8 Sep, 12:00 PM ET | Thu 1 Oct, 12:00 AM ET
Section: Key Dates
− Team selection opens | Sun 20 Sep | Sun 25 Oct
Trading opens | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
First match | Tue 22 Sep | Tue 27 Oct
Registration closes | Sun 20 Sep, 11:59 PM ET | Sun 25 Oct, 11:59 PM ET
Cut Day — half the field goes | Thu 1 Oct | Thu 5 Nov
Final match | Thu 15 Oct | Thu 19 Nov
Grand Final | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale
All times are ET. US daylight saving ends on 1 November, part-way through Open 2.
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
Section: How to enter and get started
− The day before the league starts, team selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a team is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
− If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2 — you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
− Teams
− Every trader competes under the banner of a team — one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
− Team selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
− If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 team, and you start contributing to your new team from Open 2.
− Teams are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
− At the end of each league, packs drop to teams that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every team starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
− One thing your team does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own teammates as often as anyone else. Joining a team changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
− If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your team, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the team total, and if the team clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind — we cannot apply on your behalf, expedite an application, or issue sponsorship letters. When you register you accept that if you finish in the top 4 but do not hold valid travel authorization for the United States, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your place at the final passes to the next eligible trader.
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
Section: Why can't I place a trade?
− The most likely reason is that you have not picked a team. Team selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator teams.
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Section: Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
− Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your team choice, so you can switch teams between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Section: What happens if I am cut?
− Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your team total, and if the team clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
How do I withdraw from the competition?
Contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2 — you are still free to register and compete in the second league. Reset fees already paid are not refunded.
After
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
+ Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator companies (teams), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
+ Updated today
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Section: ⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
+ - You must pick a Company before you can trade. Company selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
PTL is not a knockout. A bad match does not end your run — it costs you points, and you go again on the next matchup. And because all trading is simulated, no real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Key Dates
| Open 1 | Open 2
Registration opens | Tue 8 Sep, 12:00 PM ET | Thu 1 Oct, 12:00 AM ET
Section: Key Dates
+ Company selection opens | Sun 20 Sep | Sun 25 Oct
Trading opens | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
First match | Tue 22 Sep | Tue 27 Oct
Registration closes | Sun 20 Sep, 11:59 PM ET | Sun 25 Oct, 11:59 PM ET
Cut Day — half the field goes | Thu 1 Oct | Thu 5 Nov
Final match | Thu 15 Oct | Thu 19 Nov
Grand Final | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale
All times are ET. US daylight saving ends on 1 November, part-way through Open 2.
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
Section: How to enter and get started
+ The day before the league starts, Company selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
+ If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2; you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
+ Companies
+ Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
+ If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 Company, and you start contributing to your new Company from Open 2.
+ Companies are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
+ At the end of each league, packs drop to Companies that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every Company starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
+ One thing your Company does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own Company-mates as often as anyone else. Joining a Company changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
+ If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the tCompany total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind — we cannot apply on your behalf, expedite an application, or issue sponsorship letters. When you register you accept that if you finish in the top 4 but do not hold valid travel authorization for the United States, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your place at the final passes to the next eligible trader.
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
Section: Why can't I place a trade?
+ The most likely reason is that you have not picked a Company. Company selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator Companies.
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Section: Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
+ Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your Company choice, so you can switch Companies between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Section: What happens if I am cut?
+ Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
How do I withdraw from the competition?
Contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2 — you are still free to register and compete in the second league. Reset fees already paid are not refunded.
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator teams, head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
− Updated this week
+ Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator companies (teams), head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
+ Updated today
Table of contents
Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Section: ⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
− - You must pick a team before you can trade. Team selection happens in the Waiting Room.
+ - You must pick a Company before you can trade. Company selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
PTL is not a knockout. A bad match does not end your run — it costs you points, and you go again on the next matchup. And because all trading is simulated, no real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
Key Dates
| Open 1 | Open 2
Registration opens | Tue 8 Sep, 12:00 PM ET | Thu 1 Oct, 12:00 AM ET
Section: Key Dates
− Team selection opens | Sun 20 Sep | Sun 25 Oct
+ Company selection opens | Sun 20 Sep | Sun 25 Oct
Trading opens | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
First match | Tue 22 Sep | Tue 27 Oct
Registration closes | Sun 20 Sep, 11:59 PM ET | Sun 25 Oct, 11:59 PM ET
Cut Day — half the field goes | Thu 1 Oct | Thu 5 Nov
Final match | Thu 15 Oct | Thu 19 Nov
Grand Final | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale | Fri 11 Dec — Fort Lauderdale
All times are ET. US daylight saving ends on 1 November, part-way through Open 2.
Who can enter
Entry is free and open to anyone eligible. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account — nothing to buy at any point. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies, and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries
Already trading a live account? Reach out to your Risk manager before entering the tournament.
How to enter and get started
Registration is free and takes a couple of minutes. For Open 1 it opens Tuesday 8 September at 12:00 PM ET and closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET — the night before trading opens. Open 2 registration opens Thursday 1 October at 12:00 AM ET, while Open 1 is still being played, and closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Registration now closes before each league starts, so there is no mid-league entry window.
The two leagues are separate sign-ups, and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1.
After you register, you land in the Waiting Room on your Tradeify dashboard. It shows a countdown to the league start and is where you set your display username. Choose carefully — once set, your username is locked for the competition. You compete under that name, and your real name is never shown on the leaderboard.
Section: How to enter and get started
− The day before the league starts, team selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a team is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
− If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2 — you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
− Teams
− Every trader competes under the banner of a team — one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
− Team selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
− If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 team, and you start contributing to your new team from Open 2.
− Teams are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
− At the end of each league, packs drop to teams that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every team starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
− One thing your team does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own teammates as often as anyone else. Joining a team changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
+ The day before the league starts, Company selection opens in the Waiting Room. Picking a Company is how you leave the Waiting Room and enter the competition, and you cannot place a trade until you have.
+ If you ever want to withdraw, contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2; you are still free to register and compete in the second league.
+ Companies
+ Every trader competes under the banner of a Company: one of 16 creators or affiliates. Picking one is mandatory before your first trade, but your matches, your points, and your prize money stay entirely your own. Your creator is also competing in their own league across the season, and 8 of the 16 will qualify for the live final in December.
+ Company selection opens in the Waiting Room the day before the league starts — 20 September for Open 1, 25 October for Open 2. There is no deadline to choose, but you cannot trade until you have. Once you start trading you are with that team for all eight matches. Between leagues you can switch: Open 1 and Open 2 are separate sign-ups, registering again reopens your team choice, and creators recruit during the window between the two leagues.
+ If you do switch, the points you earned in Open 1 stay with your Open 1 Company, and you start contributing to your new Company from Open 2.
+ Companies are scored on their average points per active player. A player counts as active once they have placed a single trade, so members who sign up and never trade do not affect the average. There is no minimum or maximum team size — a small team needs fewer points to unlock a reward, a large team needs more, and the bar always matches the roster. Points are never taken away: if you are relegated at the cut, the profit you made still counts toward your team.
+ At the end of each league, packs drop to Companies that clear their threshold. Open 1 and Open 2 are scored separately, so every Company starts the second league from zero. Play both leagues and you are in line for both drops; switch teams in between and you collect with your Open 1 team for the first and your Open 2 team for the second. Your cash prize is separate — it depends only on where you finish on the ladder, and your team cannot add to it or take from it.
+ One thing your Company does not affect: who you trade against. Pairings are random across the whole field, so you will be matched against your own Company-mates as often as anyone else. Joining a Company changes nothing about how you trade, what your account looks like, or what you can win as an individual.
How a match works
Each match pairs you against one other trader, drawn at random from the whole field, for a full trading session. You both start on a fresh $50,000 simulated account, and whoever finishes with the higher P&L wins the head-to-head.
A match runs one full futures session on Tradovate. It opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before and closes at 4:45 PM ET on the match day — so Match 1, listed as Tuesday 22 September, actually opens Monday 21 September at 6:00 PM ET. At the close, the system flattens you automatically: whatever is open is closed at market price and counts toward your result. You cannot hold a position past the close, and you never need to flatten yourself.
The products are ES, NQ, GC and CL or their micro equivalents (MES, MNQ, MGC, MCL), and simulated market data is provided free to all participants. Position size is capped at one mini or ten micros across your whole account. That is a total, not a per-product allowance — you can hold one position at a time in one product, so you cannot hold 1 NQ and 1 GC together, and you cannot combine a mini with micros. Tradovate enforces the limit and simply rejects any order that would breach it.
There is no drawdown limit, and you cannot fail an account by losing money. You lose what you lose, and the next match starts on a fresh $50,000 account — nothing carries over between matches, not balance and not losses.
Your opponent's P&L is shown during the match, but it refreshes twice a day rather than in real time. Treat it as a checkpoint, not a live feed — the figure you are looking at may be several hours old.
Scoring and the leaderboard
Every match scores you on two things: the result against your opponent, and the profit you make.
Event | Points
Win the head-to-head | +3
Draw, finishing within $50 of your opponent | +1 to both traders
Lose the head-to-head | 0
Per $500 of profit | +1, capped at +20 per match
Per $500 of loss | −1, no cap
You earn profit points whether you win or lose the head-to-head. Take two traders in the same match: Trader A finishes +$1,500, which is +3 for winning and +3 for the profit — 6 points. Trader B finishes +$1,120, loses the head-to-head for 0, but the profit is worth +2. Trader B made real money and lost the matchup, and without profit points they would walk away with nothing.
The flip side is that losses have no floor. Every $500 lost is −1 with no cap, so a bad session can put your score below zero.
The ladder is ranked by total points. Ties break on matchup wins first, then total P&L, then the biggest single match. The leaderboard updates twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET, and your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule — between refreshes the figures you see are a snapshot, not a live position.
The cut
Halfway through the league, half the field goes home. After Match 4 the bottom 50% is relegated in a single event, and the survivors play Matches 5 to 8 racing for the four seats at the Grand Final. Cut Day is Thursday 1 October in Open 1 and Thursday 5 November in Open 2 — the two biggest sessions of each league. Everything before them is positioning.
Section: The cut
− If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your team, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the team total, and if the team clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
+ If you are relegated, your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. It is not a total loss: you are still on your Company, every point you earned in the first four matches stays on the tCompany total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 also does not stop you entering Open 2 fresh.
Cash prizes go to the top 500 of each league, so those are decided among the traders who survive the cut. And the route to the Grand Final is simple: finish in the top 4 of either league.
Resets
A reset undoes damage to your leaderboard score, and there are two kinds. A single-match reset removes one match from your record, so the points you lost that day come back — it costs $25. A full reset takes your leaderboard score back to zero — useful because losses have no cap, and a run of bad sessions can leave you well into negative territory. It costs $50.
You get one reset per league, of either type. If you play both Open 1 and Open 2, you get one in each. One means one: using the $25 single-match reset means you cannot then use the $50 full reset in that league.
Resets are available in two windows — Matches 1 to 3, and Matches 5 to 7. They are never available for Match 4, the cut, or for Match 8, and the full back-to-zero reset only exists in the first window.
There is also a catch: if you use a reset, you must score points in Match 4 to survive the cut.
Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
Competition schedule
Matches run twice a week, Tuesday and Thursday. Each session opens at 6:00 PM ET the evening before.
Open 1
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 22 Sep | Mon 21 Sep, 6:00 PM ET
Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind — we cannot apply on your behalf, expedite an application, or issue sponsorship letters. When you register you accept that if you finish in the top 4 but do not hold valid travel authorization for the United States, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your place at the final passes to the next eligible trader.
If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early — the gap between the end of Open 2 and the final on 11 December is not enough time to obtain travel authorization from a standing start.
Community and announcements
Match announcements, results and league chat all run in the Tradeify Discord. Schedule changes are posted there first.
Frequently asked questions
Is the Premier Trading League really free to enter?
Yes. Entry is free, with no purchase and no subscription. You do not need a paid Tradeify account, an evaluation, or a funded account. It is one entry per person and one per household, and every participant must be KYC verified.
Do I need a funded or evaluation account to take part?
No. PTL is separate from Tradeify's evaluation and funded account products. Nothing needs to be bought at any point.
Can I lose real money in PTL?
No. All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk, and you cannot fail an account by losing money.
Why can't I place a trade?
Section: Why can't I place a trade?
− The most likely reason is that you have not picked a team. Team selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator teams.
+ The most likely reason is that you have not picked a Company. Company selection is required before your first trade — go to the Waiting Room on your dashboard and choose one of the 16 creator Companies.
Why was my order rejected?
The most likely reason is position size. The limit is one mini or ten micros across your whole account — a total, not a per-product allowance — and Tradovate rejects any order that would breach it. Check whether you already have a position open in another product.
Can I register after the league has started?
No. Registration closes the night before trading opens, so there is no mid-league entry window. Open 1 closes Sunday 20 September at 11:59 PM ET; Open 2 closes Sunday 25 October at 11:59 PM ET.
Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
Section: Can I play both Open 1 and Open 2?
− Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your team choice, so you can switch teams between leagues.
+ Yes. The two leagues are separate sign-ups and you can play one or both. Missing Open 1 does not lock you out of Open 2, and neither does being relegated in Open 1. Registering again reopens your Company choice, so you can switch Companies between leagues.
How often does the leaderboard update?
Twice a day, at 8:00 AM and 2:00 PM ET. Your opponent's P&L updates on the same schedule, so treat the figure you see as a checkpoint rather than a live feed.
Why can't I use a reset?
There are three possible reasons. Resets are not available for Match 4 or Match 8. The full back-to-zero reset only exists during Matches 1 to 3. And each trader gets one reset per league — if you have used yours, no further resets can be issued.
Are reset fees refundable?
No. Reset fees are non-refundable, including if you later withdraw from the competition.
What happens if I am cut?
Section: What happens if I am cut?
− Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your team total, and if the team clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
+ Your league ends after Match 4 and you do not play Matches 5 to 8. Every point you earned in the first four matches stays on your Company total, and if the Company clears its threshold you receive the pack drop along with everyone else. Being cut in Open 1 does not stop you entering Open 2.
How do I get my prize money?
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise. If you do not have one, we send an invite — open the email, accept it, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Payouts are sent once final leaderboard placements are confirmed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder, then contact Rise support at .
What if I finish in the top 4 but cannot travel to the United States?
The Grand Final is held in the US and travelling there is your responsibility. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship of any kind. If you finish in the top 4 without valid US travel authorization, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize of $10,000, and your seat passes to the next eligible trader. If you think you may finish near the top, start your travel arrangements early.
How do I know if my country is eligible?
Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies and there is no additional tournament-specific restriction list for PTL. If your country does not appear on that list, you are eligible: Rules — Restricted Countries. If you are unsure, contact Tradeify support.
How do I withdraw from the competition?
Contact Tradeify support and they will take care of it. Withdrawing from Open 1 does not affect Open 2 — you are still free to register and compete in the second league. Reset fees already paid are not refunded.
PremierTradeify · The Premier Trading League is here | Tradeify Help CenterChanged "creator teams" to "creator Companies" and updated scoring section reference from "teams" to "Companies".Sep 20
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- Two leagues, back to back: Open 1 (21 Sep – 15 Oct) and Open 2 (26 Oct – 19 Nov). Play one. Play both.
- Halfway through, the cut: half the field goes home in a single day. Survive it and you are racing for a seat at the final.
- One bad match will not end you — this is not a knockout. Lose today, go again Thursday.
- It is all simulated, so not a cent of real money is ever at risk. Free entry, no purchase, no funded account. Just you and the ladder.
What is at stake
- $300,000 per league, paid out to the top 500.
- Finish top 4 in either league and you are on a plane — all expenses paid — to the live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11.
- $400,000 decided on stage in a single day. The champion walks away with $180,000. Even 8th place takes home $13,000 — every seat at the final beats any league prize.
Get in before the doors close
- Open 1 registration: Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET.
- Open 2 registration: Thursday 1 October, 12:00 AM ET to Sunday 25 October, 11:59 PM ET.
- Registration shuts before each league starts — once trading opens, the doors are closed. You must be KYC verified, and Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
Section: Get in before the doors close
− - Register, lock in your username, pick one of 16 creator teams to ride with, and you are in. Trading runs on Tradovate: ES, NQ, GC and CL.
A free signup in September. Eight matches from your own desk. A main stage in December. That is the whole path.
− Ready to go deeper — scoring, teams, the cut, resets and the full prize breakdown? Read the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide. Want to see the dashboard first? Follow the step-by-step walkthrough.
After
- Two leagues, back to back: Open 1 (21 Sep – 15 Oct) and Open 2 (26 Oct – 19 Nov). Play one. Play both.
- Halfway through, the cut: half the field goes home in a single day. Survive it and you are racing for a seat at the final.
- One bad match will not end you — this is not a knockout. Lose today, go again Thursday.
- It is all simulated, so not a cent of real money is ever at risk. Free entry, no purchase, no funded account. Just you and the ladder.
What is at stake
- $300,000 per league, paid out to the top 500.
- Finish top 4 in either league and you are on a plane — all expenses paid — to the live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11.
- $400,000 decided on stage in a single day. The champion walks away with $180,000. Even 8th place takes home $13,000 — every seat at the final beats any league prize.
Get in before the doors close
- Open 1 registration: Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET.
- Open 2 registration: Thursday 1 October, 12:00 AM ET to Sunday 25 October, 11:59 PM ET.
- Registration shuts before each league starts — once trading opens, the doors are closed. You must be KYC verified, and Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
Section: Get in before the doors close
+ - Register, lock in your username, pick one of 16 creator Companies to ride with, and you are in. Trading runs on Tradovate: ES, NQ, GC and CL.
A free signup in September. Eight matches from your own desk. A main stage in December. That is the whole path.
+ Ready to go deeper — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the full prize breakdown? Read the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide. Want to see the dashboard first? Follow the step-by-step walkthrough.
- Two leagues, back to back: Open 1 (21 Sep – 15 Oct) and Open 2 (26 Oct – 19 Nov). Play one. Play both.
- Halfway through, the cut: half the field goes home in a single day. Survive it and you are racing for a seat at the final.
- One bad match will not end you — this is not a knockout. Lose today, go again Thursday.
- It is all simulated, so not a cent of real money is ever at risk. Free entry, no purchase, no funded account. Just you and the ladder.
What is at stake
- $300,000 per league, paid out to the top 500.
- Finish top 4 in either league and you are on a plane — all expenses paid — to the live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11.
- $400,000 decided on stage in a single day. The champion walks away with $180,000. Even 8th place takes home $13,000 — every seat at the final beats any league prize.
Get in before the doors close
- Open 1 registration: Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET.
- Open 2 registration: Thursday 1 October, 12:00 AM ET to Sunday 25 October, 11:59 PM ET.
- Registration shuts before each league starts — once trading opens, the doors are closed. You must be KYC verified, and Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
Section: Get in before the doors close
− - Register, lock in your username, pick one of 16 creator teams to ride with, and you are in. Trading runs on Tradovate: ES, NQ, GC and CL.
+ - Register, lock in your username, pick one of 16 creator Companies to ride with, and you are in. Trading runs on Tradovate: ES, NQ, GC and CL.
A free signup in September. Eight matches from your own desk. A main stage in December. That is the whole path.
− Ready to go deeper — scoring, teams, the cut, resets and the full prize breakdown? Read the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide. Want to see the dashboard first? Follow the step-by-step walkthrough.
+ Ready to go deeper — scoring, Companies, the cut, resets and the full prize breakdown? Read the Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide. Want to see the dashboard first? Follow the step-by-step walkthrough.
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterPosition closing deadline changed from 4:59PM EST to 4:45PM EST.Sep 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
- We do not offer cash stocks, forex, or options. We do offer Single Stock Futures on Tradovate, which track the price of individual companies such as Tesla, Nvidia, and Apple as futures contracts. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
- What time must I close positions?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
− - All positions must be closed before 4:59PM EST.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
After
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
- We do not offer cash stocks, forex, or options. We do offer Single Stock Futures on Tradovate, which track the price of individual companies such as Tesla, Nvidia, and Apple as futures contracts. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
- What time must I close positions?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
+ - All positions must be closed before 4:45PM EST.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
- No. This includes opposing positions on the same instrument or on a correlated product, held in one account or across multiple accounts. Every account involved can be set to violation status.
- Can I trade on weekends?
- No, you cannot.
- Can I use a VPN or VPS?
- You cannot log in with VPN/VPS. After logging in normally, you may use VPS for trading at your own risk.
- Can I change my Tradovate Username and Password?
- No, do not change your Username or password as it will break the system.
- Do you allow scalping?
- Yes, we do. On funded accounts, to request a payout, over 50% of your trades must be held longer than 10 seconds AND over 50% of your profit must come from trades held longer than 10 seconds. This does not apply during an evaluation.
- Can I trade stocks/forex/options?
- We do not offer cash stocks, forex, or options. We do offer Single Stock Futures on Tradovate, which track the price of individual companies such as Tesla, Nvidia, and Apple as futures contracts. See Single Stock Futures (SSF).
- What time must I close positions?
Section: Trading Rules & Compliance:
− - All positions must be closed before 4:59PM EST.
+ - All positions must be closed before 4:45PM EST.
- What happens during CME exchange halts?
- CME halts stop trading across all platforms. Tradeify does not compensate for losses during CME halts as they affect all market participants equally.
- Is martingale strategy allowed?
- Yes, as long as you're not hedging. Be aware that martingale is high-risk - stay within your drawdown and daily loss limits.
- What is auto-liquidation?
- Auto-liquidation is a protective mechanism that closes your positions when you hit your daily loss limit or trailing drawdown threshold. It's not an error - it's designed to prevent further losses.
- Why can't I place trades?
- Your account is likely in Liquidation-Only mode due to hitting your Daily Loss Limit or drawdown threshold. DLL resets the next trading day; drawdown breaches may be permanent.
- What triggers account liquidation?
- Liquidation is triggered by: Daily Loss Limit (DLL), Maximum Loss Limit (MLL), or trailing drawdown threshold. Monitor your risk parameters to avoid unexpected liquidations.
Platform & Technical:
- What platforms are supported?
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterTotal prize pool reduced from $1.3 million to $1 million; Creator Division prize pool of $300,000 removed.Sep 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator teams, head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Updated this week
Table of contents
− Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1.3 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a team before you can trade. Team selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
Open 2
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 27 Oct | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M2 | Thu 29 Oct | Wed 28 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M3 | Tue 3 Nov | Mon 2 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M4 — Cut Day | Thu 5 Nov | Wed 4 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M5 | Tue 10 Nov | Mon 9 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M6 | Thu 12 Nov | Wed 11 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M7 | Tue 17 Nov | Mon 16 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M8 | Thu 19 Nov | Wed 18 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
Grand Final: Friday 11 December, Fort Lauderdale.
Prizes and payouts
Section: Prizes and payouts
− The total prize pool is $1,300,000 across the season.
| Pool
Open 1 | $300,000
Open 2 | $300,000
Grand Final | $400,000
− Creator Division | $300,000
Each league pays the top 500, on an identical structure.
Position | Traders | Prize each
5th | 1 | $10,000
6th – 10th | 5 | $8,000
11th – 25th | 15 | $4,000
26th – 50th | 25 | $2,000
51st – 150th | 100 | $525
151st – 500th | 350 | $250
Positions 1 to 4 are missing on purpose. The top four are not playing for a league prize any more — they are on their way to Fort Lauderdale to play for the $400,000 pool instead, where the lowest prize on the table is $13,000, more than 5th place earns here.
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You will need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise to receive any prize. If you do not already have a Rise account, we will send you an invite to set one up — open the email, accept the invite, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Once your account is verified, your payout is processed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder first, and if you still need help, contact Rise support directly at
Important Note: Payouts are sent out once the final placement on leaderboard are confirmed.
Prizes may be subject to tax depending on where you live. We recommend speaking to a tax professional.
After
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator teams, head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
+ Updated today
Table of contents
+ Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a team before you can trade. Team selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
Open 2
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 27 Oct | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M2 | Thu 29 Oct | Wed 28 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M3 | Tue 3 Nov | Mon 2 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M4 — Cut Day | Thu 5 Nov | Wed 4 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M5 | Tue 10 Nov | Mon 9 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M6 | Thu 12 Nov | Wed 11 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M7 | Tue 17 Nov | Mon 16 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M8 | Thu 19 Nov | Wed 18 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
Grand Final: Friday 11 December, Fort Lauderdale.
Prizes and payouts
Section: Prizes and payouts
+ The total prize pool is $1,000,000 across the season.
| Pool
Open 1 | $300,000
Open 2 | $300,000
Grand Final | $400,000
Each league pays the top 500, on an identical structure.
Position | Traders | Prize each
5th | 1 | $10,000
6th – 10th | 5 | $8,000
11th – 25th | 15 | $4,000
26th – 50th | 25 | $2,000
51st – 150th | 100 | $525
151st – 500th | 350 | $250
Positions 1 to 4 are missing on purpose. The top four are not playing for a league prize any more — they are on their way to Fort Lauderdale to play for the $400,000 pool instead, where the lowest prize on the table is $13,000, more than 5th place earns here.
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You will need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise to receive any prize. If you do not already have a Rise account, we will send you an invite to set one up — open the email, accept the invite, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Once your account is verified, your payout is processed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder first, and if you still need help, contact Rise support directly at
Important Note: Payouts are sent out once the final placement on leaderboard are confirmed.
Prizes may be subject to tax depending on where you live. We recommend speaking to a tax professional.
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help Center Skip to main content
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Tradeify HomeDiscord
Search for articles...
- All Collections
- Premier Trading League
- Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
Complete Premier Trading League (PTL) rules: free entry, KYC, registration dates, creator teams, head-to-head matches, scoring, Cut Day, resets, top-500 prizes, Rise payouts and the Grand Final.
Section: Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide
− Updated this week
+ Updated today
Table of contents
− Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1.3 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
+ Tradeify's flagship trading competition. Free to enter, $1 million on the line — eight matches, two leagues, and a live Grand Final in Fort Lauderdale on December 11. This article walks you through what PTL is, how it works, how to take part, and what is waiting at the end of the season.
⚠️ Before you enter — the essentials
- Registration for Open 1 runs Tuesday 8 September, 12:00 PM ET to Sunday 20 September, 11:59 PM ET. Open 1 starts Monday 21 September.
- Free to enter, one entry per person and one per household. No purchase, no subscription.
- All participants must be KYC verified.
- All trading is simulated. No real funds are ever deposited or at risk.
- You must pick a team before you can trade. Team selection happens in the Waiting Room.
- The Grand Final is in the United States. If you finish in the top 4 but cannot legally travel to the US, you are assigned 5th place instead and paid the 5th place prize. Tradeify does not provide visa sponsorship.
- Tradeify's standard restricted countries list applies.
What is the Premier Trading League?
The Premier Trading League is Tradeify's free-to-enter simulated trading competition, played from your Tradeify dashboard. Every match puts you head to head against one other trader for a full session. You score points from the profit you make and from beating your opponent, and those points move you up the league ladder.
Two leagues run back to back: Open 1 in September and October, and Open 2 in October and November. Each runs four weeks and eight matches, with $300,000 in prizes apiece. You can play one or both.
Finish in the top four of either league and you fly to Fort Lauderdale for the live Grand Final on December 11, where $400,000 is settled on stage — $180,000 of it to the champion. That is the whole path: a free signup in September, eight matches from your own desk, and a seat on a main stage in December.
Open 2
Match | Match day | Session opens
M1 | Tue 27 Oct | Mon 26 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M2 | Thu 29 Oct | Wed 28 Oct, 6:00 PM ET
M3 | Tue 3 Nov | Mon 2 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M4 — Cut Day | Thu 5 Nov | Wed 4 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M5 | Tue 10 Nov | Mon 9 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M6 | Thu 12 Nov | Wed 11 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M7 | Tue 17 Nov | Mon 16 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
M8 | Thu 19 Nov | Wed 18 Nov, 6:00 PM ET
Grand Final: Friday 11 December, Fort Lauderdale.
Prizes and payouts
Section: Prizes and payouts
− The total prize pool is $1,300,000 across the season.
+ The total prize pool is $1,000,000 across the season.
| Pool
Open 1 | $300,000
Open 2 | $300,000
Grand Final | $400,000
− Creator Division | $300,000
Each league pays the top 500, on an identical structure.
Position | Traders | Prize each
5th | 1 | $10,000
6th – 10th | 5 | $8,000
11th – 25th | 15 | $4,000
26th – 50th | 25 | $2,000
51st – 150th | 100 | $525
151st – 500th | 350 | $250
Positions 1 to 4 are missing on purpose. The top four are not playing for a league prize any more — they are on their way to Fort Lauderdale to play for the $400,000 pool instead, where the lowest prize on the table is $13,000, more than 5th place earns here.
Cash prizes are paid through Rise, the same payout method used across all Tradeify competitions. You will need a Rise account and must be KYC verified with Rise to receive any prize. If you do not already have a Rise account, we will send you an invite to set one up — open the email, accept the invite, and complete KYC with Riseworks. Once your account is verified, your payout is processed. If you cannot find the invite, check your spam folder first, and if you still need help, contact Rise support directly at
Important Note: Payouts are sent out once the final placement on leaderboard are confirmed.
Prizes may be subject to tax depending on where you live. We recommend speaking to a tax professional.
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite Program | Tradeify Help CenterWarning added that sim profits don't carry over to Elite Live accounts with $0 starting balance; eligibility rules changed to reference December 3, 2025 purchase date cutoff.Sep 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Eligibility for Tradeify Elite Accounts
Tradeify provides a highly flexible live progression system with:
- No Sim Funded profit cap, and
- No limit to how many times a trader can transition to Live.
Traders may transition to Elite Live status repeatedly, across any plan type.
A trader becomes eligible to be considered for a Tradeify Elite Live account once they meet one of the following minimum thresholds:
- 3 payouts on a single account, or
- 10 total payouts since the last live transition across all plan types
Measured:
- Since the last Live Transition, or
- Since the first purchase (if they have never transitioned to Live before)
Important:
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
After 4 weeks, they may purchase a new evaluation to re-enter the program.
Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
80/20 Profit Split: 80% of payouts go to the trader, 20% to Tradeify.
Section: Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
− Traders who qualify for live trading can choose between the Legacy Live program or the new Elite Live program. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. A discount is available on your first individual purchase in this mode, but it applies to single accounts only — bundles are excluded. After that first discounted purchase, all subsequent purchases are at full price.
After
+ ⚠️ No Sim profit carries over. Elite Live accounts are issued with a $0 starting balance. Any profit or progress made after your last successful payout is not included in the transition. Payouts you have already received are yours.
Eligibility for Tradeify Elite Accounts
Tradeify provides a highly flexible live progression system with:
- No Sim Funded profit cap, and
- No limit to how many times a trader can transition to Live.
Traders may transition to Elite Live status repeatedly, across any plan type.
A trader becomes eligible to be considered for a Tradeify Elite Live account once they meet one of the following minimum thresholds:
- 3 payouts on a single account, or
- 10 total payouts since the last live transition across all plan types
Measured:
- Since the last Live Transition, or
- Since the first purchase (if they have never transitioned to Live before)
Important:
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
After 4 weeks, they may purchase a new evaluation to re-enter the program.
Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
80/20 Profit Split: 80% of payouts go to the trader, 20% to Tradeify.
Section: Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
+ Traders whose accounts were purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the Legacy Live program and the Elite Live program. Accounts purchased on or after December 3, 2025 follow the Elite Live program only. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. A discount is available on your first individual purchase in this mode, but it applies to single accounts only — bundles are excluded. After that first discounted purchase, all subsequent purchases are at full price.
+ ⚠️ No Sim profit carries over. Elite Live accounts are issued with a $0 starting balance. Any profit or progress made after your last successful payout is not included in the transition. Payouts you have already received are yours.
Eligibility for Tradeify Elite Accounts
Tradeify provides a highly flexible live progression system with:
- No Sim Funded profit cap, and
- No limit to how many times a trader can transition to Live.
Traders may transition to Elite Live status repeatedly, across any plan type.
A trader becomes eligible to be considered for a Tradeify Elite Live account once they meet one of the following minimum thresholds:
- 3 payouts on a single account, or
- 10 total payouts since the last live transition across all plan types
Measured:
- Since the last Live Transition, or
- Since the first purchase (if they have never transitioned to Live before)
Important:
100K | $0 | $3,000 | $3,100
150K | $0 | $4,500 | $4,600
300K | $0 | $6,000 | $6,100
Reward Pools
Elite Live traders are eligible for Accelerator Reward Pools — performance-based rewards that unlock as you hit profit milestones on each account.
For full details on reward pool tiers, eligibility, and payout structure, see Tradeify Elite – Accelerator Reward Pools.
Failure & Cool-Off Policy
If a trader fails an Elite account:
They enter up to a 4-week cool-off period depending on live performance.
After 4 weeks, they may purchase a new evaluation to re-enter the program.
Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
80/20 Profit Split: 80% of payouts go to the trader, 20% to Tradeify.
Section: Payout Rules for Elite Accounts
− Traders who qualify for live trading can choose between the Legacy Live program or the new Elite Live program. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
+ Traders whose accounts were purchased before December 3, 2025 may choose between the Legacy Live program and the Elite Live program. Accounts purchased on or after December 3, 2025 follow the Elite Live program only. The Elite Live program is not retroactive — existing Legacy Live traders keep their original terms.
Daily Payouts: Traders may request payouts daily. Any amount above the trading capital may be withdrawn. If a payout brings the balance to $0, the Live Account will be closed.
What You Can Withdraw
You can ONLY withdraw profits you earn ABOVE your trading capital:
Example: Your 150K Elite account starts with $0 trading capital. You grow it to $15,000. You can withdraw the $15,000 profit (at 80/20 split = $12,000 for you).
Elite-Only Mode Eligibility
Tradeify reserves the right to designate certain traders as Elite-Only Mode based on performance, consistency, or internal risk assessment. Elite-Only mode traders can only trade via the Select plan.
When a trader is placed into Elite-Only Mode:
Direct Live Account on Select Pass: If the trader passes a Select evaluation while in Elite-Only Mode, they will skip the standard funded/sim phase and be issued a Live account directly.
Why We Use Elite-Only Mode: This designation is used for traders who show exceptional consistency or strong historical performance, have a payout track record that signals reduced risk, demonstrate behaviour aligned with professional trading standards, or require tighter oversight or a more controlled account structure.
Elite-Only Mode ensures that our highest-quality traders can progress faster — while also giving Tradeify a structured way to manage risk and reward.
If a trader is moved into Elite-Only Mode, they will be notified directly with full details of their setup.
Important Note: Once your account moves into Elite Only mode, your purchasing options change in a few specific ways. You'll only be able to buy from a select group of accounts rather than the full catalog. A discount is available on your first individual purchase in this mode, but it applies to single accounts only — bundles are excluded. After that first discounted purchase, all subsequent purchases are at full price.
PremierTradeify · KYC and AML Policy | Tradeify Help CenterIdentity verification timing clarified for Instant Funding accounts and added requirement for crypto purchases. TIER: notableSep 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard. For Instant Funding accounts it's part of your purchase; for evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X) it's required after you pass, before your funded account is activated. You can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
- Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required to activate your funded account: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluation accounts.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
- Instant Funding accounts: identity verification is part of your purchase
- Evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
Section: When is it required?
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
After
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard. For Instant Funding accounts it's part of your purchase; for evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X) it's required after you pass, before your funded account is activated. You can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
- Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required to activate your funded account: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluation accounts.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
- Instant Funding accounts: identity verification is part of your purchase
- Evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
Section: When is it required?
+ - Crypto purchases require identity verification at the time of purchase, regardless of account type.
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
Our KYC checks confirm a trader's real identity (government-issued ID plus a liveness selfie). Our AML screening checks every applicant against global sanctions lists, politically exposed persons (PEP) databases, and adverse media, and re-screens on an ongoing basis for the duration of the funded relationship.
You complete identity verification from your Tradeify dashboard. For Instant Funding accounts it's part of your purchase; for evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X) it's required after you pass, before your funded account is activated. You can start it at any time. Step-by-step details are below.
Overview: Two-Step Verification
Tradeify requires two separate verifications:
- Tradeify Identity Verification (KYC/AML) — in your Tradeify dashboard. Required to activate your funded account: at purchase for Instant Funding, or after you pass for evaluation accounts.
- Payout Provider Verification — through Rise. Required before your first payout.
Both verifications are required to comply with KYC (Know Your Customer) and AML (Anti-Money Laundering) regulations. These protect both you and Tradeify from fraud and ensure secure, lawful payouts.
Step 1: Tradeify Identity Verification
Tradeify's identity verification confirms you are who you say you are. This step is powered by Sumsub, who handles both our KYC (identity verification) and AML (anti-money-laundering screening) requirements in a single flow.
When is it required?
- Instant Funding accounts: identity verification is part of your purchase
- Evaluation accounts (2-Step, 1-Step, APE-X): identity verification is required after you pass, before your funded account is activated
Section: When is it required?
+ - Crypto purchases require identity verification at the time of purchase, regardless of account type.
- You can start it at any time from your dashboard — we recommend completing it early to avoid delays
How to complete Tradeify verification
- Log in to your Tradeify dashboard
- Navigate to the verification/KYC section
- Upload a valid government-issued ID (passport, driver's license, or national ID)
- Complete the liveness check (a brief selfie verification to confirm you match your ID)
- Wait for automated approval (typically within minutes)
After approval
Once your Tradeify verification is approved, you will receive an invitation to complete payout provider verification (Step 2).
If verification fails
If your verification is rejected, please contact Tradeify support for assistance. Common issues include blurry documents or mismatched information.
Step 2: Payout Provider Verification
PremierTradeify · Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies | Tradeify Help CenterOne payout request per account rule added; restriction on concurrent payout requests now stated across three sections. TIER: notableSep 11
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
Section: Overview: The Two Options
− Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative.
The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
− - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
− - Request payouts once eligible again
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
Scaling Parameters Overview
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. Keep in mind that your evaluation purchase gives you a set period to activate. If you don't activate your passed evaluation within the allowed timeframe, you may need to purchase a new evaluation.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 depending on account size — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,000 on a 50K account (since that's the cap). Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $3,500 daily cap with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
After
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
Section: Overview: The Two Options
+ Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
+ - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours. Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
+ - Request your next payout once you are eligible again and your previous request has been processed
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
Scaling Parameters Overview
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. Keep in mind that your evaluation purchase gives you a set period to activate. If you don't activate your passed evaluation within the allowed timeframe, you may need to purchase a new evaluation.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 depending on account size — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,000 on a 50K account (since that's the cap). Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $3,500 daily cap with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ Q: Can I request another payout while my previous one is still pending or processing?
+ A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually 24-48 hours — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
After successfully passing your Tradeify Select evaluation, you'll need to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines your withdrawal eligibility, payout frequency, and drawdown structure.
This article explains both payout options in detail to help you make an informed choice based on your trading style and goals.
The parameter tables below cover the 25K to 150K sizes. For the Select 300K, see 300K Select Account.
Overview: The Two Options
Think of this choice as selecting your trading path:
- 5-Day Payout Policy (Flex) - Traditional milestone-based payouts with larger caps and no Daily Loss Limit
- Daily Payout Policy (Daily) - Rapid-access payouts with daily eligibility but tighter risk parameters
Both policies lead to live trading eligibility at the same thresholds, and both use the same contract scaling structure. The primary differences are in payout frequency, withdrawal caps, and risk management requirements.
⚠️ Important: Shared Rule for All Subsequent Payouts
Section: Overview: The Two Options
− Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative.
+ Regardless of whether you choose Select Flex or Select Daily, the following rule applies to all payouts after your first: You must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. If you lose money after a payout, you must earn back those losses and become net positive for the current cycle before you can request another payout. This applies equally to both Flex and Daily — neither policy allows payouts while your cycle profit is negative. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time — you cannot submit a new request until your previous one has been processed (approved and paid, or denied).
The only differences between the two policies are payout frequency, withdrawal caps/formulas, and risk parameters (buffer, Daily Loss Limit). The loss recovery requirement is identical.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 'Select Flex' Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals. This policy offers the most trading flexibility with no Daily Loss Limit and wider drawdown parameters.
Account Parameters
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Maximum Drawdown | $1,000 | $2,000 | $3,000 | $4,500
Drawdown Mode | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day | End of Day
Daily Loss Limit | None | None | None | None
Consistency Rule | None | None | None | None
Starting Contracts | 1 mini / 10 micro | 2 mini / 20 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro | 3 mini / 30 micro
Max Contracts (Scaled) | 2 mini / 20 micro | 4 mini / 40 micro | 8 mini / 80 micro | 12 mini / 120 micro
Payout Structure
After the payout is completed, profit resets to zero and the next cycle begins.
If instead the trader had earned only $100:
- 2 × $100 = $200
- But the minimum payout is $250
- Not eligible yet — the trader needs at least $125 in profit to request the minimum $250 payout
If the trader had negative profit (lost money since last payout):
- Not eligible — must have positive profit since last payout to request
Subsequent Payouts (2nd Payout and Beyond)
For all payouts after your first, you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle in order to request a payout. This simply ensures traders have made at least some amount of money between requests. As long as you have positive net profit for the payout cycle and meet the buffer requirement, you are eligible for payout.
How Daily Payouts Work
- Trade until your account balance exceeds the buffer requirement
- At the end of the session and once your dashboard updates, you will be able to request a payout of your profits above the buffer, up to the payout cap (ensure you meet the Daily Continuity Rule if 2nd payout+).
Section: How Daily Payouts Work
− - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours.
+ - Receive your payout within 24-48 hours. Only one payout request can be open at a time — your next request cannot be submitted until this one has been processed.
- Continue trading to build additional profits above the buffer
− - Request payouts once eligible again
+ - Request your next payout once you are eligible again and your previous request has been processed
Best For
The Daily Payout Policy works well for traders who:
- Value frequent access to profits
- Trade consistently on a daily basis
- Prefer structured risk management with Daily Loss Limits
- Are comfortable with tighter drawdown parameters
- Want faster cash flow from smaller, regular withdrawals
Contract Scaling Plan (Funded Accounts Only)
Select Funded accounts use a progressive scaling system that increases your contract limits as your account equity grows. Scaling is calibrated at End of Day (EOD), meaning your contract limits update based on your closing balance each trading day.
Important: This scaling plan applies only to funded accounts. During evaluation, you have access to the full contract limits (2/20, 4/40, 8/80, or 12/120 depending on account size).
Scaling Parameters Overview
Parameter | 25K Account | 50K Account | 100K Account | 150K Account
Q: Do I have to choose immediately after passing?
A: You'll be prompted to choose when you activate the account. Take time to review both options before making your selection. Keep in mind that your evaluation purchase gives you a set period to activate. If you don't activate your passed evaluation within the allowed timeframe, you may need to purchase a new evaluation.
Q: Can I test both policies somehow?
A: No, there's no demo or testing option. Review the parameters carefully and choose the policy that best matches your trading approach.
Q: What happens if I breach my funded account?
A: Regardless of policy, a breach means your funded account is terminated. You would need to purchase and pass a new evaluation to receive another funded account.
Q: Does the buffer amount ever change?
A: No, the buffer amounts are fixed for each account size under the Daily Payout Policy and do not change throughout your account lifecycle.
Q: How does the Daily Continuity Rule work?
A: You must have profit greater than $0 since your last payout. You may then request up to 2× the profit earned since your last payout, capped at $600/$1,000/$1,500/$2,500 depending on account size — and your remaining balance must stay above the buffer (you cannot request a payout that would take your account into the buffer). For example, if you earned $250 in profit, you could request up to $500, as long as that keeps your balance above the buffer. If you earned $700, you can request up to $1,000 on a 50K account (since that's the cap). Minimum payout is $250. This applies to the 25K to 150K sizes. The Select 300K uses a $3,500 daily cap with a 50% new-profit requirement instead — see 300K Select Account.
Q: Does the Daily Continuity Rule apply to Select Flex (5-Day Policy) as well?
A: The Daily Continuity Rule (2× profit multiplier and daily payout caps) only applies to Select Daily. However, both policies share the same core requirement: you must have positive net profit during each payout cycle to be eligible for a payout. The difference is only in the withdrawal formula and caps — not in whether you need to recover losses first. Both Daily and Flex require you to earn back any losses from the current cycle before requesting another payout.
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ Q: Can I request another payout while my previous one is still pending or processing?
+ A: No. Only one payout request can be open on an account at a time, on both Select Daily and Select Flex. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved and paid, or denied) — usually 24-48 hours — then request your next payout once you are eligible again. Daily eligibility on Select Daily means you can become eligible again each session, not that requests can overlap.
Q: If I lose money after a payout, do I have to earn it all back before I can request another payout?
A: Yes, on both Select Flex and Select Daily. After each payout, your profit tracking resets to zero for the new payout cycle. If you lose money, your cycle profit goes negative. You must trade back to net positive for the current cycle before you are eligible for another payout request. This is true even if your overall account balance is still above the buffer. Example: If you take a payout and then lose $2,000 over the next few days, you need to earn back that $2,000 plus at least $1 more in profit before you can request your next payout — regardless of which payout policy you chose.
Q: Is the loss recovery requirement different between Select Flex and Select Daily?
A: No. Both policies require positive net profit during each payout cycle. The difference between the two policies is how much you can withdraw once you are eligible — not whether you need to recover losses first. On Daily, your payout is capped at 2x your cycle profit (up to the payout cap - depending on account size). On Flex, your payout is up to 50% of your total profits (up to the payout cap depending on account size). But both require you to be net positive for the cycle.
Q: After my first payout, is the 50% calculated from just the current cycle's profit or my total profits?
A: The 50% is calculated from your total profits (current balance minus starting balance), not just the profits from the current cycle. For example, if your starting balance was $50,000 and you're now at $54,000, your total profit is $4,000, so you're eligible to withdraw up to $2,000 (50% of $4,000), assuming you've met the 5 winning days requirement for this cycle.
Q: What happens to my drawdown after my first payout?
A: Your maximum trailing drawdown locks when your End of Day balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100. Once locked, the drawdown limit becomes a fixed floor at $100 above your starting balance and never moves up again. This applies to both Select Flex and Select Daily policies.
Lock trigger balances (EOD):
- 25K Account: $26,100 (Flex) / $26,100 (Daily) → Locks at $25,100
- 50K Account: $52,100 (Flex) / $52,100 (Daily) → Locks at $50,100
- 100K Account: $103,100 (Flex) / $102,600 (Daily) → Locks at $100,100
PremierTradeify · Growth Funded: Account Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterPayout requests cannot be resubmitted until the previous request is processed, a new restriction added. TIER: notableSep 11
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
- Daily account reconciliations occur between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST/EDT.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
− - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled.
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
After
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
- Daily account reconciliations occur between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST/EDT.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
+ - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of the Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded Account types.
⚠️ Maximum payout is a withdrawal cap — please read this first: The most you can withdraw in a single payout request is set by your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if your account balance is higher, you can only withdraw up to that cap per request; the rest stays in your account toward future payouts. The minimum balance figures below are what you must reach to qualify for a payout — they are not the amount you can withdraw.
Important Notes
- Daily account reconciliations occur between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST/EDT.
- This amount must be maintained until the payout request is approved.
- You will still be able to place trades after submitting a payout request. However, be aware that if you fail your account or fall below the minimum thresholds for a payout before the request is processed, your payout will be denied.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
− - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled.
+ - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Abide by the 35% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Minimum Trading Days: 5 or more of the Trading Days must show a profit greater than:
- $100 in profit for 25k accounts
- $150 in profit for 50k accounts
- $200 in profit for 100k accounts
- $250 in profit for 150k accounts
- The Trading Day count resets to zero after each successful payout.
- Account Balance Needed for Growth:
ACCOUNT SIZE | MIN BALANCE NEEDED
$25,000 | $26,500
PremierTradeify · Lightning Funded: Account Payout Policy | Tradeify Help CenterPayout requests cannot be resubmitted on an account until the previous request is processed. TIER: notableSep 11
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
− - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled.
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
After
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
+ - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
Traders receive 90% of the payout amount requested.
Traders can have a maximum of 5 total Simulated Funded Accounts with any combination of Growth, Select, and Lightning Funded account types.
⚠️ Profit Goal vs. Payout Amount — please read this first: Your Profit Goal (for example, $9,000 for Payout 1 on a $150K account) is the profit you must earn to unlock a payout request. It is not the amount you can withdraw.
Every payout is also subject to a maximum payout cap based on your account size and payout number (see the Maximum Payout Per Request table further down). Even if you earn more than the cap, you can only withdraw up to the cap for that payout. For example, on a $150K account you reach the $9,000 Payout 1 Profit Goal but can withdraw at most $3,000 on Payout 1 — the rest of your profit stays in the account toward future payouts.
Payout Guidelines
- Payout approvals require you to abide by the Tradeify Funded Trader Agreement.
- If you have more than one account, each account is treated independently. You may withdraw from each account according to the schedule below, provided you followed the rules for each account.
Section: Payout Guidelines
− - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled.
+ - Once you submit a payout request, it cannot be edited or canceled, and you cannot submit another payout request on that account until it has been processed (approved or denied).
Payout Requirements
Your account must satisfy all of the below criteria for EACH payout request in order to qualify.
- Consistency Rule: Meet the 20% Consistency Rule (see: What is the Consistency Rule?)
- Lightning Funded Accounts must follow a 20% Consistency Rule for the first payout, then 25% for the second payout, and 30% for all subsequent payouts.
Important Note: The gradually increasing consistency requirements apply to Lightning Funded accounts purchased AFTER September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST
- Existing accounts maintain their current consistency rules (20% for all payouts).
- Minimum Days Traded: No Minimum Trading Day Count. You can request a payout after any number of trading days, as long as you meet the Profit Goal and Consistency Rule.
- Payout Profit Goals: Payout Profit Goals are the profit you need to earn in between payout requests. After each payout, your profit goal resets and you must earn fresh profit from new trades to reach the next goal. Leftover profit from the previous cycle does not carry over.
Payout Profit Goal Table for Accounts purchased after September 12, 2025 at 8:00 AM EST:
Account Size | Payout 1 Profit Goal | Payout 2+ Profit Goal
$25,000 | $1,500 | $1,000
$50,000 | $3,000 | $2,000
PremierTradeify · Common FAQs | Tradeify Help CenterPayout processing time removed; new rule added that only one payout request per account can be open at a time.Sep 11
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard after 8 PM EST.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you see this message outside the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window (e.g., mid-day the next day), this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your Tradovate username and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
- Payouts are usually processed within 24 - 48 Hours.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
- Only once you request a payout. You'll receive an email to sign up with Rise and complete verification.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
After
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard after 8 PM EST.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you see this message outside the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window (e.g., mid-day the next day), this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your Tradovate username and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
- Payouts are usually processed within 24 - 48 Hours.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
+ - Can I request another payout while my previous one is still processing?
+ - No. Only one payout request can be open per account at a time. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved or denied), then request again once you're eligible.
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
- Only once you request a payout. You'll receive an email to sign up with Rise and complete verification.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
- If it's been 2+ days, check: (1) your account is still active (not expired) on the Billing page, (2) you have fewer than 5 funded accounts, (3) you've refreshed your dashboard after 8 PM EST.
- "Account creation in progress" message: If you see this message outside the 5-8 PM EST reconciliation window (e.g., mid-day the next day), this is NOT normal. Contact support immediately - the account may be stuck and require manual intervention.
- If still stuck after checking these, contact support with your Tradovate username and account number for investigation.
Payouts & Profit Sharing:
- How do simulated funded account profit shares work?
- It's a 90-10 Profit Split, you will get 90% of the payout amount requested.
- What payout methods are accepted?
- We process payouts via Riseworks and Plane. Options include bank transfer and cryptocurrency.
- Can I use PayPal for payouts?
- No, PayPal is not a supported payout method. Tradeify processes payouts through Rise (primary) and Plane (alternative). Rise supports bank transfers and cryptocurrency withdrawals.
- How long do payouts take to process?
- Payouts are usually processed within 24 - 48 Hours.
Section: Payouts & Profit Sharing:
+ - Can I request another payout while my previous one is still processing?
+ - No. Only one payout request can be open per account at a time. Wait until your current request has been processed (approved or denied), then request again once you're eligible.
- When do I need to complete KYC verification?
- Only once you request a payout. You'll receive an email to sign up with Rise and complete verification.
- Do you send 1099 tax forms?
- No, Rise does.
- How do I download receipts or invoices for my Tradeify expenses?
- You can download receipts (also called invoices, transaction records, or billing statements) for all your Tradeify purchases from the Billing page:
- Step 1: Go to the Billing page: app-f.tradeify.co/dashboard/billing
- Step 2: In the Transactions table, find the transaction you need
- Step 3: Click "View Transaction" in the Action column
- Step 4: Click the "Download" button to save your receipt/invoice
- Each receipt shows Transaction ID, Order ID, date, and amount - everything you need for tax purposes or expense documentation. You can download receipts for account purchases, activation fees, and all other Tradeify payments.
- Note: These receipts are for your expenses (what you paid Tradeify). For 1099 tax forms related to payout income (what Tradeify paid you), those come from Rise, our payout processor.
PremierTradeify · Select Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help CenterPayout caps increased at two account tiers: $1,000 to $1,250 and $1,500 to $1,750.Sep 10
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
− - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
- No minimum balance required - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
After
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
+ - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
- No minimum balance required - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
- Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
Section: Select Daily Payout Policy
− - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 caps)
+ - Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,250 / $1,750 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
- Both lead to live trading - Either policy provides a path to Tradeify Elite Live accounts
- No minimum balance required - Request payouts after 5 winning days regardless of account balance
- Drawdown locks at $100 above starting balance - When your EOD balance exceeds your drawdown amount by $100, your drawdown floor locks permanently (e.g., $25,100 for 25K, $50,100 for 50K, $100,100 for 100K, $150,100 for 150K)
Take time to review both options carefully.
For detailed information about each payout policy, withdrawal rules, and examples, please review: Select Flex and Select Daily Payout Policies
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Are there any ongoing fees after I pass the evaluation?
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League: Step-by-Step Dashboard Walkthrough | Tradeify Help CenterSep 8
PremierTradeify · Premier Trading League — Full Competition Guide | Tradeify Help CenterSep 8
PremierTradeify · The Premier Trading League is here | Tradeify Help CenterSep 8
PremierTradeify · Tradeify Elite Program | Tradeify Help CenterInactivity requirement added: Elite Live accounts must have at least one executed trade every 30 days or face closure. TIER: notableSep 8
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
Section: Inactivity Policy
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do I have to transition to Elite Live? Can I decline and keep my Sim Funded account?
A: Once you are selected for Elite Live transition, it is mandatory — you cannot decline. Here's how it works:
- Tradeify monitors individual account performance and selects traders for live transition at its discretion
- Tradeify reviews your performance and selects traders for transition
- Once selected, you MUST transition — this is not optional
- All Sim Funded and evaluation accounts close when you transition
You cannot keep your Sim Funded account running indefinitely. The timing of your transition is at Tradeify's discretion, but once selected, the transition is not optional.
Q: I have a Legacy Live account. Can I start new evaluations and qualify for Elite Live?
A: See the Sim and Live Account Restrictions section above. In short: you must close your Legacy Live account first. Once closed, you can start new evaluations and become eligible for Elite Live based on your account performance.
Q: Do payouts from my Legacy Live account count toward Elite eligibility?
A: No. Only payouts from Sim Funded accounts count toward Elite eligibility. Your Legacy Live account operates under Legacy Live rules. New funded accounts you purchase (after your Legacy Live closes) follow the current Elite program independently.
After
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
Section: Inactivity Policy
+ Inactivity Policy
+ Elite Live accounts must remain active to stay open. You are required to place at least one trade every 30 days on your Elite Live account.
+ If no trades are executed within a 30-day period, the account will be closed due to inactivity.
+ What counts as activity:
+ - At least one executed (filled) trade within the 30-day window
+ - Placing an order that is not filled, or logging into the platform without trading, does not count as activity
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do I have to transition to Elite Live? Can I decline and keep my Sim Funded account?
A: Once you are selected for Elite Live transition, it is mandatory — you cannot decline. Here's how it works:
- Tradeify monitors individual account performance and selects traders for live transition at its discretion
- Tradeify reviews your performance and selects traders for transition
- Once selected, you MUST transition — this is not optional
- All Sim Funded and evaluation accounts close when you transition
You cannot keep your Sim Funded account running indefinitely. The timing of your transition is at Tradeify's discretion, but once selected, the transition is not optional.
Q: I have a Legacy Live account. Can I start new evaluations and qualify for Elite Live?
A: See the Sim and Live Account Restrictions section above. In short: you must close your Legacy Live account first. Once closed, you can start new evaluations and become eligible for Elite Live based on your account performance.
Q: Do payouts from my Legacy Live account count toward Elite eligibility?
A: No. Only payouts from Sim Funded accounts count toward Elite eligibility. Your Legacy Live account operates under Legacy Live rules. New funded accounts you purchase (after your Legacy Live closes) follow the current Elite program independently.
Sim and Live Account Restrictions
You cannot have Sim Funded and Live Funded accounts active at the same time.
Sim and Live accounts require different data subscriptions that cannot run simultaneously. This restriction applies to your entire household.
If you have an ACTIVE Live account (Legacy or Elite):
- You cannot purchase or activate new evaluations
- You cannot open new Sim Funded accounts
- No one in your household can have Sim accounts while you have Live
After your Live account has FAILED or CLOSED:
- You can purchase new evaluations or funded accounts after the cool-off period
- New accounts follow current Elite program rules
- Tradeify monitors performance on your new accounts and may initiate a live transition at its discretion
- Payouts from your previous Simulated Accounts do NOT count toward the new Elite qualification
Section: Inactivity Policy
+ Inactivity Policy
+ Elite Live accounts must remain active to stay open. You are required to place at least one trade every 30 days on your Elite Live account.
+ If no trades are executed within a 30-day period, the account will be closed due to inactivity.
+ What counts as activity:
+ - At least one executed (filled) trade within the 30-day window
+ - Placing an order that is not filled, or logging into the platform without trading, does not count as activity
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do I have to transition to Elite Live? Can I decline and keep my Sim Funded account?
A: Once you are selected for Elite Live transition, it is mandatory — you cannot decline. Here's how it works:
- Tradeify monitors individual account performance and selects traders for live transition at its discretion
- Tradeify reviews your performance and selects traders for transition
- Once selected, you MUST transition — this is not optional
- All Sim Funded and evaluation accounts close when you transition
You cannot keep your Sim Funded account running indefinitely. The timing of your transition is at Tradeify's discretion, but once selected, the transition is not optional.
Q: I have a Legacy Live account. Can I start new evaluations and qualify for Elite Live?
A: See the Sim and Live Account Restrictions section above. In short: you must close your Legacy Live account first. Once closed, you can start new evaluations and become eligible for Elite Live based on your account performance.
Q: Do payouts from my Legacy Live account count toward Elite eligibility?
A: No. Only payouts from Sim Funded accounts count toward Elite eligibility. Your Legacy Live account operates under Legacy Live rules. New funded accounts you purchase (after your Legacy Live closes) follow the current Elite program independently.
PremierTradeify · Select Evaluation Accounts | Tradeify Help Center50% consistency add-on option added to SELECT Evaluation; payout caps adjusted for 5-Day Policy; minimum trading days requirement clarified.Sep 5
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The Tradeify Select Plan is our newest evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Section: How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
− Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Section: 25K Account Evaluation
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
- Maximum Contracts: 4 mini / 40 micro
Note: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original $2,500 profit target, including on reset.
100K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $6,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $3,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
- Maximum Contracts: 8 mini / 80 micro
150K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $9,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $4,500 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
- Maximum Contracts: 12 mini / 120 micro
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
− - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
- Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
Q: Does the consistency rule apply to SELECT funded accounts?
A: No, for SELECT accounts, the 40% consistency requirement only applies during the evaluation phase. Once you pass and move to a funded account, the consistency rule is removed regardless of which payout policy (Flex or Daily) you choose. Note: Growth Evaluation does NOT have a consistency rule at any stage.
Q: Does SELECT Evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: No, SELECT Evaluation does NOT have a daily loss limit during the evaluation phase. This is a key difference from Growth Evaluation, which DOES have a daily loss limit (soft breach). With SELECT, your only risk limit during evaluation is the End of Day trailing drawdown.
Q: Can I pass SELECT Evaluation in one day like Growth?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: No, SELECT Evaluation requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to the 40% consistency rule (no single day can represent more than 40% of your total profit). This differs from Growth Evaluation, which has no consistency rule and can be passed in as few as 1 trading day.
Q: What's the difference between SELECT and Growth Evaluation?
A: The main differences are: (1) SELECT requires 3+ days to pass due to consistency rules, while Growth can pass in 1 day. (2) SELECT has NO daily loss limit during evaluation, while Growth DOES have a daily loss limit. (3) SELECT lets you choose your payout policy (Flex or Daily) AFTER passing, while Growth has a fixed payout policy. See the comparison table at the top of this article for a full breakdown.
Q: How much profit can I make per day on SELECT Evaluation?
A: Any amount. The consistency rule does NOT cap how much you can profit on a single day. It only affects when you can pass: no single day can be more than 40% of your total profit. That is why SELECT requires a minimum of 3 trading days.
For SELECT 50K, the profit target is $3,000. No single day can exceed 40% of your total profit. To work out the total profit a big day requires, divide it by 0.40 - a $1,300 day needs $3,250 in total profit ($1,300 ÷ 0.40). A day at exactly 40% of your total meets the rule, and anything larger is still allowed - it just needs more total profit from your other days.
Example (SELECT 50K, $3,000 target):
- Day 1: +$1,000
- Day 2: +$1,000
- Day 3: +$1,000
- Total: $3,000 (target met)
- Biggest day = 33.3% of total ($1,000 ÷ $3,000), which is under the 40% limit
Key Point: You need at least 3 trading days to pass SELECT Evaluation - you cannot pass in 1-2 days even if you hit the profit target early. This is the main difference from Growth Evaluation, which can be passed in as few as 1 day.
After
The Tradeify Select Plan is our newest evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Section: How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
+ Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) 50% Add-on is available | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Section: 25K Account Evaluation
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 4 mini / 40 micro
Note: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original $2,500 profit target, including on reset.
100K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $6,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $3,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 8 mini / 80 micro
150K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $9,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $4,500 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 12 mini / 120 micro
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
+ - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
- Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
Q: Does the consistency rule apply to SELECT funded accounts?
A: No, for SELECT accounts, the 40% consistency requirement only applies during the evaluation phase. Once you pass and move to a funded account, the consistency rule is removed regardless of which payout policy (Flex or Daily) you choose. Note: Growth Evaluation does NOT have a consistency rule at any stage.
Q: Does SELECT Evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: No, SELECT Evaluation does NOT have a daily loss limit during the evaluation phase. This is a key difference from Growth Evaluation, which DOES have a daily loss limit (soft breach). With SELECT, your only risk limit during evaluation is the End of Day trailing drawdown.
Q: Can I pass SELECT Evaluation in one day like Growth?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
+ A: No, SELECT Evaluation requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to the 40% consistency rule (50% consistency add-on available which makes it possible to pass in 2 days.) This differs from Growth Evaluation, which has no consistency rule and can be passed in as few as 1 trading day.
Q: What's the difference between SELECT and Growth Evaluation?
A: The main differences are: (1) SELECT requires 3+ days to pass due to consistency rules, while Growth can pass in 1 day. (2) SELECT has NO daily loss limit during evaluation, while Growth DOES have a daily loss limit. (3) SELECT lets you choose your payout policy (Flex or Daily) AFTER passing, while Growth has a fixed payout policy. See the comparison table at the top of this article for a full breakdown.
Q: How much profit can I make per day on SELECT Evaluation?
A: Any amount. The consistency rule does NOT cap how much you can profit on a single day. It only affects when you can pass: no single day can be more than 40% of your total profit. That is why SELECT requires a minimum of 3 trading days.
For SELECT 50K, the profit target is $3,000. No single day can exceed 40% of your total profit. To work out the total profit a big day requires, divide it by 0.40 - a $1,300 day needs $3,250 in total profit ($1,300 ÷ 0.40). A day at exactly 40% of your total meets the rule, and anything larger is still allowed - it just needs more total profit from your other days.
Example (SELECT 50K, $3,000 target):
- Day 1: +$1,000
- Day 2: +$1,000
- Day 3: +$1,000
- Total: $3,000 (target met)
- Biggest day = 33.3% of total ($1,000 ÷ $3,000), which is under the 40% limit
Key Point: You need at least 3 trading days to pass SELECT Evaluation - you cannot pass in 1-2 days even if you hit the profit target early. This is the main difference from Growth Evaluation, which can be passed in as few as 1 day.
The Tradeify Select Plan is our newest evaluation account offering that combines a unified evaluation process with flexible funded account options. This plan is designed to provide traders with a streamlined path to funded trading while giving you control over your payout strategy based on your trading style and goals.
How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
SELECT Evaluation is NOT the same as Growth Evaluation. Here are the key differences:
Feature | SELECT Evaluation | Growth Evaluation
Minimum Trading Days | 3 days (due to consistency rule) | 1 day (can pass immediately)
Section: How SELECT Differs from Growth Evaluation
− Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) | None
+ Consistency Rule | Yes - 40% (no single day > 40% of profit) 50% Add-on is available | None
Daily Loss Limit | None during evaluation | Yes (soft breach)
Payout Policy Choice | Choose AFTER passing (Flex or Daily) | Fixed policy (no choice)
In summary: SELECT Evaluation requires more trading days (minimum 3) due to the consistency rule, but gives you more flexibility with NO daily loss limit during evaluation and the ability to choose your payout policy after you pass. Growth Evaluation lets you pass faster (even in 1 day) but has a daily loss limit and a fixed payout policy.
What Makes Select Different?
Select simplifies the evaluation process by removing the confusion of choosing between multiple evaluation options. Everyone starts with the same evaluation rules, and you only make your choice when you pass and move to the funded stage.
After passing your evaluation, you'll choose between two distinct payout policies, each designed for different trading approaches:
- 5-Day Payout Policy - For traders who prefer traditional milestone-based payouts with larger withdrawal caps
- Daily Payout Policy - For traders who want faster access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility
Available Account Sizes
Select is available in five account sizes:
- $25,000
- $50,000
- $100,000
- $150,000
- $300,000 (limited release)
The $300,000 size is a limited release with its own purchase requirements: KYC before purchase, no resets, a maximum of 3 per user, and it does not count toward the 15-evaluation monthly limit. Its evaluation, funded, and scaling parameters are in 300K Select Account.
Evaluation Phase (Same for All Traders)
The evaluation phase uses a single set of rules designed to assess your trading skill and consistency:
25K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $1,500
- Maximum Drawdown: $1,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
Section: 25K Account Evaluation
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 1 mini / 10 micro
50K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $3,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $2,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 4 mini / 40 micro
Note: Accounts purchased before the new dashboard launch retain their original $2,500 profit target, including on reset.
100K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $6,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $3,000 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 8 mini / 80 micro
150K Account Evaluation
- Profit Target: $9,000
- Maximum Drawdown: $4,500 (End of Day)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
− - Consistency Requirement: 40%
+ - Consistency Requirement: 40% (50% add-on available)
- Maximum Contracts: 12 mini / 120 micro
Key Evaluation Features
- No Daily Loss Limit: Trade without daily loss restrictions during your evaluation. Your trailing max drawdown floor still applies at all times.
- End of Day Drawdown: Your drawdown is calculated at session close, so intraday swings do not move the limit. The limit is still enforced in real time - touching it fails the account immediately.
- 40% Consistency Rule: No single trading day can represent more than 40% of your total profit. This encourages stable performance across multiple days.
- No Activation Fees: Start trading immediately after purchasing your evaluation with no additional costs.
- Tier 1 News Trading: You're allowed to trade during major news events.
- Instant Activation: Once you meet all evaluation conditions, you can instantly activate your funded account directly from the dashboard.
Purchase Restrictions
To promote sustainable, long-term trading practices and ensure every trader has fair access, we've introduced limits on the number of account and reset purchases:
- Maximum 15 evaluations can be purchased within any 30-day period since your first purchase.
- Each evaluation can be reset up to 10 times within a 30-day period
- You can hold up to 5 funded accounts simultaneously
- Select 300K is excluded from the 15-evaluation limit, has no resets, and is capped at 3 accounts per user — see 300K Select Account
Making Your Choice After Passing
Once you successfully pass your evaluation, you'll be prompted to choose between two distinct payout policies for your funded account. This decision is permanent for that account and determines how you'll access your profits.
Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
The 5-Day Payout Policy is designed for traders who prefer accumulating larger profit milestones before requesting withdrawals:
- Payout Frequency: Every 5 winning days
Section: Select Flex (5-Day Payout Policy)
− - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $3,000 / $4,000 / $5,000 caps)
+ - Payout Caps: Up to 50% of profits ($1,250 / $2,500 / $3,500 / $4,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: None
- Drawdown: End of Day only
- Best For: Traders who want flexibility from having no Daily Loss Limit and larger, less frequent withdrawals
Select Daily Payout Policy
The Daily Payout Policy is designed for traders who value rapid access to profits with daily withdrawal eligibility:
- Payout Frequency: Daily eligibility after meeting buffer requirement
- Payout Caps: Smaller, more frequent ($600 / $1,000 / $1,500 / $2,500 caps)
- Daily Loss Limit: Yes ($500 / $1,000 / $1,250 / $1,750)
- Buffer System: Required ($1,100 / $2,100 / $2,600 / $3,600)
- Best For: Traders who want consistent daily cash flow and structured risk management
Important Considerations
- Your choice is permanent - Once selected, you cannot change payout policies for that account
A: No. Once you pass your SELECT Evaluation and activate your funded account, your evaluation ends automatically. There are no ongoing fees for funded accounts and no activation fee - you simply activate and start trading with no ongoing costs.
Q: Can I switch between payout policies after I choose on my SELECT account?
A: No, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, once you select your payout policy (Flex or Daily), that choice is permanent for that funded account. This payout choice is unique to SELECT - Growth Evaluation has a fixed payout policy with no choice. If you want to try the other SELECT policy, you would need to pass another SELECT Evaluation and select the alternative option.
Q: Do I need to pass the SELECT Evaluation again if I fail my funded account?
A: Yes, for SELECT accounts, if your funded account breaches (hits the drawdown limit), you must start over with a new SELECT Evaluation purchase. This is the same for all evaluation types including Growth.
Q: Can I have some SELECT accounts on Flex and others on Daily payout?
A: Yes, for SELECT Evaluation accounts, if you pass multiple evaluations, you can choose different payout policies (Flex or Daily) for each funded account, up to your maximum of 5 funded accounts total. This flexibility is unique to SELECT - Growth accounts have a fixed payout policy.
Q: Does the consistency rule apply to SELECT funded accounts?
A: No, for SELECT accounts, the 40% consistency requirement only applies during the evaluation phase. Once you pass and move to a funded account, the consistency rule is removed regardless of which payout policy (Flex or Daily) you choose. Note: Growth Evaluation does NOT have a consistency rule at any stage.
Q: Does SELECT Evaluation have a Daily Loss Limit?
A: No, SELECT Evaluation does NOT have a daily loss limit during the evaluation phase. This is a key difference from Growth Evaluation, which DOES have a daily loss limit (soft breach). With SELECT, your only risk limit during evaluation is the End of Day trailing drawdown.
Q: Can I pass SELECT Evaluation in one day like Growth?
Section: Frequently Asked Questions
− A: No, SELECT Evaluation requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to the 40% consistency rule (no single day can represent more than 40% of your total profit). This differs from Growth Evaluation, which has no consistency rule and can be passed in as few as 1 trading day.
+ A: No, SELECT Evaluation requires a minimum of 3 trading days due to the 40% consistency rule (50% consistency add-on available which makes it possible to pass in 2 days.) This differs from Growth Evaluation, which has no consistency rule and can be passed in as few as 1 trading day.
Q: What's the difference between SELECT and Growth Evaluation?
A: The main differences are: (1) SELECT requires 3+ days to pass due to consistency rules, while Growth can pass in 1 day. (2) SELECT has NO daily loss limit during evaluation, while Growth DOES have a daily loss limit. (3) SELECT lets you choose your payout policy (Flex or Daily) AFTER passing, while Growth has a fixed payout policy. See the comparison table at the top of this article for a full breakdown.
Q: How much profit can I make per day on SELECT Evaluation?
A: Any amount. The consistency rule does NOT cap how much you can profit on a single day. It only affects when you can pass: no single day can be more than 40% of your total profit. That is why SELECT requires a minimum of 3 trading days.
For SELECT 50K, the profit target is $3,000. No single day can exceed 40% of your total profit. To work out the total profit a big day requires, divide it by 0.40 - a $1,300 day needs $3,250 in total profit ($1,300 ÷ 0.40). A day at exactly 40% of your total meets the rule, and anything larger is still allowed - it just needs more total profit from your other days.
Example (SELECT 50K, $3,000 target):
- Day 1: +$1,000
- Day 2: +$1,000
- Day 3: +$1,000
- Total: $3,000 (target met)
- Biggest day = 33.3% of total ($1,000 ÷ $3,000), which is under the 40% limit
Key Point: You need at least 3 trading days to pass SELECT Evaluation - you cannot pass in 1-2 days even if you hit the profit target early. This is the main difference from Growth Evaluation, which can be passed in as few as 1 day.
PremierTradeify · Rules: Restricted Countries | Tradeify Help CenterRestricted country list reorganized with 8 countries added (Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Macao, Palestine, Tajikistan) and formatting changed.Sep 4
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Completely Restricted Countries
Individuals or entities residing in the following restricted countries are prohibited from accessing Tradeify's services:
A-C | D-L | M-S | S-Z
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
− Afghanistan | Democratic Republic of Congo | Mauritius | Somalia
− Albania | Ecuador | Malaysia | South Sudan
− Algeria | Ethiopia | Mongolia | Sri Lanka
− Andorra | Ghana | Morocco | Sudan
− Angola | Iceland | Montenegro | Syria
− Bahamas | Indonesia | Nicaragua | Trinidad and Tobago
− Barbados | Iran | North Korea | Tunisia
− Belarus | Iraq | Pakistan | Turkey
− Bosnia & Herzegovina | Israel | Panama | Uganda
− Botswana | Jamaica | Papua New Guinea | Ukraine
− Bulgaria | Kosovo | Russia | Venezuela
− Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Vietnam
− Burundi | Lebanon | | Yemen
− Cambodia | Liberia | | Zimbabwe
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
− Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kosovo, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.
After
Completely Restricted Countries
Individuals or entities residing in the following restricted countries are prohibited from accessing Tradeify's services:
A-C | D-L | M-S | S-Z
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
+ Afghanistan | Democratic Republic of Congo | Macao | Somalia
+ Albania | Ecuador | Mauritius | South Sudan
+ Algeria | Ethiopia | Malaysia | Sri Lanka
+ Andorra | Ghana | Mongolia | Sudan
+ Angola | Iceland | Morocco | Syria
+ Antarctica | Indonesia | Montenegro | Tajikistan
+ Azerbaijan | Iran | Nicaragua | Trinidad and Tobago
+ Bahamas | Iraq | North Korea | Tunisia
+ Barbados | Israel | Pakistan | Turkey
+ Belarus | Jamaica | Panama | Uganda
+ Bosnia & Herzegovina | Kazakhstan | Palestine | Ukraine
+ Botswana | Kosovo | Papua New Guinea | Venezuela
+ Bulgaria | Kyrgyzstan | Russia | Vietnam
+ Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Yemen
+ Burundi | Lebanon | | Zimbabwe
+ Cambodia | Liberia | |
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
+ Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.
Completely Restricted Countries
Individuals or entities residing in the following restricted countries are prohibited from accessing Tradeify's services:
A-C | D-L | M-S | S-Z
Section: Completely Restricted Countries
− Afghanistan | Democratic Republic of Congo | Mauritius | Somalia
− Albania | Ecuador | Malaysia | South Sudan
− Algeria | Ethiopia | Mongolia | Sri Lanka
− Andorra | Ghana | Morocco | Sudan
− Angola | Iceland | Montenegro | Syria
− Bahamas | Indonesia | Nicaragua | Trinidad and Tobago
− Barbados | Iran | North Korea | Tunisia
− Belarus | Iraq | Pakistan | Turkey
− Bosnia & Herzegovina | Israel | Panama | Uganda
− Botswana | Jamaica | Papua New Guinea | Ukraine
− Bulgaria | Kosovo | Russia | Venezuela
− Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Vietnam
− Burundi | Lebanon | | Yemen
− Cambodia | Liberia | | Zimbabwe
+ Afghanistan | Democratic Republic of Congo | Macao | Somalia
+ Albania | Ecuador | Mauritius | South Sudan
+ Algeria | Ethiopia | Malaysia | Sri Lanka
+ Andorra | Ghana | Mongolia | Sudan
+ Angola | Iceland | Morocco | Syria
+ Antarctica | Indonesia | Montenegro | Tajikistan
+ Azerbaijan | Iran | Nicaragua | Trinidad and Tobago
+ Bahamas | Iraq | North Korea | Tunisia
+ Barbados | Israel | Pakistan | Turkey
+ Belarus | Jamaica | Panama | Uganda
+ Bosnia & Herzegovina | Kazakhstan | Palestine | Ukraine
+ Botswana | Kosovo | Papua New Guinea | Venezuela
+ Bulgaria | Kyrgyzstan | Russia | Vietnam
+ Burma (Myanmar) | Laos | | Yemen
+ Burundi | Lebanon | | Zimbabwe
+ Cambodia | Liberia | |
Central African Republic | Libya | |
Côte d'Ivoire | | |
Crimea | | |
Cuba | | |
− Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kosovo, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
+ Full alphabetical list (58 countries): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Antarctica, Azerbaijan, Bahamas, Barbados, Belarus, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Burma (Myanmar), Burundi, Cambodia, Central African Republic, Crimea, Cuba, Côte d'Ivoire, Democratic Republic of Congo, Ecuador, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jamaica, Kazakhstan, Kosovo, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius, Mongolia, Montenegro, Morocco, Nicaragua, North Korea, Pakistan, Panama, Palestine, Papua New Guinea, Russia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela, Vietnam, Yemen, Zimbabwe.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trade while traveling to a restricted country?
A: Yes. These restrictions apply to your country of residency (where you permanently live), not your current physical location. If you are a resident of an eligible country (like the US) but traveling to or vacationing in a restricted country, you can continue trading normally.
Q: I live in a restricted country but I'm currently traveling elsewhere. Can I trade?
A: No. If your permanent residence is in a restricted country, you cannot access Tradeify's services regardless of your current location.
Live Account Eligibility
If your application for a Live Account is denied, you will not be permitted to return to the Simulated stage.